fortune-rtfm

if - "use" a Perl module if a condition holds (also can "no" a module)
The "if" module is used to conditionally load or unload another module.  The construct
will load MODULE only if CONDITION evaluates to true.  The above statement has no effect unless
"CONDITION" is true.  If the CONDITION does evaluate to true, then the above line has the same effect as:
The use of "=>" above provides necessary quoting of "MODULE".  If you don't use the fat comma (eg you
%
select — synchronous I/O multiplexing
#include <sys/select.h>
int select(int nfds, fd_set *restrict readfds,
fd_set *restrict writefds, fd_set *restrict errorfds,
struct timeval *restrict timeout);
Refer to pselect().
%
time - time a simple command or give resource usage
time [options] command [arguments...]
The  time  command  runs  the specified program command with the given arguments.  When command finishes,
time writes a message to standard error giving timing statistics about this program run.   These  statis‐
tics consist of (i) the elapsed real time between invocation and termination, (ii) the user CPU time (the
pathname (something like /usr/bin/time).
%
alias — define or display aliases
alias [alias-name[=string]...]
The  alias utility shall create or redefine alias definitions or write the values of existing alias defi‐
nitions to standard output. An alias definition provides a string value that shall replace a command name
An  alias  definition shall affect the current shell execution environment and the execution environments
%
bg — run jobs in the background
bg [job_id...]
If  job  control  is  enabled (see the description of set −m), the bg utility shall resume suspended jobs
ground  jobs.  If  the  job specified by job_id is already a running background job, the bg utility shall
have no effect and shall exit successfully.
Using bg to place a job into the background shall cause its process ID to become ``known in  the  current
%
bind — bind a name to a socket
#include <sys/socket.h>
int bind(int socket, const struct sockaddr *address,
socklen_t address_len);
The  bind()  function  shall  assign  a local socket address address to a socket identified by descriptor
socket that has no local socket address assigned. Sockets created with the  socket()  function  are  ini‐
tially unnamed; they are identified only by their address family.
%
break — exit from for, while, or until loop
break [n]
The  break  utility shall exit from the smallest enclosing for, while, or until loop, if any; or from the
nth enclosing loop if n is specified. The value of n is an unsigned decimal integer greater than or equal
outermost enclosing loop shall be exited. Execution shall continue with the command immediately following
the loop.
%
cd — change the working directory
cd [−L|−P] [directory]
cd −
The cd utility shall change the working directory of the current shell execution environment (see Section
the  symbol  curpath  represents  an intermediate value used to simplify the description of the algorithm
used by cd.  There is no requirement that curpath be made visible to the application.)
%
command — execute a simple command
command [−p] command_name [argument...]
command [−p][−v|−V] command_name
The  command  utility  shall  cause the shell to treat the arguments as a simple command, suppressing the
If the command_name is the same as the name of one of the special built-in utilities, the special proper‐
%
continue — continue for, while, or until loop
continue [n]
The  continue  utility shall return to the top of the smallest enclosing for, while, or until loop, or to
while  or until loop or performing the next assignment of a for loop, and re-executing the loop if appro‐
priate.
%
echo - display a line of text
echo [SHORT-OPTION]... [STRING]...
echo LONG-OPTION
Echo the STRING(s) to standard output.
-n     do not output the trailing newline
-e     enable interpretation of backslash escapes
-E     disable interpretation of backslash escapes (default)
--help display this help and exit
%
eval — construct command by concatenating arguments
eval [argument...]
The  eval  utility  shall construct a command by concatenating arguments together, separating each with a
<space> character.  The constructed command shall be read and executed by the shell.
None.
%
exec — execute commands and open, close, or copy file descriptors
exec [command [argument...]]
The exec utility shall open, close, and/or copy file descriptors as specified by any redirections as part
of the command.
are  opened  with  associated  redirection  statements,  it is unspecified whether those file descriptors
remain open when the shell invokes another utility.  Scripts concerned that  child  shells  could  misuse
%
exit — cause the shell to exit
exit [n]
The  exit  utility  shall  cause the shell to exit with the exit status specified by the unsigned decimal
undefined.
A  trap on EXIT shall be executed before the shell terminates, except when the exit utility is invoked in
%
export — set the export attribute for variables
export name[=word]...
export −p
The  shell  shall  give the export attribute to the variables corresponding to the specified names, which
shall cause them to be in the environment of subsequently executed commands. If the name of a variable is
followed by =word, then the value of that variable shall be set to word.
%
false - do nothing, unsuccessfully
false [ignored command line arguments]
false OPTION
Exit with a status code indicating failure.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
%
fc — process the command history list
fc [−r] [−e editor] [first [last]]
fc −l [−nr] [first [last]]
fc −s [old=new] [first]
The  fc  utility  shall list, or shall edit and re-execute, commands previously entered to an interactive
sh.
%
fg — run jobs in the foreground
fg [job_id]
If  job  control  is  enabled (see the description of set −m), the fg utility shall move a background job
Using fg to place a job into the foreground shall remove its process ID from the list of those ``known in
%
getopts — parse utility options
getopts optstring name [arg...]
The  getopts utility shall retrieve options and option-arguments from a list of parameters. It shall sup‐
Each  time it is invoked, the getopts utility shall place the value of the next option in the shell vari‐
able specified by the name operand and the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell  vari‐
%
hash — remember or report utility locations
hash [utility...]
hash −r
The  hash utility shall affect the way the current shell environment remembers the locations of utilities
fied,  it  shall add utility locations to its list of remembered locations or it shall purge the contents
of the list. When no arguments are specified, it shall report on the contents of the list.
%
history - GNU History Library
Many  programs  read input from the user a line at a time.  The GNU History library is able to keep track
of those lines, associate arbitrary data with each line, and utilize information from previous  lines  in
composing new ones.
HISTORY EXPANSION
The  history  library  supports a history expansion feature that is identical to the history expansion in
History expansions introduce words from the history list into the input stream, making it easy to  repeat
commands, insert the arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or fix errors in previ‐
ous commands quickly.
%
jobs — display status of jobs in the current session
jobs [−l|−p] [job_id...]
The jobs utility shall display the status of jobs that were started in the current shell environment; see
When jobs reports the termination status of a job, the shell shall remove its process ID from the list of
%
kill - terminate a process
kill [-signal|-s signal|-p] [-q value] [-a] [--] pid|name...
kill -l [number] | -L
The  command  kill sends the specified signal to the specified processes or process groups.  If no signal
caught.
Most modern shells have a builtin kill function, with a usage rather  similar  to  that  of  the  command
described  here.  The --all, --pid, and --queue options, and the possibility to specify processes by com‐
mand name, are local extensions.
If signal is 0, then no actual signal is sent, but error checking is still performed.
%
login, logout - write utmp and wtmp entries
#include <utmp.h>
void login(const struct utmp *ut);
int logout(const char *ut_line);
Link with -lutil.
The  utmp  file records who is currently using the system.  The wtmp file records all logins and logouts.
The function login() takes the supplied struct utmp, ut, and writes it to both  the  utmp  and  the  wtmp
file.
%
printf - format and print data
printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]...
printf OPTION
Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT, or execute according to OPTION:
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
FORMAT controls the output as in C printf.  Interpreted sequences are:
\"     double quote
%
pwd - print name of current/working directory
pwd [OPTION]...
Print the full filename of the current working directory.
-L, --logical
use PWD from environment, even if it contains symlinks
-P, --physical
avoid all symlinks
--help display this help and exit
--version
%
read — read a line from standard input
read [−r] var...
The read utility shall read a single line from standard input.
By default, unless the −r option is specified, <backslash> shall act as an escape character. An unescaped
<backslash> shall preserve the literal value of the following character, with the exception  of  a  <new‐
line>.   If  a <newline> follows the <backslash>, the read utility shall interpret this as line continua‐
tion. The <backslash> and <newline> shall be removed before splitting the input into  fields.  All  other
%
readonly — set the readonly attribute for variables
readonly name[=word]...
readonly −p
The  variables  whose  names are specified shall be given the readonly attribute. The values of variables
with the readonly attribute cannot be changed by subsequent assignment, nor can those variables be  unset
by  the  unset  utility.  If the name of a variable is followed by =word, then the value of that variable
shall be set to word.
%
return — return from a function or dot script
return [n]
The  return  utility  shall  cause the shell to stop executing the current function or dot script. If the
shell is not currently executing a function or dot script, the results are unspecified.
None.
%
set — set or unset options and positional parameters
set [−abCefhmnuvx] [−o option] [argument...]
set [+abCefhmnuvx] [+o option] [argument...]
set −− [argument...]
set −o
set +o
%
shift — shift positional parameters
shift [n]
the new number of positional parameters.
The value n shall be an unsigned decimal integer less than or equal to the value of the special parameter
%
test - check file types and compare values
test EXPRESSION
test
[ EXPRESSION ]
[ ]
[ OPTION
Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
times — write process times
times
The  times  utility  shall  write  the accumulated user and system times for the shell and for all of its
child processes, in the following POSIX locale format:
"%dm%fs %dm%fs\n%dm%fs %dm%fs\n", <shell user minutes>,
<shell user seconds>, <shell system minutes>,
<shell system seconds>, <children user minutes>,
%
trap — trap signals
trap n [condition...]
trap [action condition...]
If  the  first  operand is an unsigned decimal integer, the shell shall treat all operands as conditions,
and shall reset each condition to the default value. Otherwise, if  there  are  operands,  the  first  is
treated as an action and the remaining as conditions.
If  action is '−', the shell shall reset each condition to the default value. If action is null (""), the
%
true - do nothing, successfully
true [ignored command line arguments]
true OPTION
Exit with a status code indicating success.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
%
type — write a description of command type
type name...
The type utility shall indicate how each argument would be interpreted if used as a command name.
None.
OPERANDS
%
ulimit — set or report file size limit
ulimit [−f] [blocks]
The  ulimit utility shall set or report the file-size writing limit imposed on files written by the shell
increase the limit.
%
umask — get or set the file mode creation mask
umask [−S] [mask]
The  umask  utility shall set the file mode creation mask of the current shell execution environment (see
affect the initial value of the file permission bits of subsequently created files. If umask is called in
a subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of the following:
%
unalias — remove alias definitions
unalias alias-name...
unalias −a
Substitution.  The aliases shall be removed from the current shell  execution  environment;  see  Section
%
unset — unset values and attributes of variables and functions
unset [−fv] name...
Each variable or function specified by name shall be unset.
If  −v  is  specified, name refers to a variable name and the shell shall unset it and remove it from the
environment. Read-only variables cannot be unset.
If −f is specified, name refers to a function and the shell shall unset the function definition.
%
wait — await process completion
wait [pid...]
last command in each element of the asynchronous list shall become known in the current  shell  execution
If  the wait utility is invoked with no operands, it shall wait until all process IDs known to the invok‐
ing shell have terminated and exit with a zero exit status.
%
timedatectl - Control the system time and date
The following options are understood:
--no-ask-password
Do not query the user for authentication for privileged operations.
--adjust-system-clock
%
iptables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
ip6tables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
iptables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
ip6tables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
iptables-save  and  ip6tables-save  are used to dump the contents of IP or IPv6 Table in easily parseable
format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
-M, --modprobe modprobe_program
Specify the path to the modprobe program. By default, iptables-save  will  inspect  /proc/sys/ker‐
nel/modprobe to determine the executable's path.
%
c_rehash - Create symbolic links to files named by the hash values
c_rehash [-old] [-h] [-n] [-v] [ directory...]
c_rehash scans directories and calculates a hash value of each ".pem", ".crt", ".cer", or ".crl" file in
the specified directory list and creates symbolic links for each file, where the name of the link is the
as many programs that use OpenSSL require directories to be set up like this in order to find
certificates.
If any directories are named on the command line, then those are processed in turn. If not, then the
SSL_CERT_DIR environment variable is consulted; this shold be a colon-separated list of directories, like
the Unix PATH variable.  If that is not set then the default directory (installation-specific but often
/usr/local/ssl/certs) is processed.
%
gdbm_load - re-create a GDBM database from a dump file.
[--block-size=NUM] [--cache-size=NUM] [--mmap=NUM]
[--mode=MODE] [--no-meta] [--replace]
gdbm_load [-Vh] [--help] [--usage] [--version]
Create  a gdbm database file DB_FILE from the dump file FILE.  If the FILE argument is not supplied, out‐
put the created database to the standard error.
If the input file is in ASCII dump format, the mode and ownership of the created  database  are  restored
%
yes - output a string repeatedly until killed
yes [STRING]...
yes OPTION
Repeatedly output a line with all specified STRING(s), or 'y'.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by David MacKenzie.
%
named-checkconf - named configuration file syntax checking tool
named-checkconf [-h] [-v] [-j] [-t directory] {filename} [-p] [-x] [-z]
named-checkconf checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a named configuration file. The file is
parsed and checked for syntax errors, along with all files included by it. If no file is specified,
/etc/named.conf is read by default.
run, even if named-checkconf was successful.  named-checkconf can be run on these files explicitly,
however.
-h
%
grotty - groff driver for typewriter-like devices
grotty [ -bBcdfhioruUv ] [ -Fdir ] [ files... ]
It is possible to have whitespace between the -F option and its parameter.
grotty  translates  the  output  of GNU troff into a form suitable for typewriter-like devices.  Normally
the standard input.  A filename of - also causes grotty to read the standard input.  Output is written to
the standard output.
foreground colors; additionally, bold and italic attributes can be used at the same time (by using the BI
%
systemd-machine-id-setup - Initialize the machine ID in /etc/machine-id
systemd-machine-id-setup
information about this file.
If the tool is invoked without the --commit switch, /etc/machine-id is initialized with a valid, new
machined ID if it is missing or empty. The new machine ID will be acquired in the following fashion:
used to initialize the machine ID in /etc/machine-id.
%
bridge - show / manipulate bridge addresses and devices
OBJECT := { link | fdb | mdb | vlan | monitor }
bridge link set dev DEV  [ cost COST ] [ priority PRIO ] [ state STATE] [ guard { on | off } ] [ hairpin
{ on | off } ] [ fastleave { on | off } ] [ root_block { on | off } ] [ learning { on | off } ] [
learning_sync { on | off } ] [ flood { on | off } ] [ hwmode { vepa | veb } ] [ self ] [ master ]
bridge link [ show ] [ dev DEV ]
bridge fdb { add | append | del | replace } LLADDR dev DEV { local | static | dynamic } [ self ] [ master
] [ router ] [ use ] [ dst IPADDR ] [ vni VNI ] [ port PORT ] [ via DEVICE ]
%
grub-mkrelpath - make a system path relative to its root
grub-mkrelpath [OPTION...] PATH
Transform a system filename into GRUB one.
-?, --help
give this help list
--usage
give a short usage message
-V, --version
print program version
%
vgrename — rename a volume group
will refuse to run or give warning messages.
a  Volume  Group with the same name as the Volume Group containing your root filesystem the machine might
not even boot correctly.  However, the two Volume Groups should have different UUIDs (unless the disk was
cloned) so you can rename one of the conflicting Volume Groups with vgrename.
%
rename - rename files
rename [options] expression replacement file...
rename  will  rename the specified files by replacing the first occurrence of expression in their name by
replacement.
-s, --symlink
Do not rename a symlink but its target.
-v, --verbose
Show which files where renamed, if any.
-V, --version
%
grub-install - install GRUB to a device
grub-install [OPTION...] [OPTION] [INSTALL_DEVICE]
Install GRUB on your drive.
--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
compress GRUB files [optional]
-d, --directory=DIR
use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
--fonts=FONTS
install FONTS [default=unicode]
%
pvck — check physical volume metadata
calVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
pvck checks physical volume LVM metadata for consistency.
--labelsector sector
parameter  allows you to specify a different starting sector for the scan and is useful for recov‐
ery situations.  For example, suppose the partition table is corrupted or lost  on  /dev/sda,  but
%
xfs_copy - copy the contents of an XFS filesystem
xfs_copy -V
argument must be the pathname of the device or file containing the XFS filesystem.  The  remaining  argu‐
ments  specify  one or more target devices or file names. If the pathnames specify devices, a copy of the
source XFS filesystem is created on each device. The target can also be the name of a  regular  file,  in
xfs_copy creates the file. The length of the resulting file is equal to the size of the  source  filesys‐
tem.  However, if the file is created on an XFS filesystem, the file consumes roughly the amount of space
actually used in the source filesystem by the filesystem and the XFS log.  The space  saving  is  because
xfs_copy  seeks  over  free  blocks  instead of copying them and the XFS filesystem supports sparse files
efficiently.
%
pacman - package manager utility
pacman <operation> [options] [targets]
Pacman is a package management utility that tracks installed packages on a Linux system. It features
dependency support, package groups, install and uninstall scripts, and the ability to sync your local
machine with a remote repository to automatically upgrade packages. Pacman packages are a zipped tar
format.
Invoking pacman involves specifying an operation with any potential options and targets to operate on. A
target is usually a package name, file name, URL, or a search string. Targets can be provided as command
line arguments. Additionally, if stdin is not from a terminal and a single hyphen (-) is passed as an
%
ip - show / manipulate routing, devices, policy routing and tunnels
ip [ -force ] -batch filename
OBJECT := { link | address | addrlabel | route | rule | neigh | ntable | tunnel | tuntap | maddress |
flush-attempts } | -o[neline] | -rc[vbuf] [size] | -t[imestamp] | -ts[hort] | -n[etns] name |
-a[ll] | -c[olor] }
-V, -Version
%
mk_cmds - error table compiler
mk_cmds file
Mk_cmds converts a table listing command names and associated help messages into a C source file suitable
The source file name must end with a suffix of ``.ct''; the file consists of a declaration supplying  the
name of the command table:
command_table name
followed by entries of the form:
[ request | unimplemented ] name, " string "[, abbrev]...;
%
uniq - report or omit repeated lines
uniq [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]]
Filter adjacent matching lines from INPUT (or standard input), writing to OUTPUT (or standard output).
With no options, matching lines are merged to the first occurrence.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --count
prefix lines by the number of occurrences
-d, --repeated
only print duplicate lines, one for each group
%
ldattach - attach a line discipline to a serial line
The  ldattach daemon opens the specified device file (which should refer to a serial device) and attaches
the line discipline ldisc to it for processing of the sent and/or received data.  It then goes  into  the
background keeping the device open so that the line discipline stays loaded.
With no arguments, ldattach prints usage information.
LINE DISCIPLINES
%
gawk - pattern scanning and processing language
gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file ...
gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text file ...
Gawk  is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK programming language.  It conforms to the definition
AWK Programming Language, by Aho, Kernighan, and Weinberger.  Gawk provides the additional features found
in the current version of Brian Kernighan's awk and a number of GNU-specific extensions.
The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f  or
--file options), and values to be made available in the ARGC and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables.
When  gawk is invoked with the --profile option, it starts gathering profiling statistics from the execu‐
tion of the program.  Gawk runs more slowly in this mode, and automatically produces an execution profile
%
lookbib - search bibliographic databases
lookbib [ -v ] [ -istring ] [ -tn ] filename...
lookbib  prints  a prompt on the standard error (unless the standard input is not a terminal), reads from
the standard input a line containing a set of keywords, searches the bibliographic databases  filename...
for references containing those keywords, prints any references found on the standard output, and repeats
this process until the end of input.  For each database filename to be searched, if an  index  filename.i
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
-v     Print the version number.
%
size - list section sizes and total size.
size [-A|-B|--format=compatibility]
[--help]
[-d|-o|-x|--radix=number]
[--common]
[-t|--totals]
[--target=bfdname] [-V|--version]
[objfile...]
The GNU size utility lists the section sizes---and the total size---for each of the object or archive
files objfile in its argument list.  By default, one line of output is generated for each object file or
each module in an archive.
objfile... are the object files to be examined.  If none are specified, the file "a.out" will be used.
%
join - join lines of two files on a common field
For  each  pair  of input lines with identical join fields, write a line to standard output.  The default
join field is the first, delimited by blanks.
-a FILENUM
-e EMPTY
replace missing input fields with EMPTY
%
idle - make process 0 idle
#include <unistd.h>
int idle(void);
idle() is an internal system call used during bootstrap.  It marks the process's pages as swappable, low‐
ers its priority, and enters the main scheduling loop.  idle() never returns.
EPERM.
RETURN VALUE
%
refer - preprocess bibliographic references for groff
refer [ -benvCPRS ] [ -an ] [ -cfields ] [ -fn ] [ -ifields ] [ -kfield ] [ -lm,n ] [ -pfilename ]
[ -sfields ] [ -tn ] [ -Bfield.macro ] [ filename... ]
refer  copies the contents of filename... to the standard output, except that lines between .[ and .] are
are to be processed.
Each citation specifies a reference.  The citation can specify a reference that is contained in a biblio‐
graphic database by giving a set of keywords that only that reference  contains.   Alternatively  it  can
specify  a reference by supplying a database record in the citation.  A combination of these alternatives
is also possible.
%
xzmore, lzmore - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
xzmore [file...]
lzmore [file...]
time on a soft-copy terminal.
To use a pager other than the default more, set environment variable PAGER to the  name  of  the  desired
program.  The name lzmore is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
e or q When the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to exit.
s      When  the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to skip the next
file and continue.
%
sserver [ -p port ] [ -S keytab ] [ server_port ]
sserver, it performs a Kerberos authentication, and then sserver returns to sclient the Kerberos  princi‐
pal which was used for the Kerberos authentication.  It makes a good test that Kerberos has been success‐
fully installed on a machine.
The service name used by sserver and sclient is sample.  Hence, sserver will  require  that  there  be  a
The -S option allows for a different keytab than the default.
%
wc - print newline, word, and byte counts for each file
wc [OPTION]... [FILE]...
wc [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
Print  newline, word, and byte counts for each FILE, and a total line if more than one FILE is specified.
A word is a non-zero-length sequence of characters delimited by white space.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
word, character, byte, maximum line length.
-c, --bytes
print the byte counts
%
calc_tickadj - Calculates optimal value for tick given ntp drift file.
calc_tickadj [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
The  calc_tickadj script uses provided ntp drift file to generate optimal tick value. Generally, ntpd can
do better job if the drift value is the smallest possible number.
The example output of
$ ./calc_tickadj
9999 usec; 9999779 nsec
$ cat /etc/ntp/drift
%
pcap-config - write libpcap compiler and linker flags to standard output
pcap-config [ --static ] [ --cflags | --libs | --additional-libs ]
When  run  with  the  --cflags  option,  pcap-config  writes to the standard output the -I compiler flags
required to include libpcap's header files.  When run with the --libs option, pcap-config writes  to  the
standard  output  the  -L  and  -l  linker  flags  required  to link with libpcap, including -l flags for
libraries required by libpcap.  When run with the --additional-libs option,  pcap-config  writes  to  the
standard  output  the  -L and -l flags for libraries required by libpcap, but not the -lpcap flag to link
with libpcap itself.
By default, it writes flags appropriate for compiling with a dynamically-linked version of  libpcap;  the
--static  flag  causes  it  to  write flags appropriate for compiling with a statically-linked version of
libpcap.
%
xfs_logprint - print the log of an XFS filesystem
xfs_logprint [ options ] device
the partition or logical volume containing the filesystem. The device can be a regular  file  if  the  -f
option  is  used. The contents of the filesystem remain undisturbed.  There are two major modes of opera‐
tion in xfs_logprint.
One mode is better for filesystem operation debugging.  It  is  called  the  transactional  view  and  is
enabled through the -t option. The transactional view prints only the portion of the log that pertains to
tries to display each transaction without regard to how they are split across log records.
The  second  mode starts printing out information from the beginning of the log.  Some error blocks might
%
kswitch - switch primary ticket cache
kswitch {-c cachename|-p principal}
kswitch  makes the specified credential cache the primary cache for the collection, if a cache collection
is available.
-c cachename
Directly specifies the credential cache to be made primary.
-p principal
Causes the cache collection to be searched for a cache containing credentials for  principal.   If
one is found, that collection is made primary.
%
hexdump - display file contents in hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or ascii
hexdump [options] file...
The  hexdump  utility  is  a filter which displays the specified files, or standard input if no files are
specified, in a user-specified format.
-b, --one-byte-octal
One-byte octal display.  Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by sixteen  space-sepa‐
rated, three-column, zero-filled bytes of input data, in octal, per line.
%
btrfs - a toolbox to manage btrfs filesystems
btrfs <command> [<args>]
The btrfs utility is a toolbox for managing btrfs filesystems. There are command groups to work with
There are also standalone tools for some tasks like btrfs-convert or btrfstune that were separate
historically and/or haven’t been merged to the main utility. See section STANDALONE TOOLS for more
details.
Any command name can be shortened as far as it stays unambiguous, however it is recommended to use full
%
xzdec, lzmadec - Small .xz and .lzma decompressors
xzdec [option...]  [file...]
lzmadec [option...]  [file...]
xzdec is a liblzma-based decompression-only tool for .xz (and only .xz) files.  xzdec is intended to work
xz  --decompress  --stdout  (and  possibly  a  few  other commonly used options) to decompress .xz files.
lzmadec is identical to xzdec except that lzmadec supports .lzma files instead of .xz files.
To reduce the size of the executable, xzdec doesn't support multithreading or localization,  and  doesn't
read  options from XZ_DEFAULTS and XZ_OPT environment variables.  xzdec doesn't support displaying inter‐
process instead of displaying progress information.
%
mii-tool - view, manipulate media-independent interface status
mii-tool  [-v,  --verbose]  [-V,  --version] [-R, --reset] [-r, --restart] [-w, --watch] [-l, --log] [-A,
--advertise=media,...]  [-F, --force=media] [-p, --phy=addr] interface ...
Most fast ethernet adapters use an MII to autonegotiate link speed and duplex setting.
Most  intelligent  network devices use an autonegotiation protocol to communicate what media technologies
they support, and then select the fastest mutually supported media technology.   The  -A  or  --advertise
options  can  be  used  to  tell  the  MII  to only advertise a subset of its capabilities.  Some passive
devices, such as single-speed hubs, are unable to autonegotiate.  To handle such devices, the MII  proto‐
-F or --force options can be used to force the MII to operate in one mode,  instead  of  autonegotiating.
The -A and -F options are mutually exclusive.
%
lsblk - list block devices
lsblk [options] [device...]
lsblk  lists information about all available or the specified block devices.  The lsblk command reads the
sysfs filesystem and udev db to gather information.
The command prints all block devices (except RAM disks) in a tree-like  format  by  default.   Use  lsblk
--help to get a list of all available columns.
The  default  output,  as well as the default output from options like --fs and --topology, is subject to
change.  So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts.  Always explicitly
define expected columns by using --output columns-list in environments where a stable output is required.
%
watch - execute a program periodically, showing output fullscreen
watch [options] command
run until interrupted.
-d, --differences [permanent]
Highlight  the  differences  between  successive updates.  Option will read optional argument that
changes highlight to be permanent, allowing to see what has changed  at  least  once  since  first
iteration.
-n, --interval seconds
%
slattach - attach a network interface to a serial line
slattach [-dehlLmnqv] [-c command] [-p proto] [-s speed] [tty]
Slattach  is  a tiny little program that can be used to put a normal terminal ("serial") line into one of
several "network" modes, thus allowing you to use it for point-to-point links to other computers.
tty    Path to a serial device like /dev/ttyS*, /dev/cua* or /dev/ptmx to spawn a new pseudo tty.
[-c command]
tions when a link goes down.
[-d]   Enable debugging output.  Useful when determining why a given setup doesn't work.
%
systemd-notify - Notify service manager about start-up completion and other daemon status changes
used to send arbitrary information, encoded in an environment-block-like list of strings. Most
importantly, it can be used for start-up completion notification.
set for the service unit this command is called from.
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
xfs_io - debug the I/O path of an XFS filesystem
xfs_io [ -adfmrRstxT ] [ -c cmd ] ... [ -p prog ] file
xfs_io -V
than the raw XFS volume itself.  These code paths include not only the obvious read/write/mmap interfaces
for manipulating files, but also cover all of the XFS extensions (such as space preallocation, additional
inode flags, etc).
gram exits.
%
pkttyagent - Textual authentication helper
pkttyagent [--version] [--help]
pkttyagent [--process { pid | pid,pid-start-time } | --system-bus-name busname] [--notify-fd fd]
[--fallback]
pkttyagent is used to start a textual authentication agent for the subject specified by either --process
or --system-bus-name. If neither of these options are given, the parent process is used.
To get notified when the authentication agent has been registered either listen to the Changed D-Bus
signal or use --notify-fd to pass the number of a file descriptor that has been passed to the program.
If --fallback is used, the textual authentication agent will not replace an existing authentication
%
more - file perusal filter for crt viewing
more [options] file...
Options are also taken from the environment variable MORE (make sure to precede them with a dash (-)) but
command-line options will override those.
-d     Prompt with "[Press space to continue, 'q' to quit.]", and display "[Press 'h' for instructions.]"
instead of ringing the bell when an illegal key is pressed.
-l     Do not pause after any line containing a ^L (form feed).
%
head - output the first part of files
head [OPTION]... [FILE]...
header giving the file name.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --bytes=[-]NUM
print the first NUM bytes of each file; with the leading '-', print all but the last NUM bytes  of
each file
%
expr - evaluate expressions
expr EXPRESSION
expr OPTION
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Print  the  value  of  EXPRESSION to standard output.  A blank line below separates increasing precedence
%
ipset — administration tool for IP sets
| version | - }
-file filename }
%
objdump - display information from object files.
objdump [-a|--archive-headers]
[-b bfdname|--target=bfdname]
[-C|--demangle[=style] ]
[-d|--disassemble]
[-D|--disassemble-all]
[-z|--disassemble-zeroes]
[-EB|-EL|--endian={big | little }]
[-f|--file-headers]
[-F|--file-offsets]
[--file-start-context]
[-g|--debugging]
[-e|--debugging-tags]
[-h|--section-headers|--headers]
[-i|--info]
%
gresource - GResource tool
gresource [--section SECTION] list FILE [PATH]
gresource [--section SECTION] details FILE [PATH]
gresource [--section SECTION] extract FILE PATH
gresource sections FILE
gresource offers a simple commandline interface to GResource. It lets you list and extract resources that
have been compiled into a resource file or included in an elf file (a binary or a shared library).
%
lvmdiskscan scans all SCSI, (E)IDE disks, multiple devices and a bunch of other block devices in the sys‐
tem looking for LVM physical volumes.  The size reported is the real device size.   Define  a  filter  in
-l, --lvmpartition
Only reports Physical Volumes.
%
numfmt - Convert numbers from/to human-readable strings
numfmt [OPTION]... [NUMBER]...
Reformat NUMBER(s), or the numbers from standard input if none are specified.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
--debug
print warnings about invalid input
-d, --delimiter=X
use X instead of whitespace for field delimiter
--field=FIELDS
%
logsave - save the output of a command in a logfile
logsave [ -asv ] logfile cmd_prog [ ... ]
The  logsave  program will execute cmd_prog with the specified argument(s), and save a copy of its output
to logfile.  If the containing directory for logfile does not exist, logsave will accumulate  the  output
in memory until it can be written out.  A copy of the output will also be written to standard output.
If  cmd_prog  is  a single hyphen ('-'), then instead of executing a program, logsave will take its input
from standard input and save it in logfile
logsave is useful for saving the output of initial boot scripts until the /var partition is  mounted,  so
the output can be written to /var/log.
%
certtool - GnuTLS certificate tool
certtool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
or non interactively by specifying the template command line option.
provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
-d number, --debug=number
%
systemd-socket-activate - Test socket activation of daemons
connection.
The daemon to launch and its options should be specified after options intended for
systemd-socket-activate.
If the --inetd option is given, the socket file descriptor will be used as the standard input and output
of the launched process. Otherwise, standard input and output will be inherited, and sockets will be
systemd-socket-activate will be passed through to the daemon, in the original positions. Other sockets
%
losetup - set up and control loop devices
Get info:
losetup loopdev
losetup -l [-a]
losetup -j file [-o offset]
Detach a loop device:
losetup -d loopdev...
Detach all associated loop devices:
%
passwd - change user password
passwd [options] [LOGIN]
the account or associated password validity period.
Password Changes
and compared against the stored password. The user has only one chance to enter the correct password. The
After the password has been entered, password aging information is checked to see if the user is
permitted to change the password at this time. If not, passwd refuses to change the password and exits.
%
unicode_stop - revert keyboard and console from unicode mode
unicode_stop
The  unicode_stop  command  will  more-or-less undo the effect of unicode_start.  It puts the keyboard in
%
sudo, sudoedit — execute a command as another user
sudo -h | -K | -k | -V
sudo -v [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user]
sudo -l [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-U user] [-u user] [command]
sudo [-AbEHnPS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-r role] [-t type]
[-u user] [VAR=value] [-i | -s] [command]
sudoedit [-AknS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user] file ...
sudo allows a permitted user to execute a command as the superuser or another user, as specified by the
security policy.  The invoking user's real (not effective) user ID is used to determine the user name with
which to query the security policy.
sudo supports a plugin architecture for security policies and input/output logging.  Third parties can
develop and distribute their own policy and I/O logging plugins to work seamlessly with the sudo front end.
%
groff - front-end for the groff document formatting system
groff [-abcegijklpstzCEGNRSUVXZ] [-d cs] [-D arg] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-K arg] [-L arg] [-m name]
[-M dir] [-n num] [-o list] [-P arg] [-r cn] [-T dev] [-w name] [-W name] [file ...]
groff -h | --help
groff -v | --version [option ...]
The groff program and macro suite is the implementation of a roff(7) system within the free software col‐
lection GNU ⟨http://www.gnu.org⟩.  The groff system has all features of the classical roff, but adds many
extensions.
%
tzselect - select a timezone
tzselect
The  tzselect program asks the user for information about the current location, and outputs the resulting
timezone description to standard output.  The output is suitable as a value for the TZ environment  vari‐
able.
All interaction with the user is done via standard input and standard error.
The exit status is zero if a timezone was successfully obtained from the user, nonzero otherwise.
ENVIRONMENT
%
modprobe - Add and remove modules from the Linux Kernel
modprobe [-v] [-V] [-C config-file] [-n] [-i] [-q] [-b] [modulename] [module parameters...]
modprobe [-r] [-v] [-n] [-i] [modulename...]
modprobe [-c]
modprobe [--dump-modversions] [filename]
modprobe intelligently adds or removes a module from the Linux kernel: note that for convenience, there
is no difference between _ and - in module names (automatic underscore conversion is performed).
modprobe looks in the module directory /lib/modules/`uname -r` for all the modules and other files,
modprobe will also use module options specified on the kernel command line in the form of
%
systemd-hwdb - hardware database management tool
systemd-hwdb [options] update
systemd-hwdb [options] query modalias
systemd-hwdb expects a command and command specific arguments. It manages the binary hardware database.
-h, --help
Print help text.
--usr
Generate in /usr/lib/udev instead of /etc/udev.
%
named - Internet domain name server
[-M option] [-m flag] [-n #cpus] [-p port] [-s] [-S #max-socks] [-t directory] [-U #listeners]
[-u user] [-v] [-V] [-X lock-file] [-x cache-file]
When invoked without arguments, named will read the default configuration file /etc/named.conf, read any
initial data, and listen for queries.
%
systemctl - Control the systemd system and service manager
manages.
The following options are understood:
-t, --type=
The argument should be a comma-separated list of unit types such as service and socket.
If one of the arguments is a unit type, when listing units, limit display to certain unit types.
%
geouplookup6 - look up country using IP Address or hostname
geouplookup6 [-d directory] [-f filename] [-v] <ipaddress|hostname>
geouplookup6 uses the GeoIP library and database to find the Country that an IP address or hostname orig‐
inates from. You must install a database suitable for geoiplookup6. IE: GeoIPv6.dat
For example:
geoiplookup6 ipv6.google.com
%
external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
indicates that further checking is required.
-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
%
unshare - run program with some namespaces unshared from parent
unshare [options] program [arguments]
Unshares the indicated namespaces from the parent process and then executes the specified program.
The namespaces can optionally be made persistent by bind mounting /proc/pid/ns/type files to a filesystem
The namespaces to be unshared are indicated via options.  Unshareable namespaces are:
mount namespace
Mounting  and  unmounting  filesystems  will not affect the rest of the system (CLONE_NEWNS flag),
except for filesystems which are explicitly  marked  as  shared  (with  mount  --make-shared;  see
%
mechanisms which use the standard libsasl database of user secrets.
the -d (delete user) flag.
%
pinky - lightweight finger
pinky [OPTION]... [USER]...
-l     produce long format output for the specified USERs
-b     omit the user's home directory and shell in long format
-h     omit the user's project file in long format
-p     omit the user's plan file in long format
-s     do short format output, this is the default
-f     omit the line of column headings in short format
%
tic - the terminfo entry-description compiler
The  tic command translates a terminfo file from source format into compiled format.  The compiled format
hashed  database (one record per entry).  The tic command writes only one type of entry, depending on how
it was built:
·   For directory trees, the top-level directory, e.g., /usr/share/terminfo, specifies  the  location  of
the database.
·   For  hashed databases, a filename is needed.  If the given file is not found by that name, but can be
%
python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
installed on your system as well.)
Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
%
troff - the troff processor of the groff text formatting system
troff [-abcivzCERU] [-d cs] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-m name] [-M dir] [-n num] [-o list] [-r cn]
[-T name] [-w name] [-W name] [file ...]
appropriate order and with the appropriate options.
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
-a        Generate an ASCII approximation of the typeset output.
%
gtester - test running utility
gtester [OPTION...] [testprogram]
gtester is a utility to run unit tests that have been written using the GLib test framework.
When called with the -o option, gtester writes an XML report of the test results, which can be converted
into HTML using the gtester-report utility.
-h, --help
print help and exit
-v, --version
print version information and exit
%
lexgrog - parse header information in man pages
lexgrog [-m|-c] [-dfw?V] [-E encoding] file ...
lexgrog is an implementation of the traditional “groff guess” utility in lex.  It reads the list of files
on its command line as either man page source files or preformatted “cat” pages, and displays their  name
and description as used by apropos and whatis, the list of preprocessing filters required by the man page
before it is passed to nroff or troff, or both.
grams that need to check man pages for correctness.  If one of lexgrog's input files is “-”, it will read
from standard input; if any input file is compressed, a decompressed version will be read automatically.
-d, --debug
%
lvscan — scan (all disks) for Logical Volumes
lockingfailure] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-v|--verbose]
lvscan scans all known volume groups or all supported LVM block devices in the system for defined Logical
Volumes.  The output consists of one line for each Logical Volume indicating whether or not it is active,
obtain more-comprehensive information about the Logical Volumes.
--all  Include  information in the output about internal Logical Volumes that are components of normally-
accessible Logical Volumes, such as mirrors, but which are not independently accessible (e.g.  not
%
msggrep - pattern matching on message catalog
msggrep [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
Extracts  all messages of a translation catalog that match a given pattern or belong to some given source
files.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE
input PO file
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
%
lvmconf — LVM configuration modifier
lvmconf  [--disable-cluster]  [--enable-cluster] [--enable-halvm] [--disable-halvm] [--file <configfile>]
[--lockinglib <lib>] [--lockinglibdir <dir>] [--services] [--mirrorservice] [--startstopservices]
lvmconf is a  script  that  modifies  the  locking  configuration  in  an  lvm  configuration  file.  See
lvm configuration if needed.
--disable-cluster
Set locking_type to the default non-clustered type. Also reset lvmetad use to its default.
--enable-cluster
Set locking_type to the default clustered type on this system.  Also disable lvmetad use as it  is
%
colrm - remove columns from a file
colrm [first [last]]
colrm removes selected columns from a file.  Input is taken from standard input.  Output is sent to stan‐
dard output.
If called with one parameter the columns of each line will be removed starting with the  specified  first
column.   If  called  with  two  parameters  the columns from the first column to the last column will be
removed.
-V, --version
%
ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program
ntpdc [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ host ...]
using a much more sane interface.
either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments.  Extensive  state  and  statistics
information  is available through the ntpdc interface.  In addition, nearly all the configuration options
ntpdc.
%
paste - merge lines of files
paste [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Write  lines  consisting  of  the  sequentially corresponding lines from each FILE, separated by TABs, to
standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-d, --delimiters=LIST
reuse characters from LIST instead of TABs
-s, --serial
%
vgsplit — split a volume group into two
vgsplit  [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup {y|n}] [-c|--clustered {y|n}] [--commandprofile Pro‐
[-p|--maxphysicalvolumes    MaxPhysicalVolumes]    [--[vg]metadatacopies    NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]
[PhysicalVolumePath...]
The physical volumes moved can be specified either explicitly via PhysicalVolumePath, or implicitly by -n
moved.
for the new volume group can be specified with --alloc, --clustered, --maxlogicalvolumes, --metadatatype,
%
makepkg - package build utility
makepkg [options] [ENVVAR=value] [ENVVAR+=value] ...
makepkg is a script to automate the building of packages. The requirements for using the script are a
build-capable *nix platform and a custom build script for each package you wish to build (known as a
The advantage to a script-based build is that the work is only done once. Once you have the build script
for a package, makepkg will do the rest: download and validate source files, check dependencies,
configure the build-time settings, build the package, install the package into a temporary root, make
customizations, generate meta-info, and package the whole thing up for pacman to use.
makepkg uses your current locale by default and does not unset it when building packages. If you wish
%
mev - a program to report mouse events
mev [ options ]
The  `mev' program is part of the gpm package.  The information below is extracted from the texinfo file,
which is the preferred source of information.
The mev program is modeled after xev. It prints to stdout the mouse console events it gets.
mev's default behaviour is to get anything, but command line switches can be  used  to  set  the  various
fields in the Gpm_Connect structure, in order to customize the program's behaviour. I'm using mev to han‐
dle mouse events to Emacs.
Command line switches for mev are the following:
%
last, lastb - show a listing of last logged in users
last [options] [username...] [tty...]
lastb [options] [username...] [tty...]
last  searches back through the /var/log/wtmp file (or the file designated by the -f option) and displays
a list of all users logged in (and out) since that file was created.  One or more usernames  and/or  ttys
be abbreviated, thus last 0 is the same as last tty0.
When catching a SIGINT signal (generated by the interrupt key, usually control-C) or  a  SIGQUIT  signal,
terminate.
The pseudo user reboot logs in each time the system is rebooted.  Thus last reboot will show a log of all
%
mandb - create or update the manual page index caches
mandb [-dqsucpt?V] [-C file] [manpath]
mandb [-dqsut] [-C file] -f filename ...
mandb  is used to initialise or manually update index database caches that are usually maintained by man.
The caches contain information relevant to the current state of the manual page system and  the  informa‐
tion stored within them is used by the man-db utilities to enhance their speed and functionality.
When creating or updating an index, mandb will warn of bad ROFF .so requests, bogus manual page filenames
and manual pages from which the whatis cannot be parsed.
Supplying mandb with an optional colon-delimited path will override the internal system manual page hier‐
archy search path, determined from information found within the man-db configuration file.
%
showconsolefont - Show the current EGA/VGA console screen font
showconsolefont [ -V ] [ -v ] [ -C console ]
The  showconsolefont command outputs the current console font to stdout.  The option -v prints additional
-C allows one to indicate the console involved. Its argument is a pathname.
%
lnstat - unified linux network statistics
lnstat [options]
lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
/proc/net/stat/.
Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
%
gzexe - compress executable files in place
gzexe name ...
The  gzexe utility allows you to compress executables in place and have them automatically uncompress and
execute when you  run  them  (at  a  penalty  in  performance).   For  example  if  you  execute  ``gzexe
/usr/bin/gdb'' it will create the following two files:
/usr/bin/gdb~  is  the original file and /usr/bin/gdb is the self-uncompressing executable file.  You can
remove /usr/bin/gdb~ once you are sure that /usr/bin/gdb works properly.
%
recode-sr-latin - convert Serbian text from Cyrillic to Latin script
recode-sr-latin [OPTION]
Recode Serbian text from Cyrillic to Latin script.  The input text is read from standard input.  The con‐
verted text is output to standard output.
Informative output:
-h, --help
display this help and exit
-V, --version
output version information and exit
%
nice - run a program with modified scheduling priority
the process).
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-n, --adjustment=N
--help display this help and exit
%
zforce - force a '.gz' extension on all gzip files
zforce [ name ...  ]
%
lwresd - lightweight resolver daemon
lwresd [-c config-file] [-C config-file] [-d debug-level] [-f] [-g] [-i pid-file] [-m flag] [-n #cpus]
lwresd is the daemon providing name lookup services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver
library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name server that answers queries using the BIND
9 lightweight resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.
is used for lightweight resolver requests and responses.
Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the server which then resolves them using the DNS
protocol. When the DNS lookup completes, lwresd encodes the answers in the lightweight resolver format
%
tput, reset - initialize a terminal or query terminfo database
tput [-Ttype] capname [parms ... ]
tput [-Ttype] init
tput [-Ttype] reset
tput [-Ttype] longname
tput -S  <<
tput -V
The  tput  utility  uses  the terminfo database to make the values of terminal-dependent capabilities and
name of the requested terminal type.  The result depends upon the capability's type:
string
tput writes the string to the standard output.  No trailing newline is supplied.
%
xfs_estimate - estimate the space that an XFS filesystem will take
xfs_estimate [ -h ] [ -b blocksize ] [ -i logsize ]
[ -e logsize ] [ -v ] directory ...
xfs_estimate -V
For each directory argument, xfs_estimate estimates the space that directory would take if it were copied
to an XFS filesystem.  xfs_estimate does not cross mount points.  The following definitions are used:
The xfs_estimate options are:
-b blocksize
%
request-key - Handle key instantiation callback requests from the kernel
/sbin/request-key <op> <key> <uid> <gid> <threadring> <processring>      <sessionring> [<info>]
available. The kernel creates a partially set up key and then calls out to this  program  to  instantiate
it. It is not intended to be called directly.
ERRORS
All errors will be logged to the syslog.
FILES
/etc/request-key.conf Instantiation handler configuration file.
/etc/request-key.d/<keytype>.conf Keytype specific configuration file.
%
vlock - Virtual Console lock program
vlock
vlock [ -a,--all ] [ -c,--current ] [ -h,--help ] [ -v,--version ]
sion(s)  while  still  allowing other users to use the system on other virtual consoles.  If desired, the
By default, only the current VC (virtual console) is locked.  With the -a,-all option all VCs are locked.
The  locked VCs cannot be unlocked without the invoker's password.  And, for the paranoid, vlock makes it
a trying experience for those attempting to guess the password, so unauthorized access to  session(s)  is
highly unlikely.
%
psfxtable - handle Unicode character tables for console fonts
psfxtable [-i infont] [-o outfont] [-it intable] [-ot outtable] [-nt]
psfxtable handles the embedded Unicode character table for .psf format console fonts. It reads a font and
are links to it.
standard input.  If no -it or -o or -ot option is given, no input table is read or no output font or out‐
put table is written.
By default the output font (if any) will have a Unicode table when either the input font has one,  or  an
explicit  table (which overrides an input font table) has been provided.  The option -nt causes output of
%
kmod - Program to manage Linux Kernel modules
kmod is a multi-call binary which implements the programs used to control Linux Kernel modules. Most
users will only run it using its other names.
-V --version
Show the program version and exit.
-h --help
Show the help message.
%
vimdiff - edit two, three or four versions of a file with Vim and show differences
gvimdiff
Vimdiff  starts  Vim  on  two  (or three or four) files.  Each file gets its own window.  The differences
version to another version of the same file.
When started as gvimdiff the GUI will be started, if available.
In each window the 'diff' option will be set, which causes the differences to be highlighted.
%
dnssec-verify - DNSSEC zone verification tool
dnssec-verify [-c class] [-E engine] [-I input-format] [-o origin] [-v level] [-V] [-x] [-z] {zonefile}
dnssec-verify verifies that a zone is fully signed for each algorithm found in the DNSKEY RRset for the
-c class
Specifies the DNS class of the zone.
-E engine
Specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
%
vgcreate — create a volume group
vgcreate [--addtag Tag] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup {y|n}] [-c|--clustered {y|n}] [--com‐
datacopies NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]  [-s|--physicalextentsize  PhysicalExtentSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]]
[--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--shared]  [--systemid  SystemID] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [--version]
cePath.
%
expiry - check and enforce password expiration policy
expiry option
The expiry command checks (-c) the current password expiration and forces (-f) changes when required. It
is callable as a normal user command.
The options which apply to the expiry command are:
-c, --check
Check the password expiration of the current user.
-f, --force
Force a password change if the current user has an expired password.
%
vconfig [lots of long options]
The  vconfig  program allows you to create and remove vlan-devices on a vlan enabled kernel. Vlan-devices
are virtual ethernet devices which represents the virtual lans on the physical lan.
add [interface-name] [vlan-id]
Creates a vlan-device on [interface-name]. The resulting vlan-device will be called  according  to
the nameing convention set.
rem [vlan-device]
Removes the named vlan-device.
%
lvmetad — LVM metadata cache daemon
lvmetad [-l level[,level...]]  [-p pidfile_path] [-s socket_path] [-t timeout_value] [-f] [-h] [-V] [-?]
The  lvmetad daemon caches LVM metadata so that LVM commands can read metadata from the cache rather than
the normal work of the system.  lvmetad can be a disadvantage when disk event notifications from the sys‐
tem are unreliable.
lvmetad does not read metadata from disks itself.  Instead, it relies on  an  LVM  command,  like  pvscan
--cache, to read metadata from disks and send it to lvmetad to be cached.
New LVM disks that appear on the system must be scanned before lvmetad knows about them.  If lvmetad does
not know about a disk, then LVM commands using lvmetad will also not know about it.  When disks are added
or removed from the system, lvmetad must be updated.
%
repo-add - package database maintenance utility
repo-add [options] <path-to-db> <package|delta> [<package|delta> ...]
repo-remove [options] <path-to-db> <packagename|delta> [<packagename|delta> ...]
repo-add and repo-remove are two scripts to help build a package database for packages built with
repo-add will update a package database by reading a built package or package delta file. Multiple
packages and/or deltas to add can be specified on the command line.
If a matching “.sig” file is found alongside a package file, the signature will automatically be embedded
into the database.
%
c++filt - Demangle C++ and Java symbols.
c++filt [-_|--strip-underscore]
[-n|--no-strip-underscore]
[-p|--no-params]
[-t|--types]
[-i|--no-verbose]
[-s format|--format=format]
[--help]  [--version]  [symbol...]
The C++ and Java languages provide function overloading, which means that you can write many functions
with the same name, providing that each function takes parameters of different types.  In order to be
able to distinguish these similarly named functions C++ and Java encode them into a low-level assembler
%
pkexec - Execute a command as another user
pkexec [--version] [--disable-internal-agent] [--help]
pkexec allows an authorized user to execute PROGRAM as another user. If PROGRAM is not specified, the
default shell will be run. If username is not specified, then the program will be executed as the
administrative super user, root.
RETURN VALUE
Upon successful completion, the return value is the return value of PROGRAM. If the calling process is
not authorized or an authorization could not be obtained through authentication or an error occured,
%
du - estimate file space usage
du [OPTION]... [FILE]...
du [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
Summarize disk usage of the set of FILEs, recursively for directories.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-0, --null
end each output line with NUL, not newline
-a, --all
write counts for all files, not just directories
%
There is an additional drawing command available:
\D'R dh dv'
Draw  a  rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner at the current position, and the diagonally
opposite corner at the current position +(dh,dv).  Afterwards the current position will be at  the
%
gperl - groff preprocessor for Perl parts in roff files
gperl [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
gperl -h|--help
gperl -v|--version
Perl part can be stored in groff strings or numerical registers based on the arguments at a final line of
a Perl part.
So far, there are only filespec or breaking options.
filespec are file names or the minus character - character for standard input.  As usual, the argument --
can be used in order to let all fowllowing arguments mean file names, even if  the  names  begin  with  a
%
git - the stupid content tracker
git [--version] [--help] [-C <path>] [-c <name>=<value>]
[--exec-path[=<path>]] [--html-path] [--man-path] [--info-path]
[-p|--paginate|--no-pager] [--no-replace-objects] [--bare]
[--git-dir=<path>] [--work-tree=<path>] [--namespace=<name>]
<command> [<args>]
Git is a fast, scalable, distributed revision control system with an unusually rich command set that
provides both high-level operations and full access to internals.
See gittutorial(7) to get started, then see giteveryday(7) for a useful minimum set of commands. The Git
After you mastered the basic concepts, you can come back to this page to learn what commands Git offers.
%
igawk - gawk with include files
igawk [ all gawk options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file ...
igawk [ all gawk options ] [ -- ] program-text file ...
@include getopt.awk
in  your  program  to  include  the file getopt.awk from either the current directory or one of the other
directories in the search path.
%
nl-classid-lookup - Lookup classid definitions
nl-classid-lookup [-hv] [-r] [--raw] name
nl-classid-lookup  searches  the classid database for a matching entry. It is used to resolve qdisc/class
names to classid values and vice versa.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
Print versioning information to console and exit.
-r or --reverse
%
host - DNS lookup utility
{name} [server]
host is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses
and vice versa. When no arguments or options are given, host prints a short summary of its command line
arguments and options.
address.  server is an optional argument which is either the name or IP address of the name server that
host should query instead of the server or servers listed in /etc/resolv.conf.
%
stty - change and print terminal line settings
stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [SETTING]...
stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [-a|--all]
stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [-g|--save]
Print or change terminal characteristics.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --all
print all current settings in human-readable form
-g, --save
print all current settings in a stty-readable form
%
rarpd - answer RARP REQUESTs
arping [-aAvde] [-b bootdir] [interface]
is found in /etc/ethers database and obtained host name is resolvable to an IP  address  appropriate  for
attached network, rarpd answers to client with RARPD reply carrying an IP address.
To  allow multiple boot servers on the network rarpd optionally checks for presence Sun-like bootable im‐
WARNING
%
swapon, swapoff - enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping
swapon [options] [specialfile...]
swapoff [-va] [specialfile...]
swapon is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place.
to indicate a device by label or uuid.
Calls to swapon normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that  the
paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files.
swapoff  disables  swapping  on  the specified devices and files.  When the -a flag is given, swapping is
disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in /proc/swaps or /etc/fstab).
%
dnssec-settime - set the key timing metadata for a DNSSEC key
dnssec-settime [-f] [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset] [-A date/offset]
[-R date/offset] [-I date/offset] [-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-V]
[-v level] [-E engine] {keyfile}
dnssec-settime reads a DNSSEC private key file and sets the key timing metadata as specified by the -P,
-A, -R, -I, and -D options. The metadata can then be used by dnssec-signzone or other signing software to
determine when a key is to be published, whether it should be used for signing a zone, etc.
If none of these options is set on the command line, then dnssec-settime simply prints the key timing
metadata already stored in the key.
When key metadata fields are changed, both files of a key pair (Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key and
Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private) are regenerated. Metadata fields are stored in the private file. A
%
systemd-path - List and query system and user paths
file-hierarchy(7) available for querying.
When invoked without arguments, a list of known paths and their current values is shown. When at least
one argument is passed, the path with this name is queried and its value shown. The variables whose name
begins with "search-" do not refer to individual paths, but instead to a list of colon-separated search
paths, in their order of precedence.
The following options are understood:
%
cfdisk - display or manipulate a disk partition table
cfdisk [options] [device]
cfdisk is a curses-based program for partitioning any block device.  The default device is /dev/sda.
functionality  for  CHS  (Cylinder-Head-Sector)  addressing.  CHS has never been important for Linux, and
this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices.
%
setsid - run a program in a new session
setsid [options] program [arguments]
setsid runs a program in a new session.
-c, --ctty
Set the controlling terminal to the current one.
-w, --wait
Wait  for  the  execution  of the program to end, and return the exit value of this program as the
return value of setsid.
-V, --version
%
xfs_freeze - suspend access to an XFS filesystem
xfs_freeze [ -f | -u ] mount-point
xfs_freeze -V
xfs_freeze halts new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk.  xfs_freeze is intended
to be used with volume managers and hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots.
The mount-point argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.  The  filesys‐
The  -f  flag  requests  the  specified XFS filesystem to be frozen from new modifications.  When this is
selected, all ongoing transactions in the filesystem are allowed to complete, new write system calls  are
%
dc - an arbitrary precision calculator
dc [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
[-e scriptexpression] [--expression=scriptexpression]
[-f scriptfile] [--file=scriptfile]
[file ...]
dc is a reverse-polish desk calculator which supports unlimited precision arithmetic.  It also allows you
to define and call macros.  Normally dc reads from the standard input; if any command arguments are given
to  it, they are filenames, and dc reads and executes the contents of the files before reading from stan‐
dard input.  All normal output is to standard output; all error output is to standard error.
A reverse-polish calculator stores numbers on a stack.  Entering a number pushes it on the stack.  Arith‐
metic operations pop arguments off the stack and push the results.
%
xfs_mdrestore - restores an XFS metadump image to a filesystem image
xfs_mdrestore [ -g ] source target
xfs_mdrestore -V
filesystem. The source argument specifies the location of the metadump  image  and  the  target  argument
specifies  the destination for the filesystem image.  If the source is -, then the metadata image is read
rected to xfs_mdrestore.  The target can be either a file or a device.
xfs_mdrestore  should  not  be  used  to restore metadata onto an existing filesystem unless you are com‐
pletely certain the target can be destroyed.
%
ssh-keyscan — gather ssh public keys
ssh-keyscan is a utility for gathering the public ssh host keys of a number of hosts.  It was designed to
aid in building and verifying ssh_known_hosts files.  ssh-keyscan provides a minimal interface suitable for
use by shell and perl scripts.
ssh-keyscan uses non-blocking socket I/O to contact as many hosts as possible in parallel, so it is very
those hosts are down or do not run ssh.  For scanning, one does not need login access to the machines that
are being scanned, nor does the scanning process involve any encryption.
The options are as follows:
%
RR in it and it will create a .ds file with the DS RR in it.
It prints out the basename for this file (K<name>+<alg>+<id>).
-f     Ignore SEP flag (i.e. make DS records for any key)
-n     Write the result DS Resource Record to stdout instead of a file
%
rev - reverse lines characterwise
rev [option] [file...]
The rev utility copies the specified files to standard output, reversing the order of characters in every
line.  If no files are specified, standard input is read.
-V, --version
Display version information and exit.
-h, --help
Display help text and exit.
%
hostnamectl - Control the system hostname
all kinds of special characters (e.g. "Lennart's Laptop"), the static hostname which is used to
initialize the kernel hostname at boot (e.g. "lennarts-laptop"), and the transient hostname which is a
fallback value received from network configuration. If a static hostname is set, and is valid (something
other than localhost), then the transient hostname is not used.
transient hostnames are limited to the usually accepted characters of Internet domain names.
%
vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
vim [options] [file ..]
vim [options] -
vim [options] -t tag
vim [options] -q [errorfile]
ex
view
gvim gview evim eview
rvim rview rgvim rgview
Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
It is especially useful for editing programs.
%
dnssec-signzone - DNSSEC zone signing tool
dnssec-signzone [-a] [-c class] [-d directory] [-D] [-E engine] [-e end-time] [-f output-file] [-g] [-h]
[-K directory] [-k key] [-L serial] [-l domain] [-M domain] [-i interval]
[-I input-format] [-j jitter] [-N soa-serial-format] [-o origin] [-O output-format] [-P]
[-p] [-Q] [-R] [-r randomdev] [-S] [-s start-time] [-T ttl] [-t] [-u] [-v level] [-V]
dnssec-signzone signs a zone. It generates NSEC and RRSIG records and produces a signed version of the
zone. The security status of delegations from the signed zone (that is, whether the child zones are
secure or not) is determined by the presence or absence of a keyset file for each child zone.
-a
Verify all generated signatures.
%
nl-pktloc-lookup - Lookup packet location definitions
nl-pktloc-lookup name
nl-pktloc-lookup --list
nl-pktloc-lookup searches the packet location database for a matching entry. It is used to resolve packet
location aliases to their definition, i.e. alignment, layer, offset, and mask.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
Print versioning information to console and exit.
%
strip - Discard symbols from object files.
strip [-F bfdname |--target=bfdname]
[-I bfdname |--input-target=bfdname]
[-O bfdname |--output-target=bfdname]
[-s|--strip-all]
[-S|-g|-d|--strip-debug]
[--strip-dwo]
[-K symbolname |--keep-symbol=symbolname]
[-N symbolname |--strip-symbol=symbolname]
[-w|--wildcard]
[-x|--discard-all] [-X |--discard-locals]
[-R sectionname |--remove-section=sectionname]
[-o file] [-p|--preserve-dates]
[-D|--enable-deterministic-archives]
[-U|--disable-deterministic-archives]
%
ldns-keyfetcher - retrieve the DNSSEC DNSKEYs for a zone
ldns-keyfetcher is used to retrieve the DNSKEYs of a zone.
First it finds all authoritative nameservers of the zone by tracing it from the root down. All authorita‐
tive nameservers are then queried (using TCP) for the DNSKEY RRset of the zone apex. If the  results  are
all the same, the key resource record set is printed.
-6 Only use IPv6
%
makepkg-template - package build templating utility
makepkg-template [options]
makepkg-template is a script to ease the work of maintaining multiple similar PKGBUILDs. It allows you to
move most of the code from the PKGBUILD into a template file and uses markers to allow in-place updating
of existing PKGBUILDs if the template has been changed.
Template files can contain any code allowed in a PKGBUILD. You can think of them like external files
included with "." or "source", but they will be inlined into the PKGBUILD by makepkg-template so you do
not depend on the template file when building the package.
Markers are bash comments in the form of:
%
chpasswd - update passwords in batch mode
chpasswd [options]
The chpasswd command reads a list of user name and password pairs from standard input and uses this
information to update a group of existing users. Each line is of the format:
user_name:password
By default the passwords must be supplied in clear-text, and are encrypted by chpasswd. Also the password
age will be updated, if present.
By default, passwords are encrypted by PAM, but (even if not recommended) you can select a different
encryption method with the -e, -m, or -c options.
%
autoheader - Create a template header for configure
autoheader [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]
Create  a  template  file  of  C  `#define'  statements  for  `configure' to use.  To this end, scan TEM‐
PLATE-FILE, or `configure.ac' if present, or else `configure.in'.
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
-V, --version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
verbosely report processing
%
ldns-gen-zone - read a zonefile and print it while adding DS records and extra RR's
ldns-gen-zone ZONEFILE
ldns-gen-zone reads a DNS zone file and prints it.
It  is  build  for  speed,  not for a nice formatting. The output has one resource record per line and no
pretty-printing makeup.
Existing DS records are also not stripped.
The  idea  is  to  use  this tool for quickly generating a representative artificial zonefile from a real
zonefile, to use it for testing purposes.
%
infocmp - compare or print out terminfo descriptions
[-v n] [-s d| i| l| c] [-R subset]
[-w width] [-A directory] [-B directory]
[termname...]
infocmp  can  be  used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo
description to take advantage of the use= terminfo field, or print out a terminfo  description  from  the
lowed by the numeric fields, followed by the string fields.
Default Options
If no options are specified and zero or one termnames are specified, the -I option will be  assumed.   If
more than one termname is specified, the -d option will be assumed.
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
damaged filesystem.
requirement  can be overridden using the -f option, but the resulting image file is very likely not going
%
cksum - checksum and count the bytes in a file
cksum [FILE]...
cksum [OPTION]
Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Q. Frank Xia.
%
the system.
See the various sub commands below. The following global options can be used:
-v, --verbose
Run in verbose mode with debug output.
-q, --quiet
%
-a number
-s salt
Use the given salt for the hash calculation. Salt value should be in hexadecimal format.
-t count
Use count iterations for the hash calculation.
%
pkgdelta - package delta generation utility
pkgdelta is used to create package delta files between two versions of the same package. These files are
with the previous versions of packages (in the package cache) to synthesize the upgraded version of the
--max-delta-size <ratio>
Only create delta files if the delta is smaller than ratio * package_size. Possible values: 0.0 to
%
visudo — edit the sudoers file
visudo [-chqsV] [-f sudoers] [-x output_file]
against multiple simultaneous edits, provides basic sanity checks, and checks for parse errors.  If the
sudoers file is currently being edited you will receive a message to try again later.
honor the VISUAL or EDITOR environment variables unless they contain an editor in the aforementioned edi‐
tors list.  However, if visudo is configured with the --with-env-editor option or the env_editor Default
be a security hole since it allows the user to execute any program they wish simply by setting VISUAL or
EDITOR.
%
fsck - check and repair a Linux filesystem
fsck [-lsAVRTMNP] [-r [fd]] [-C [fd]] [-t fstype] [filesystem...] [--] [fs-specific-options]
fsck  is used to check and optionally repair one or more Linux filesystems.  filesys can be a device name
handle filesystems on different physical disk drives in parallel to  reduce  the  total  amount  of  time
needed to check all of them.
If  no  filesystems  are  specified  on  the  command line, and the -A option is not specified, fsck will
The exit code returned by fsck is the sum of the following conditions:
%
zcmp, zdiff - compare compressed files
Zcmp  and zdiff are used to invoke the cmp or the diff program on files compressed via gzip.  All options
fed to cmp or diff.  The input files are not modified.  The exit status from cmp or diff is preserved.
BUGS
%
chattr - change file attributes on a Linux file system
chattr [ -RVf ] [ -v version ] [ -p project ] [ mode ] files...
chattr changes the file attributes on a Linux file system.
The format of a symbolic mode is +-=[aAcCdDeijsStTu].
The  operator '+' causes the selected attributes to be added to the existing attributes of the files; '-'
causes them to be removed; and '=' causes them to be the only attributes that the files have.
The letters 'aAcCdDeijsStTu' select the new attributes for the files: append only (a), no  atime  updates
(A),  compressed (c), no copy on write (C), no dump (d), synchronous directory updates (D), extent format
(e), immutable (i), data journalling (j), project hierarchy (P), secure deletion (s), synchronous updates
(S), no tail-merging (t), top of directory hierarchy (T), and undeletable (u).
%
scmp_sys_resolver - Resolve system calls
in the optional ARCH argument.  If the architecture is not supplied on the command line then  the  native
architecture  is  used.  If the "-t" argument is specified along with a system call name, then the system
call will be translated as necessary for the given architecture.  The "-t" argument has no  effect  if  a
system call number is specified.
In some combinations of architecture and system call, a negative system call number will be displayed.  A
negative system call number indicates that the system call is not defined for the given architecture  and
is treated in a special manner by libseccomp depending on the operation.
-a ARCH
%
pfbtops - translate a PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII
pfbtops [ -v ] [ pfb_file ]
pfbtops  translates  a  PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII, splitting overlong lines in text packets
into smaller chunks.  If pfb_file is omitted the pfb file will be read  from  the  standard  input.   The
ASCII  format  PostScript  font  will be written on the standard output.  PostScript fonts for MS-DOS are
normally supplied in .pfb format.
The resulting ASCII format PostScript font  can  be  used  with  groff.   It  must  first  be  listed  in
-v     Print the version number.
%
fsck.xfs - do nothing, successfully
fsck.xfs [ filesys ... ]
exits with a zero exit status.
If you wish to check the consistency of an XFS filesystem, or repair a damaged or corrupt XFS filesystem,
FILES
/etc/fstab.
%
getfattr - get extended attributes of filesystem objects
getfattr [-hRLP] -n name [-e en] pathname...
getfattr [-hRLP] -d [-e en] [-m pattern] pathname...
For  each  file, getfattr displays the file name, and the set of extended attribute names (and optionally
values) which are associated with that file.
The output format of getfattr -d is as follows:
%
gdbmtool - examine and modify a GDBM database
gdbmtool [-lmNnqrs] [-b SIZE] [-c SIZE] [-f FILE] [--block-size=SIZE]
[--cache-size=SIZE] [--file FILE]  [--newdb] [--no-lock]
[--no-mmap] [--norc]
[--quiet] [--read-only] [--synchronize] [DBFILE]
gdbmtool [-Vh] ][--help] [--usage] [--version]
The gdbmtool utility allows you to view and modify an existing GDBM database or to create a new one.
The  DBFILE  argument  supplies  the  name  of  the  database to open.  If not supplied, the default name
junk.gdbm is used instead.  If the named database does not exist, it will be created.  An existing  data‐
base can be cleared (i.e. all records removed from it) using the --newdb option (see below).
%
logrotate ‐ rotates, compresses, and mails system logs
logrotate [-dv] [-f|--force] [-s|--state file] config_file ..
logrotate  is  designed  to  ease administration of systems that generate large numbers of log files.  It
daily, weekly, monthly, or when it grows too large.
Normally,  logrotate  is  run  as  a  daily cron job.  It will not modify a log more than once in one day
unless the criterion for that log is based on the log's size and logrotate is being run  more  than  once
each day, or unless the -f or --force option is used.
given in earlier files, so the order in which the logrotate config files are listed is  important.   Nor‐
mally,  a  single config file which includes any other config files which are needed should be used.  See
%
kadmin  [-O|-N]  [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [[-c cache_name]|[-k [-t keytab]]|-n] [-w password]
[-s admin_server[:port]]
kadmin.local [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [-d dbname] [-e enc:salt ...]  [-m] [-x db_args]
vide  nearly  identical  functionalities;  the  difference is that kadmin.local directly accesses the KDC
man  page  will  use "kadmin" to refer to both versions.  kadmin provides for the maintenance of Kerberos
principals, password policies, and service key tables (keytabs).
The remote kadmin client uses Kerberos to authenticate  to  kadmind  using  the  service  principal  kad‐
min/ADMINHOST  (where ADMINHOST is the fully-qualified hostname of the admin server) or kadmin/admin.  If
%
grub-editenv - edit GRUB environment block
Tool to edit environment block.
Commands:
create Create a blank environment block file.
list   List the current variables.
Set variables.
%
pwd - print name of current/working directory
pwd [OPTION]...
Print the full filename of the current working directory.
-L, --logical
use PWD from environment, even if it contains symlinks
-P, --physical
avoid all symlinks
--help display this help and exit
--version
%
setleds - set the keyboard leds
setleds [-v] [-L] [-D] [-F] [{+|-}num] [{+|-}caps] [{+|-}scroll]
Setleds  reports  and  changes  the  led flag settings of a VT (namely NumLock, CapsLock and ScrollLock).
Without arguments, setleds prints the current settings.  With arguments, it sets or clears the  indicated
flags  (and leaves the others unchanged). The settings before and after the change are reported if the -v
flag is given.
The led flag settings are specific for each VT (and the VT corresponding to stdin is used).
by the keyboard leds).
With  option  -D,  setleds will change both the VT flags and their default settings (so that a subsequent
%
jfs_mkfs - create a JFS formatted partition
jfs_mkfs [options] device [ blocks ]
jfs_mkfs is used to create (format) a JFS partition.  jfs_mkfs must be run as root.
system and/or JFS journal will be created.  blocks is the number of blocks to be used for the  file  sys‐
tem.  If omitted, jfs_mkfs automatically figures the file system size.
WARNING
jfs_mkfs will destroy all data on the specified device!
%
getopt - parse command options (enhanced)
getopt optstring parameters
getopt [options] [--] optstring parameters
getopt [options] -o|--options optstring [options] [--] parameters
getopt  is used to break up (parse) options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures, and to
The parameters getopt is called with can be divided into two parts: options which modify the  way  getopt
is  not  an  option argument, or after the first occurrence of '--'.  If no '-o' or '--options' option is
found in the first part, the first parameter of the second part is used as the short options string.
%
lvchange — change attributes of a logical volume
lvchange [-a|--activate [a][e|s|l]{y|n}] [--activationmode {complete|degraded|partial}] [--addtag Tag]
[-K|--ignoreactivationskip] [-k|--setactivationskip {y|n}] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup
{y|n}] [--rebuild PhysicalVolume] [--cachemode {passthrough|writeback|writethrough}] [--cachepolicy Pol‐
[--deltag Tag] [--detachprofile] [--discards {ignore|nopassdown|passdown}] [--errorwhenfull {y|n}]
[-h|-?|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoremonitoring] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--metadataprofile
{y|n} [--major Major] [--minor Minor]] [--poll {y|n}] [--[raid]maxrecoveryrate Rate] [--[raid]minrecov‐
eryrate Rate] [--[raid]syncaction {check|repair}] [--[raid]writebehind IOCount] [--[raid]writemostly
PhysicalVolume[:{y|n|t}]] [-r|--readahead {ReadAheadSectors|auto|none}] [--refresh] [--reportformat
{basic|json}] [--resync] [-S|--select Selection] [--sysinit] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [-Z|--zero {y|n}]
[LogicalVolumePath...]
%
df - report file system disk space usage
df [OPTION]... [FILE]...
file system containing each file name argument.  If no file name is given, the  space  available  on  all
If an argument is the absolute file name of a disk device node containing a mounted file system, df shows
version of df cannot show the space available on unmounted file systems, because on most kinds of systems
doing so requires very nonportable intimate knowledge of file system structures.
%
depmod - Generate modules.dep and map files.
depmod [-b basedir] [-e] [-E Module.symvers] [-F System.map] [-n] [-v] [-A] [-P prefix] [-w] [version]
depmod [-e] [-E Module.symvers] [-F System.map] [-m] [-n] [-v] [-P prefix] [-w] [version] [filename...]
Linux kernel modules can provide services (called "symbols") for other modules to use (using one of the
EXPORT_SYMBOL variants in the code). If a second module uses this symbol, that second module clearly
depends on the first module. These dependencies can get quite complex.
depmod creates a list of module dependencies by reading each module under /lib/modules/version and
determining what symbols it exports and what symbols it needs. By default, this list is written to
modules.dep, and a binary hashed version named modules.dep.bin, in the same directory. If filenames are
given on the command line, only those modules are examined (which is rarely useful unless all modules are
listed).  depmod also creates a list of symbols provided by modules in the file named modules.symbols and
%
peekfd - peek at file descriptors of running processes
[-h,--help] pid [fd] [fd] ...
peekfd attaches to a running process and intercepts all reads and writes to file  descriptors.   You  can
specify the desired file descriptor numbers or dump all of them.
-n     Do not display headers indicating the source of the bytes dumped.
-c     Also dump the requested file descriptor activity in any new child processes that are created.
%
faillog - display faillog records or set login failure limits
faillog [options]
faillog displays the contents of the failure log database (/var/log/faillog). It can also set the failure
counters and limits. When faillog is run without arguments, it only displays the faillog records of the
users who had a login failure.
The options which apply to the faillog command are:
-a, --all
Display (or act on) faillog records for all users having an entry in the faillog database.
The range of users can be restricted with the -u option.
%
btrfs-inspect-internal - query various internal information
btrfs inspect-internal <subcommand> <args>
simple UI to an ioctl or a more complex query that assembles the result from several internal structures.
The latter usually requires calls to privileged ioctls.
dump-super [options] <device> [device...]
(replaces the standalone tool btrfs-show-super)
Show btrfs superblock information stored on given devices in textual form. By default the first
superblock is printed, more details about all copies or additional backup data can be printed.
%
login - begin session on the system
login [ -p ] [ -h host ] [ -H ] [ -f username | username ]
login is used when signing onto a system.  If no argument is given, login prompts for the username.
The user is then prompted for a password, where approprate.  Echoing is disabled to prevent revealing the
password.  Only a small number of password failures are permitted before login exits and  the  communica‐
tions link is severed.
proceeding.  He will be forced to provide his old  password  and  the  new  password  before  continuing.
The user and group ID will be set according to their values in the /etc/passwd file.  There is one excep‐
%
grub-mknetdir - prepare a GRUB netboot directory.
grub-mknetdir [OPTION...]
--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
compress GRUB files [optional]
-d, --directory=DIR
use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
--fonts=FONTS
install FONTS [default=unicode]
--install-modules=MODULES
install only MODULES and their dependencies [default=all]
%
Reads  an EQN equation (one line) as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graph‐
ics format) suitable for the Web as output.
macros; nor do you need to have dollar-sign or other delimiters around the equation.
The  output  image will be clipped to the smallest possible bounding box that contains all the black pix‐
border, force the background transparent, set the image's pixel density, or perform other  useful  trans‐
formations.
%
shutdown - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
wall message to be sent to all logged-in users before going down.
specified number of minutes m from now.  "now" is an alias for "+0", i.e. for triggering an immediate
%
hddtemp - Utility to monitor hard drive temperature
hddtemp [options] [type:]disk...
hddtemp  will give you the temperature of your hard drive by reading Self-Monitoring Analysis and Report‐
ing Technology (S.M.A.R.T.)  information on drives that support this feature.  Only  modern  hard  drives
have  a  temperature  sensor.   hddtemp  supports  reading  S.M.A.R.T.  information from SCSI drives too.
hddtemp can work as simple command line tool or as a daemon.
You can specify one or more device drive path, where each path can be prefixed with  a  type  like  PATA,
SATA or SCSI to force hddtemp too use one of these type (because detection can fail).
The  program follows the usual GNU command line syntax, with long options starting with two dashes (`-').
A summary of options is included below.
%
dhcpcd — a DHCP client
[-F, --fqdn FQDN] [-f, --config file] [-h, --hostname hostname] [-I, --clientid clientid]
[-i, --vendorclassid vendorclassid] [-j, --logfile logfile] [-l, --leasetime seconds]
[-m, --metric metric] [-O, --nooption option] [-o, --option option] [-Q, --require option]
[-r, --request address] [-S, --static value] [-s, --inform address[/cidr]] [--inform6]
[-t, --timeout seconds] [-u, --userclass class] [-v, --vendor code, value]
[-X, --blacklist address[/cidr]] [-Z, --denyinterfaces pattern] [-z, --allowinterfaces pattern]
[--inactive] [interface] [...]
dhcpcd -n, --rebind [interface]
dhcpcd -k, --release [interface]
dhcpcd -U, --dumplease interface
dhcpcd --version
dhcpcd -x, --exit [interface]
%
grodvi - convert groff output to TeX dvi format
grodvi [ -dlv ] [ -Fdir ] [ -ppapersize ] [ -wn ] [ files... ]
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
grodvi is a driver for groff that produces TeX dvi format.  Normally it should be run by groff -Tdvi.
The dvi file generated by grodvi can be printed by any correctly-written dvi driver.  The troff drawing
\D commands will not produce any output.
There is an additional drawing command available:
%
znew -   recompress .Z files to .gz files
znew [ -ftv9PK] [ name.Z ...  ]
Znew recompresses files from .Z (compress) format to .gz (gzip) format.  If you want to recompress a file
already in gzip format, rename the file to force a .Z extension then apply znew.
-f     Force recompression from .Z to .gz format even if a .gz file already exists.
-t     Tests the new files before deleting originals.
-v     Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed.
-9     Use the slowest compression method (optimal compression).
%
od - dump files in octal and other formats
od [OPTION]... [FILE]...
od [-abcdfilosx]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b]]
od --traditional [OPTION]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b] [+][LABEL][.][b]]
Write  an unambiguous representation, octal bytes by default, of FILE to standard output.  With more than
one FILE argument, concatenate them in the listed order to form the input.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
If first and second call formats both apply, the second format is assumed if the last operand begins with
at first byte printed, incremented when dump is progressing.  For OFFSET and LABEL, a  0x  or  0X  prefix
%
thin_ls - List thin volumes within a pool.
thin_ls [options] {metadata device}
thin_ls  Displays infomation about thin volumes in a pool.  Pass the metadata device on the command line,
not the pool device.
-o, --format
Give a comma separated list of the fields to be output.  Valid  fields  are:  DEV,  MAPPED_BLOCKS,
EXCLUSIVE_BLOCKS,  SHARED_BLOCKS, MAPPED_SECTORS, EXCLUSIVE_SECTORS, SHARED_SECTORS, MAPPED_BYTES,
EXCLUSIVE_BYTES, SHARED_BYTES, MAPPED, EXCLUSIVE, SHARED, TRANSACTION CREATE_TIME, SNAP_TIME
%
pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
pwconv [options]
pwunconv [options]
grpconv [options]
grpunconv [options]
The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
%
pivot_root - change the root filesystem
pivot_root new_root put_old
pivot_root  moves the root file system of the current process to the directory put_old and makes new_root
the latter for further details.
pivot_root and chroot are in the current PATH:
cd new_root
pivot_root . put_old
exec chroot . command
%
| --defcktname | --cflags | --libs [libraries]]
installed Kerberos libraries.
--all  prints the version, vendor, prefix, and exec-prefix.
--version
prints the version number of the Kerberos installation.
%
chcon - change file security context
chcon [OPTION]... CONTEXT FILE...
chcon [OPTION]... [-u USER] [-r ROLE] [-l RANGE] [-t TYPE] FILE...
chcon [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
Change  the SELinux security context of each FILE to CONTEXT.  With --reference, change the security con‐
text of each FILE to that of RFILE.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
--dereference
affect the referent of each symbolic link (this is the default), rather  than  the  symbolic  link
itself
%
curl - transfer a URL
curl [options] [URL...]
curl  is  a  tool to transfer data from or to a server, using one of the supported protocols (DICT, FILE,
SMTP, SMTPS, TELNET and TFTP). The command is designed to work without user interaction.
curl  offers  a  busload of useful tricks like proxy support, user authentication, FTP upload, HTTP post,
SSL connections, cookies, file transfer resume, Metalink, and more. As you will see below, the number  of
features will make your head spin!
URL
%
setkeycodes - load kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table entries
setkeycodes scancode keycode ...
The  setkeycodes  command reads its arguments two at a time, each pair of arguments consisting of a scan‐
code (given in hexadecimal) and a keycode (given in decimal). For each such pair,  it  tells  the  kernel
keyboard driver to map the specified scancode to the specified keycode.
duce scancodes that the kernel does not recognize.
THEORY
The usual PC keyboard produces a series of scancodes for each key press and key release.  (Scancodes  are
stream of keycodes (key press/release events).  (Keycodes are shown by showkey.)  Apart from a few  scan‐
%
tar — manipulate tape archives
tar [bundled-flags ⟨args⟩] [⟨file⟩ | ⟨pattern⟩ ...]
tar {-c} [options] [files | directories]
tar {-r | -u} -f archive-file [options] [files | directories]
tar {-t | -x} [options] [patterns]
zip, jar, ar, xar, rpm, 7-zip, and ISO 9660 cdrom images and can create tar, pax, cpio, ar, zip, 7-zip, and
shar archives.
torical implementations.  See COMPATIBILITY below for details.
The other synopsis forms show the preferred usage.  The first option to tar is a mode indicator from the
%
idnconv - codeset converter for named.conf and zone master files
idnconv [options..] [file...]
idnconv  is  a  codeset  converter for named configuration files and zone master files.  idnconv performs
codeset conversion specified either by the command-line arguments  or  by  the  configuration  file,  and
writes the converted text to stdout.
If file name is specified, idnconv converts the contents of the file.  Otherwise, idnconv converts stdin.
able as a general codeset converter.
OPERATION MODES
idnconv has two operation modes.
%
pkcheck - Check whether a process is authorized
pkcheck [--version] [--help]
pkcheck [--list-temp]
pkcheck [--revoke-temp]
pkcheck --action-id action {--process { pid | pid,pid-start-time | pid,pid-start-time,uid } |
--system-bus-name busname} [--allow-user-interaction] [--enable-internal-agent]
[--detail key value...]
pkcheck is used to check whether a process, specified by either --process (see below) or
--system-bus-name, is authorized for action. The --detail option can be used zero or more times to pass
details about action. If --allow-user-interaction is passed, pkcheck blocks while waiting for
%
ldns-walk - Retrieve the contents of a DNSSEC signed zone
ldns-walk [ OPTION ] ZONE
ldns-walk  is  used  to retrieve the contents of a DNSSEC signed zone.  It does this through NSEC-walking
(following the chain of NSEC records) and 'guessing' the next non-existent owner name for each NSEC.
can be circumvented by querying the authoritative nameserver directly (with the @ argument).
Of course the nameserver that is used must be DNSSEC-aware.
%
ddns-confgen - ddns key generation tool
tsig-keygen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-r randomfile] [name]
ddns-confgen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-k keyname] [-q] [-r randomfile] [-s name | -z zone]
tsig-keygen and ddns-confgen are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use in TSIG
signing. The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
rndc command channel.
When run as tsig-keygen, a domain name can be specified on the command line which will be used as the
name of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is tsig-key.
When run as ddns-confgen, the generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that
can be used with nsupdate and named when setting up dynamic DNS, including an example update-policy
%
gio - GIO commandline tool
gio version
gio cat LOCATION...
gio copy [OPTION...] SOURCE... DESTINATION
gio info [OPTION...] LOCATION...
gio list [OPTION...] [LOCATION...]
gio mime MIMETYPE [HANDLER]
%
dbus-daemon - Message bus daemon
dbus-daemon
dbus-daemon [--version] [--session] [--system] [--config-file=FILE] [--print-address [=DESCRIPTOR]]
[--print-pid [=DESCRIPTOR]] [--fork]
dbus-daemon is the D-Bus message bus daemon. See http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more
information about the big picture. D-Bus is first a library that provides one-to-one communication
between any two applications; dbus-daemon is an application that uses this library to implement a message
bus daemon. Multiple programs connect to the message bus daemon and can exchange messages with one
another.
There are two standard message bus instances: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as
the "messagebus" init service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs
%
thin_check - validate thin provisioning metadata on device or file
thin_check [options] {device|file}
thin_check  checks  thin provisioning metadata created by the device-mapper thin provisioning target on a
device or file.
-q, --quiet
Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
%
jfs_fsck - initiate replay of the JFS transaction log, and check and repair a JFS formatted device
jfs_fsck [ -afnpvV ] [ -j journal_device ] [ --omit_journal_replay ] [ --replay_journal_only ] device
jfs_fsck  is used to replay the JFS transaction log, check a JFS formatted device for errors, and fix any
errors found.
jfs_fsck must be run as root.
WARNING
jfs_fsck should only be used to check an unmounted file system or a file  system  that  is  mounted  READ
ONLY.  Using jfs_fsck to check a file system mounted other than READ ONLY could seriously damage the file
system!
%
cache_restore - restore cache metadata file to device or file
cache_restore [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
cache_restore  restores  cache metadata created by the respective device-mapper target dumped into an XML
device  or  file.   If restored to a metadata device , the metadata can be processed by the device-mapper
target.
-i, --input {device|file}
Input file or device with metadata.
-o, --output {device|file}
%
btrfstune - tune various filesystem parameters
btrfstune [options] <dev> [<dev>...]
btrfstune can be used to enable, disable or set various filesystem parameters. The filesystem must be
unmounted.
have kernel support for the features. You can find a complete list of features and kernel version of
their introduction at https://btrfs.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Changelog#By_feature . Also, the manual
Some of the features could be enabled on a mounted filesystem. Please refer to the respective section in
%
script - make typescript of terminal session
script [options] [file]
script makes a typescript of everything displayed on your terminal.  It is useful for students who need a
hardcopy record of an interactive session as proof of an  assignment,  as  the  typescript  file  can  be
If the argument file is given, script saves the dialogue in this file.  If no filename is given, the dia‐
logue is saved in the file typescript.
-a, --append
Append the output to file or to typescript, retaining the prior contents.
%
btrfs-find-root - filter to find btrfs root
btrfs-find-root [options] <dev>
btrfs-find-root is used to find the satisfied root, you can filter by root tree’s objectid, generation,
level.
-a
Search through all the metadata extents, even the root is already found.
-g <generation>
Filter root tree by it’s original transaction id, tree root’s generation in default.
-o <objectid>
%
rshd - Remote shell server
rshd [OPTION...]
Remote shell server.
-a, --verify-hostname
ask hostname for verification
-l, --no-rhosts
ignore .rhosts file
-L, --log-sessions
log successful logins
%
free - Display amount of free and used memory in the system
free [options]
free  displays  the  total amount of free and used physical and swap memory in the system, as well as the
buffers and caches used by the kernel. The information is gathered by  parsing  /proc/meminfo.  The  dis‐
played columns are:
total  Total installed memory (MemTotal and SwapTotal in /proc/meminfo)
used   Used memory (calculated as total - free - buffers - cache)
free   Unused memory (MemFree and SwapFree in /proc/meminfo)
shared Memory used (mostly) by tmpfs (Shmem in /proc/meminfo)
%
tfmtodit - create font files for use with groff -Tdvi
tfmtodit [ -sv ] [ -ggf_file ] [ -kskewchar ] tfm_file map_file font
tfmtodit creates a font file for use with groff -Tdvi.  tfm_file is the name of the TeX font metric file
for the font.  map_file is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font; this file should
consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
groff names of the character.  If a character has no groff names but exists in the tfm file, then it will
be put in the groff font file as an unnamed character.  font is the name of the groff font file.  The
groff font file is written to font.
%
smartd - SMART Disk Monitoring Daemon
smartd [options]
other platforms.]
smartd is a daemon that monitors the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting  Technology  (SMART)  system
built  into  most  ATA/SATA  and SCSI/SAS hard drives and solid-state drives.  The purpose of SMART is to
monitor the reliability of the hard drive and predict drive failures, and to carry out different types of
lier standards (see REFERENCES below).
smartd will attempt to enable SMART monitoring on ATA devices (equivalent to smartctl -s  on)  and  polls
%
lscpu - display information about the CPU architecture
lscpu [-a|-b|-c] [-x] [-s directory] [-e[=list]|-p[=list]]
lscpu -h|-V
lscpu gathers CPU architecture information from sysfs, /proc/cpuinfo and any applicable architecture-spe‐
cific libraries (e.g. librtas on Powerpc).  The command output can be optimized for parsing or  for  easy
readability  by humans.  The information includes, for example, the number of CPUs, threads, cores, sock‐
ets, and Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) nodes.  There is also information  about  the  CPU  caches  and
cache sharing, family, model, bogoMIPS, byte order, and stepping.
In virtualized environments, the CPU architecture information displayed reflects the configuration of the
guest operating system which is typically different from the physical (host)  system.   On  architectures
that  support  retrieving physical topology information, lscpu also displays the number of physical sock‐
ets, chips, cores in the host system.
%
ldns-mx - print out the mx record(s) for a domain
ldns-mx DOMAIN
ldns-mx is used to print out mx information of a domain.
ldns-mx has no options.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
%
bash - GNU Bourne-Again SHell
bash [options] [command_string | file]
Bash is an sh-compatible command language interpreter that executes commands read from the standard input
or from a file.  Bash also incorporates useful features from the Korn and C shells (ksh and csh).
Bash is intended to be a conformant implementation of the Shell and Utilities portion of the  IEEE  POSIX
All  of  the  single-character shell options documented in the description of the set builtin command can
%
fortune - print a random, hopefully interesting, adage
fortune [-acefilosw] [-n length] [ -m pattern] [[n%] file/dir/all]
When  fortune  is run with no arguments it prints out a random epigram. Epigrams are divided into several
categories, where each category is sub-divided into those which are potentially offensive and those which
are not.
Options
The options are as follows:
-a     Choose  from all lists of maxims, both offensive and not.  (See the -o option for more information
on offensive fortunes.)
-c     Show the cookie file from which the fortune came.
%
ldns-chaos - give some information about a nameserver
ldns-chaos  retrieves  all  the  addresses  of  the nameserver and then queries each address for its ver‐
sion.bind and hostname.bind.
ldns-chaos is a bit more complex than ldns-mx.
ldns-chaos has no options.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
%
utmpdump - dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format
utmpdump [options] [filename]
utmpdump  is  a simple program to dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format, so they can be examined.  utmp‐
dump reads from stdin unless a filename is passed.
-f, --follow
Output appended data as the file grows.
-o, --output file
Write command output to file instead of standard output.
-r, --reverse
%
halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
The following options are understood:
--help
Print a short help text and exit.
%
dmesg - print or control the kernel ring buffer
dmesg [options]
dmesg --clear
dmesg --read-clear [options]
dmesg --console-level level
dmesg --console-on
dmesg --console-off
dmesg is used to examine or control the kernel ring buffer.
The default action is to display all messages from the kernel ring buffer.
%
git-receive-pack - Receive what is pushed into the repository
git-receive-pack <directory>
Invoked by git send-pack and updates the repository with the information fed from the remote end.
send-pack side, and the program pair is meant to be used to push updates to remote repository. For pull
speaking, it is the local end git-receive-pack runs, but to the user who is sitting at the send-pack end,
it is updating the remote. Confused?)
There are other real-world examples of using update and post-update hooks found in the
%
efibootmgr - manipulate the EFI Boot Manager
... ] [ -O ] [ -p PART ] [ -q ] [ -t seconds ] [ -T ] [ -u ] [ -v ] [ -V ] [ -w ] [ -@ file ]
efibootmgr  is  a userspace application used to modify the Intel Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot
running boot option, and more.
<URL:http://developer.intel.com>
/sys/firmware/efi/vars or /sys/firmware/efi/efivars/.
%
link - call the link function to create a link to a file
link OPTION
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Michael Stone.
%
external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
indicates that further checking is required.
-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
%
which - shows the full path of (shell) commands.
which [options] [--] programname [...]
Which takes one or more arguments. For each of its arguments it prints to stdout the full path of the
executables that would have been executed when this argument had been entered at the shell prompt. It
does this by searching for an executable or script in the directories listed in the environment variable
--all, -a
Print all matching executables in PATH, not just the first.
%
git-shell - Restricted login shell for Git-only SSH access
chsh -s $(command -v git-shell) <user>
git clone <user>@localhost:/path/to/repo.git
ssh <user>@localhost
server-side Git commands implementing the pull/push functionality, plus custom commands present in a
subdirectory named git-shell-commands in the user’s home directory.
git shell accepts the following commands after the -c option:
git receive-pack <argument>, git upload-pack <argument>, git upload-archive <argument>
Call the corresponding server-side command to support the client’s git push, git fetch, or git
%
lnstat - unified linux network statistics
lnstat [options]
lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
/proc/net/stat/.
Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
%
update-leap - leap-seconds file manager/updater
update-leap [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
update-leap  will  validate  the file currently on the local system and if necessary, updates leap-second
definition file.
tion can be specified on the command line.
If  the  file  does  not  exist, is not valid, has expired, or is expiring soon, a new copy will be down‐
loaded.  If the new copy validates, it is installed and NTP is (optionally) restarted.
%
idn [OPTION]... [STRINGS]...
Command line interface to the internationalized domain name library.
All  strings  are  expected to be encoded in the preferred charset used by your locale.  Use `--debug' to
find out what this charset is.  You can  override  the  charset  used  by  setting  environment  variable
CHARSET.
To  process  a string that starts with `-', for example `-foo', use `--' to signal the end of parameters,
as in `idn --quiet -a -- -foo'.
%
will NOT list all the  users  in  /etc/passwd,  shadow,  PAM,  etc.  only  those  created  by  SASL  (via
-f file
use file for sasldb
%
xzdec, lzmadec - Small .xz and .lzma decompressors
xzdec [option...]  [file...]
lzmadec [option...]  [file...]
xzdec is a liblzma-based decompression-only tool for .xz (and only .xz) files.  xzdec is intended to work
xz  --decompress  --stdout  (and  possibly  a  few  other commonly used options) to decompress .xz files.
lzmadec is identical to xzdec except that lzmadec supports .lzma files instead of .xz files.
To reduce the size of the executable, xzdec doesn't support multithreading or localization,  and  doesn't
read  options from XZ_DEFAULTS and XZ_OPT environment variables.  xzdec doesn't support displaying inter‐
process instead of displaying progress information.
%
hdparm - get/set SATA/IDE device parameters
hdparm [options] [device ...]
hdparm  provides  a  command  line  interface  to  various  kernel  interfaces  supported  by  the  Linux
rectly only with the latest kernels.
When  no  options  are  given, -acdgkmur is assumed.  For "Get/set" options, a query without the optional
parameter (e.g. -d) will query (get) the device state, and with a parameter  (e.g.,  -d0)  will  set  the
device state.
%
mkreiserfs - The create tool for the Linux ReiserFS filesystem.
mkreiserfs  [  -dfV  ]  [  -b | --block-size N ] [ -h | --hash HASH ] [ -u | --uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label
LABEL ] [ --format FORMAT ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ -s | --journal-size N  ]  [
-o  | --journal-offset N ] [ -t | --transaction-max-size N ] [ -B | --badblocks file ]  device [ filesys‐
tem-size ]
mkreiserfs creates a Linux ReiserFS filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
device is the special file corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk
partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
filesystem-size
is the size in blocks of the filesystem. If omitted, mkreiserfs will automatically set it.
%
isc-config.sh - Get information about the installed version of ISC BIND
isc-config.sh [--cflags] [--exec-prefix] [--libs] [--prefix] [--version] [libraries...]
isc-config.sh prints information related to the installed version of ISC BIND, such as the compiler and
linker flags required to compile and link programs that use ISC BIND libraries.
The optional libraries are used to report specific details for compiling and linking for the listed
listed on the command line. (Some libraries require other libraries, so are implied.)
--cflags
Prints the compiler command line options required to compile files that use ISC BIND. Use the
libraries command line argument(s) to print additional specific flags to pass to the C compiler.
%
ping - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts
[-M pmtudisc_option] [-N nodeinfo_option] [-w deadline] [-W timeout] [-p pattern] [-Q tos] [-s
packetsize] [-S sndbuf] [-t ttl] [-T timestamp option] [hop]... {destination}
ping uses the ICMP protocol's mandatory ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a host
or gateway.  ECHO_REQUEST datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and ICMP header, followed by a struct  timeval
and then an arbitrary number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the packet.
-6.
%
and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
%
grops - PostScript driver for groff
grops [-glmv] [-b n] [-c n] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-p papersize] [-P prologue] [-w n] [files ...]
grops  translates  the  output of GNU troff to PostScript.  Normally grops should be invoked by using the
groff command with a -Tps option.  (Actually, this is the default for groff.)  If  no  files  are  given,
grops  reads  the  standard  input.  A filename of - also causes grops to read the standard input.  Post‐
Script output is written to the standard output.  When grops is run by groff options  can  be  passed  to
grops using groff's -P option.
vention) if called with multiple file arguments.  To print such concatenated output it  is  necessary  to
deactivate  DSC handling in the printing program or previewer.  See section FONT INSTALLATION below for a
guide how to install fonts for grops.
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
reiserfsck - The checking tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
reiserfsck  [ -aprVy ] [ --rebuild-sb | --check | --fix-fixable | --rebuild-tree | --clean-attributes ] [
-j | --journal device ] [ -z | --adjust-size ] [ -n | --nolog ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -l  |  --log‐
file file ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -y | --yes ] [ -f | --force ] [ -S | --scan-whole-partition ] [ --no-jour‐
nal-available ] device
Reiserfsck searches for a Reiserfs filesystem on a device, replays any necessary transactions, and either
checks or repairs the file system.
device is  the  special  file  corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX for an IDE disk
partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
--rebuild-sb
%
autoreconf - Update generated configuration files
autoreconf [OPTION]... [DIRECTORY]...
Run  `autoconf'  (and  `autoheader',  `aclocal',  `automake',  `autopoint'  (formerly  `gettextize'), and
`libtoolize' where appropriate) repeatedly to remake the GNU Build System files in specified  DIRECTORIES
and their subdirectories (defaulting to `.').
By  default,  it only remakes those files that are older than their sources.  If you install new versions
of the GNU Build System, you can make `autoreconf' remake all of the files by  giving  it  the  `--force'
option.
Operation modes:
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
%
crond - daemon to execute scheduled commands
crond [-c | -h | -i | -n | -p | -P | -s | -m<mailcommand>]
crond -x [ext,sch,proc,pars,load,misc,test,bit]
systemd is enabled, then unit file is installed  into  /lib/systemd/system/crond.service  and  daemon  is
started  by systemctl start crond.service command. It returns immediately, thus, there is no need to need
to start it with the '&' parameter.
Cron searches /var/spool/cron for crontab files which are named after accounts in /etc/passwd; The  found
crontabs  are  loaded  into  the  memory.   Cron  also  searches for /etc/anacrontab and any files in the
and  checks  each  job  to see if it needs to be run in the current minute.  When executing commands, any
output is mailed to the owner of the crontab (or to the user specified in the MAILTO environment variable
%
rmdir - remove empty directories
rmdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...
Remove the DIRECTORY(ies), if they are empty.
--ignore-fail-on-non-empty
ignore each failure that is solely because a directory
is non-empty
-p, --parents
remove DIRECTORY and its ancestors; e.g., 'rmdir -p a/b/c' is similar to 'rmdir a/b/c a/b a'
%
addftinfo - add information to troff font files for use with groff
addftinfo [ -v ] [ param-option value....  ] res unitwidth font
addftinfo  reads  a  troff font file and adds some additional font-metric information that is used by the
groff system.  The font file with the information added is written on the standard output.  The  informa‐
tion  added  is guessed using some parametric information about the font and assumptions about the tradi‐
tional troff names for characters.  The main information added is the heights and depths  of  characters.
The res and unitwidth arguments should be the same as the corresponding parameters in the DESC file; font
is the name of the file describing the font; if font ends with I the font will be assumed to be italic.
–v prints the version number.
All other options change one of the parameters that are used to derive the heights and depths.  Like  the
%
write - send a message to another user
write user [ttyname]
write allows you to communicate with other users, by copying lines from your terminal to theirs.
When you run the write command, the user you are writing to gets a message of the form:
Message from yourname@yourhost on yourtty at hh:mm ...
Any  further lines you enter will be copied to the specified user's terminal.  If the other user wants to
reply, they must run write as well.
When you are done, type an end-of-file or interrupt character.  The other user will see the  message  EOF
indicating that the conversation is over.
%
msgexec - process translations of message catalog
reads a translation from standard input.  It is invoked once for each translation.   Its  output  becomes
msgexec's output.  msgexec's return code is the maximum return code across all invocations.
A  special  builtin  command  called '0' outputs the translation, followed by a null byte.  The output of
"msgexec 0" is suitable as input for "xargs -0".
Command input:
--newline
add newline at the end of input
%
code.  The tool has originally been developed as a second implementation for Libgcrypt to allow comparing
against the primary implementation and to be used for internal consistency checks.  It should not be used
for sensitive data because no mechanisms to clear the stack etc are used.
The code has been written in a highly portable manner and requires only a few standard definitions to  be
provided in a config.h file.
%
[-b bfdname|--target=bfdname]
[-C|--demangle[=style]]
[-e filename|--exe=filename]
[-f|--functions] [-s|--basename]
[-i|--inlines]
[-p|--pretty-print]
[-j|--section=name]
[-H|--help] [-V|--version]
[addr addr ...]
offset in a section of a relocatable object, it uses the debugging information to figure out which file
%
systemd-ask-password - Query the user for a system password
message specified on the command line. When run from a TTY it will query a password on the TTY and print
it to standard output. When run with no TTY or with --no-tty it will query the password system-wide and
allow active users to respond via several agents. The latter is only available to privileged processes.
The purpose of this tool is to query system-wide passwords — that is passwords not attached to a specific
user account. Examples include: unlocking encrypted hard disks when they are plugged in or at boot,
entering an SSL certificate passphrase for web and VPN servers.
Existing agents are:
%
pkg-config - Return metainformation about installed libraries
[--short-errors] [--silence-errors] [--errors-to-stdout] [--debug]  [--cflags]  [--libs]  [--libs-only-L]
provides] [--print-requires] [--print-requires-private] [LIBRARIES...]
The pkg-config program is used to retrieve information about installed libraries in the  system.   It  is
typically  used to compile and link against one or more libraries.  Here is a typical usage scenario in a
Makefile:
program: program.c
cc program.c $(pkg-config --cflags --libs gnomeui)
%
pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
pwconv [options]
pwunconv [options]
grpconv [options]
grpunconv [options]
The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
%
pacman-key - manage pacman's list of trusted keys
pacman-key [options] operation [targets]
pacman-key is a wrapper script for GnuPG used to manage pacman’s keyring, which is the collection of PGP
keys used to check signed packages and databases. It provides the ability to import and export keys,
fetch keys from keyservers and update the key trust database.
More complex keyring management can be achieved using GnuPG directly combined with the --homedir option
pointing at the pacman keyring (located in /etc/pacman.d/gnupg by default).
Invoking pacman-key consists of supplying an operation with any potential options and targets to operate
OPERATIONS
%
umount - unmount file systems
umount -a [-dflnrv] [-t fstype] [-O option...]
umount [-dflnrv] {directory|device}...
umount -h|-V
The umount command detaches the mentioned file system(s) from the file hierarchy.  A file system is spec‐
ified by giving the directory where it has been mounted.  Giving the special device  on  which  the  file
on more than one directory.
it,  or  when  some  process  has  its working directory there, or when a swap file on it is in use.  The
%
pam_tally - The login counter (tallying) module
pam_tally.so [file=/path/to/counter] [onerr=[fail|succeed]] [magic_root] [even_deny_root_account]
[deny=n] [lock_time=n] [unlock_time=n] [per_user] [no_lock_time] [no_reset] [audit] [silent]
[no_log_info]
pam_tally [--file /path/to/counter] [--user username] [--reset[=n]] [--quiet]
many attempts fail.
deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
pam_tally comes in two parts: pam_tally.so and pam_tally. The former is the PAM module and the latter, a
%
psfaddtable - add a Unicode character table to a console font
psfaddtable fontfile tablefile outfile
psfaddtable  takes a console font in .psf format given by fontfile and merges it with the Unicode charac‐
ter table given by tablefile to produce a font file with an embedded character table, which is written to
outfile.   An input file name of "-" denotes standard input, and an output file name of "-" denotes stan‐
dard output.  If the fontfile already contains an embedded character table, it is ignored.
TABLE FILE FORMAT
Each line in the tablefile should be either blank, contain a  comment  (preceded  by  #),  or  contain  a
sequence  of  numbers in either decimal (default), octal (preceded by 0), or hexadecimal (preceded by 0x)
format, separated by spaces or tabs.  The first number on each line indicates the glyph slot in the  font
%
fstrim - discard unused blocks on a mounted filesystem
fstrim [-a] [-o offset] [-l length] [-m minimum-size] [-v] mountpoint
fstrim is used on a mounted filesystem to discard (or "trim") blocks which are not in use by the filesys‐
behavior based on range or size, as explained below.
The mountpoint argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.
Running  fstrim frequently, or even using mount -o discard, might negatively affect the lifetime of poor-
quality SSD devices.  For most desktop and server systems a sufficient trimming frequency is once a week.
%
rm - remove files or directories
rm [OPTION]... [FILE]...
not remove directories.
If the -I or --interactive=once option is given, and there are more than three files or the  -r,  -R,  or
--recursive are given, then rm prompts the user for whether to proceed with the entire operation.  If the
response is not affirmative, the entire command is aborted.
Otherwise, if a file is unwritable, standard input is a terminal, and the -f or  --force  option  is  not
given,  or  the -i or --interactive=always option is given, rm prompts the user for whether to remove the
file.  If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped.
%
ddns-confgen - ddns key generation tool
tsig-keygen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-r randomfile] [name]
ddns-confgen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-k keyname] [-q] [-r randomfile] [-s name | -z zone]
tsig-keygen and ddns-confgen are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use in TSIG
signing. The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
rndc command channel.
When run as tsig-keygen, a domain name can be specified on the command line which will be used as the
name of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is tsig-key.
When run as ddns-confgen, the generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that
can be used with nsupdate and named when setting up dynamic DNS, including an example update-policy
%
mklost+found - create a lost+found directory on a mounted Linux second extended file system
mklost+found
mklost+found  is used to create a lost+found directory in the current working directory on a Linux second
extended file system.  There is normally a lost+found directory in the root directory of each filesystem.
recover  a  filesystem,  it does not need to allocate blocks in the filesystem to store a large number of
recovery.
There are none.
%
efivar - Tool to manipulate UEFI variables
efivar [OPTION...]
-L, --list-guids
list guids efivar knows about
-l, --list
list current variables
-p, --print
print variable specified by --name
-n, --name=<guid-name>
%
pr - convert text files for printing
pr [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Paginate or columnate FILE(s) for printing.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE], --pages=FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE]
begin [stop] printing with page FIRST_[LAST_]PAGE
-COLUMN, --columns=COLUMN
output  COLUMN  columns  and print columns down, unless -a is used. Balance number of lines in the
%
netctl - Control the netctl network profile manager
netctl [--help | --version]
manager.
The following commands are understood:
list
List all available profiles. Active profiles will be marked with a ‘*’.
%
vgmknodes — recreate volume group directory and logical volume special files
ones and removes unused ones.
--refresh
manually without a clustered lock manager.
%
killall - kill processes by name
killall [-Z, --context pattern] [-e, --exact] [-g, --process-group] [-i, --interactive] [-o, --older-than
TIME] [-q, --quiet] [-r, --regexp] [-s, --signal SIGNAL, -SIGNAL] [-u, --user user] [-v, --verbose]
killall -l
killall -V, --version
killall  sends  a  signal  to  all processes running any of the specified commands.  If no signal name is
specified, SIGTERM is sent.
If the command name is not regular expression (option -r) and contains a slash (/),  processes  executing
that particular file will be selected for killing, independent of their name.
%
ebrowse - create a class hierarchy database
ebrowse [options] [FILES...]
format.
ebrowse is used to create the database used by the class browser in Emacs.
The program follows the usual GNU command line syntax, with long options starting with two dashes ("-").
-a, --append
append output to existing file
%
prlimit - get and set process resource limits
prlimit [options] [--resource[=limits] [--pid PID]
prlimit [options] [--resource[=limits] command [argument...]
Given a process id and one or more resources, prlimit tries to retrieve and/or modify the limits.
When command is given, prlimit will run this command with the given arguments.
The limits parameter is composed of a soft and a hard value, separated by a colon (:), in order to modify
the existing values.  If no limits are given, prlimit will display the current values.   If  one  of  the
values  is  not  given,  then  the existing one will be used.  To specify the unlimited or infinity limit
%
zsoelim - satisfy .so requests in roff input
zsoelim [-CVh] [file ...]
zsoelim parses file arguments, or if none are specified, its standard input for lines of the form:
.so <filename>
These  requests  are  replaced  by the contents of the filename specified.  If the request cannot be met,
ported depending upon compile time options.  If the request can be met by a compressed file, this file is
decompressed using an appropriate decompressor and its output is used to satisfy the request.
Traditionally, soelim programs were used to allow roff preprocessors to be able to preprocess  the  files
%
[lock_time=n] [unlock_time=n] [root_unlock_time=n] [serialize] [audit] [silent]
[no_log_info] [debug]
many attempts fail.
manipulate the counter file. It can display user counts, set individual counts, or clear all counts.
%
etags, ctags - generate tag file for Emacs, vi
etags [-aCDGIQRVh] [-i file] [-l language]
[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
[--append] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive] [--include=file]
[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--output=tagfile]
[--class-qualify] [--regex=regexp] [--no-regex] [--help] [--version] file ...
ctags [-aCdgIQRVh] [-BtTuvwx] [-l language]
[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
[--append] [--backward-search] [--cxref] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive]
[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--class-qualify]
[--output=tagfile] [--regex=regexp] [--update] [--help] [--version] file ...
%
Compare three files line by line.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-A, --show-all
output all changes, bracketing conflicts
-e, --ed
output ed script incorporating changes from OLDFILE to YOURFILE into MYFILE
-E, --show-overlap
%
iconvconfig - create iconv module configuration cache
iconvconfig [options] [directory]...
tion file is used to determine the needed modules for a conversion.  Loading and parsing such a  configu‐
The  iconvconfig  program  reads  iconv module configuration files and writes a fast-loading gconv module
configuration cache file.
In addition to the system provided gconv modules, the user can specify custom  gconv  module  directories
with  the environment variable GCONV_PATH.  However, iconv module configuration caching is used only when
the environment variable GCONV_PATH is not set.
%
msginit - initialize a message catalog
msginit [OPTION]
Creates a new PO file, initializing the meta information with values from the user's environment.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
-i, --input=INPUTFILE
input POT file
If  no  input  file  is  given, the current directory is searched for the POT file.  If it is -, standard
input is read.
%
autoconf - Generate configuration scripts
autoconf [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]
Generate  a  configuration  script  from  a TEMPLATE-FILE if given, or `configure.ac' if present, or else
`configure.in'.  Output is sent to the standard output if TEMPLATE-FILE is given, else into `configure'.
Operation modes:
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
-V, --version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
%
update-ca-trust - manage consolidated and dynamic configuration of CA certificates and associated trust
Authority (CA) certificates and associated trust.
The feature is available for new applications that read the consolidated configuration files found in the
Parts of the new feature are also provided in a way to make it useful for legacy applications.
Many legacy applications expect CA certificates and trust configuration in a fixed location, contained in
%
resizepart - tell the kernel about the new size of a partition
resizepart device partition length
resizepart tells the Linux kernel about the new size of the specified partition.  The command is a simple
wrapper around the "resize partition" ioctl.
PARAMETERS
device The disk device.
partition
The partition number.
%
unix_chkpwd [...]
unix_chkpwd is a helper program for the pam_unix module that verifies the password of the current user.
It also checks password and account expiration dates in shadow. It is not intended to be run directly
from the command line and logs a security violation if done so.
It is typically installed setuid root or setgid shadow.
The interface of the helper - command line options, and input/output data format are internal to the
pam_unix module and it should not be called directly from applications.
%
getfacl - get file access control lists
getfacl [-aceEsRLPtpndvh] file ...
getfacl [-aceEsRLPtpndvh] -
For  each file, getfacl displays the file name, owner, the group, and the Access Control List (ACL). If a
directory has a default ACL, getfacl also displays the default ACL. Non-directories cannot  have  default
ACLs.
If  getfacl  is used on a file system that does not support ACLs, getfacl displays the access permissions
defined by the traditional file mode permission bits.
The output format of getfacl is as follows:
%
vimtutor - the Vim tutor
vimtutor [-g] [language]
Vimtutor starts the Vim tutor.  It copies the tutor file first, so that it can be modified without chang‐
ing the original file.
The Vimtutor is useful for people that want to learn their first Vim commands.
The optional argument -g starts vimtutor with gvim rather than vim, if the GUI version of vim  is  avail‐
able, or falls back to Vim if gvim is not found.
The  optional  [language] argument is the two-letter name of a language, like "it" or "es".  If the [lan‐
guage] argument is missing, the language of the current locale will be used.  If a tutor in this language
is available, it will be used.  Otherwise the English version will be used.
%
partx - tell the kernel about the presence and numbering of on-disk partitions
partx [-a|-d|-P|-r|-s|-u] [-t type] [-n M:N] [-] disk
partx [-a|-d|-P|-r|-s|-u] [-t type] partition [disk]
Given  a  device  or  disk-image, partx tries to parse the partition table and list its contents.  It can
also tell the kernel to add or remove partitions from its bookkeeping.
The disk argument is optional when a partition argument is provided.  To force scanning a partition as if
it  were  a  whole  disk (for example to list nested subpartitions), use the argument "-" (hyphen-minus).
For example:
%
glib-compile-schemas - GSettings schema compiler
glib-compile-schemas [OPTION...] {DIRECTORY}
glib-compile-schemas compiles all the GSettings XML schema files in DIRECTORY into a binary file with the
name gschemas.compiled that can be used by GSettings. The XML schema files must have the filename
extension .gschema.xml. For a detailed description of the XML file format, see the GSettings
documentation.
specified in the XDG_DATA_DIRS environment variable. The usual location to install schema files is
In addition to schema files, glib-compile-schemas reads 'vendor override' files, which are key files that
can override default values for keys in the schemas. The group names in the key files are the schema id,
%
nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
%
top - display Linux processes
top -hv|-bcHiOSs -d secs -n max -u|U user -p pid -o fld -w [cols]
The traditional switches `-' and whitespace are optional.
The  top  program  provides  a dynamic real-time view of a running system.  It can display system summary
information as well as a list of processes or threads currently being managed by the Linux  kernel.   The
types of system summary information shown and the types, order and size of information displayed for pro‐
cesses are all user configurable and that configuration can be made persistent across restarts.
The program provides a limited interactive interface for process manipulation as  well  as  a  much  more
extensive  interface  for  personal  configuration   --  encompassing every aspect of its operation.  And
while top is referred to throughout this document, you are free to name the program  anything  you  wish.
That new name, possibly an alias, will then be reflected on top's display and used when reading and writ‐
%
systemd-nspawn - Spawn a namespace container for debugging, testing and building
as the process tree, the various IPC subsystems and the host and domain name.
--directory= command line option. By using the --machine= option an OS tree is automatically searched for
in a couple of locations, most importantly in /var/lib/machines, the suggested directory to place
container images installed on the system.
%
readlink - print resolved symbolic links or canonical file names
readlink [OPTION]... FILE...
Print value of a symbolic link or canonical file name
-f, --canonicalize
canonicalize  by following every symlink in every component of the given name recursively; all but
the last component must exist
-e, --canonicalize-existing
canonicalize by following every symlink in every component of the given name recursively, all com‐
ponents must exist
-m, --canonicalize-missing
%
insmod - Simple program to insert a module into the Linux Kernel
insmod [filename] [module options...]
instead, which is more clever and can handle module dependencies.
Only the most general of error messages are reported: as the work of trying to link the module is now
done inside the kernel, the dmesg usually gives more information about errors.
others.
%
bashbug - report a bug in bash
bashbug [--version] [--help] [email-address]
bashbug  is  a  shell  script to help the user compose and mail bug reports concerning bash in a standard
format.  bashbug invokes the editor specified by the environment variable EDITOR on a temporary  copy  of
the bug report format outline. The user must fill in the appropriate fields and exit the editor.  bashbug
then mails the completed report to bug-bash@gnu.org, or email-address.  If the report cannot  be  mailed,
it is saved in the file dead.bashbug in the invoking user's home directory.
The bug report format outline consists of several sections.  The first section provides information about
the machine, operating system, the bash version, and the compilation  environment.   The  second  section
should  be  filled in with a description of the bug.  The third section should be a description of how to
reproduce the bug.  The optional fourth section is for a proposed fix.  Fixes are encouraged.
%
comm - compare two sorted files line by line
%
xargs - build and execute command lines from standard input
xargs  [-0prtx]  [-E  eof-str]  [-e[eof-str]]  [--eof[=eof-str]]  [--null]  [-d  delimiter]  [--delimiter
delimiter] [-I replace-str] [-i[replace-str]] [--replace[=replace-str]]  [-l[max-lines]]  [-L  max-lines]
[--max-lines[=max-lines]]  [-n max-args] [--max-args=max-args] [-s max-chars] [--max-chars=max-chars] [-P
max-procs]  [--max-procs=max-procs]  [--process-slot-var=name]   [--interactive]   [--verbose]   [--exit]
[--no-run-if-empty] [--arg-file=file] [--show-limits] [--version] [--help] [command [initial-arguments]]
ed by blanks (which can be protected with double or single quotes or a backslash) or newlines,  and  exe‐
cutes  the  command (default is /bin/echo) one or more times with any initial-arguments followed by items
read from standard input.  Blank lines on the standard input are ignored.
The command line for command is built up until it reaches a system-defined limit (unless the  -n  and  -L
options  are  used).  The specified command will be invoked as many times as necessary to use up the list
%
blkdeactivate — utility to deactivate block devices
blkdeactivate [-d dm_options] [-e] [-h] [-l lvm_options] [-m mpath_options] [-u] [-v] [device]
blkdeactivate utility deactivates block devices. If a device is mounted, the utility can unmount it auto‐
matically before trying to deactivate. The utility currently supports device-mapper devices (DM), includ‐
-d, --dmoption dm_options
%
usb-devices - print USB device details
usb-devices
usb-devices  is  a (bash) shell script that can be used to display details of USB buses in the system and
the devices connected to them.
The output of the script is similar to the usb/devices file available either under /proc/bus (if usbfs is
mounted),  or  under /sys/kernel/debug (if debugfs is mounted there). The script is primarily intended to
be used if the file is not available.
In contrast to the usb/devices file, this script only lists active interfaces (those marked with a "*" in
the usb/devices file) and their endpoints.
Be  advised  that  there can be differences in the way information is sorted, as well as in the format of
%
systemd-tty-ask-password-agent - List or process pending systemd password requests
systemd-tty-ask-password-agent is a password agent that handles password requests of the system, for
example for hard disk encryption passwords or SSL certificate passwords that need to be queried at
boot-time or during runtime.
The following options are understood:
--list
Lists all currently pending system password requests.
%
tail - output the last part of files
tail [OPTION]... [FILE]...
header giving the file name.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --bytes=[+]NUM
output the last NUM bytes; or use -c +NUM to output starting with byte NUM of each file
-f, --follow[={name|descriptor}]
%
dmstats — device-mapper statistics management
dmsetup stats command [options]
dmstats command [device_name |--uuid uuid|--major major --minor minor]
dmstats clear device_name [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
dmstats create [device_name...  |file_path...]  [--alldevices] [--areas nr_areas|--areasize area_size]
[--bounds histogram_boundaries] [--filemap] [--nogroup] [--precise] [--start start_sector --length
length|--segments] [--userdata user_data] [--programid id]
dmstats delete [device_name] [--alldevices] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
dmstats group [device_name] [--alias name] [--alldevices] [--regions regions]
dmstats help [-c|-C|--columns]
dmstats list [device_name] [--histogram] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--units units] [--area]
[--region] [--group] [--nosuffix] [--notimesuffix] [-v|--verbose[-v|--verbose]]
dmstats print [device_name] [--clear] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
dmstats report [device_name] [--interval seconds] [--count count] [--units units] [--histogram]
%
systemd-cgls - Recursively show control group contents
systemd-cgls recursively shows the contents of the selected Linux control group hierarchy in a tree. If
arguments are specified, shows all member processes of the specified control groups plus all their
assumed in the systemd control group hierarchy. If no argument is specified and the current working
directory is beneath the control group mount point /sys/fs/cgroup, shows the contents of the control
group the working directory refers to. Otherwise, the full systemd control group hierarchy is shown.
By default, empty control groups are not shown.
The following options are understood:
%
groupdel - delete a group
groupdel [options] GROUP
The groupdel command modifies the system account files, deleting all entries that refer to GROUP. The
named group must exist.
The options which apply to the groupdel command are:
-h, --help
Display help message and exit.
-R, --root CHROOT_DIR
Apply changes in the CHROOT_DIR directory and use the configuration files from the CHROOT_DIR
%
tftpd - Trivial File Transfer Protocol server
tftpd {directory}
requested via TFTP protocol, effectively chrooting tftpd to this directory.  File names are validated not
It is in difference of variants of tftpd usually distributed with unix-like systems, which take a list of
directories  and  match file names to start from one of given prefixes or to some random default, when no
arguments were given. There are two reasons not to behave in this way: first, it is inconvenient, clients
are  not expected to know something about layout of filesystem on server host.  And second, TFTP protocol
%
git-upload-pack - Send objects packed back to git-fetch-pack
git-upload-pack [--[no-]strict] [--timeout=<n>] [--stateless-rpc]
[--advertise-refs] <directory>
Invoked by 'git fetch-pack', learns what
objects the other side is missing, and sends them after packing.
The UI for the protocol is on the 'git fetch-pack' side, and the
program pair is meant to be used to pull updates from a remote
repository.  For push operations, see 'git send-pack'.
%
shuf - generate random permutations
shuf [OPTION]... [FILE]
shuf -e [OPTION]... [ARG]...
shuf -i LO-HI [OPTION]...
Write a random permutation of the input lines to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-e, --echo
treat each ARG as an input line
%
lsattr - list file attributes on a Linux second extended file system
lsattr [ -RVadlpv ] [ files...  ]
the attributes and what they mean.
-R     Recursively list attributes of directories and their contents.
-V     Display the program version.
-a     List all files in directories, including files that start with `.'.
-d     List directories like other files, rather than listing their contents.
%
thin_delta - Print the differences in the mappings between two thin devices.
thin_delta [options] {device|file}
thin_delta  allows you to compare the mappings in two thin volumes (snapshots allow common blocks between
thin volumes).
The numeric identifier for the first thin volume to diff.
The numeric identifier for the second thin volume to diff.
%
test - check file types and compare values
test EXPRESSION
test
[ EXPRESSION ]
[ ]
[ OPTION
Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
resolvconf — a framework for managing multiple DNS configurations
resolvconf -I
resolvconf [-m metric] [-p] [-x] -a interface[.protocol] <file
resolvconf [-f] -d interface[.protocol]
resolvconf [-x] -il pattern
resolvconf -u
ally, the host runs just one client and that updates /etc/resolv.conf.  More modern systems frequently have
wired and wireless interfaces and there is no guarantee both are on the same network.  With the advent of
VPN and other types of networking daemons, many things now contend for the contents of /etc/resolv.conf.
the argument -a interface[.protocol] instead of the filesystem.  resolvconf then updates /etc/resolv.conf
%
chfn - change your finger information
chfn [-f full-name] [-o office] [-p office-phone] [-h home-phone] [-u] [-v] [username]
is displayed by the finger program.  The Linux finger command will display  four  pieces  of  information
that can be changed by chfn: your real name, your work room and phone, and your home phone.
Any  of  the four pieces of information can be specified on the command line.  If no information is given
on the command line, chfn enters interactive mode.
In interactive mode, chfn will prompt for each field.  At a prompt, you can enter the new information, or
just press return to leave the field unchanged.  Enter the keyword "none" to make the field blank.
chfn  supports  non-local  entries  (kerberos,  LDAP, etc.) if linked with libuser, otherwise use ypchfn,
%
vgexport - make volume groups unknown to the system
ignore exported Volume Groups.  vgexport clears the VG system ID, and vgimport sets the VG system  ID  to
match the host running vgimport (if the host has a system ID).
-a, --all
Export all inactive Volume Groups.
%
gitk - The Git repository browser
gitk [<options>] [<revision range>] [--] [<path>...]
graph, showing information related to each commit, and the files in the trees of each revision.
To control which revisions to show, gitk supports most options applicable to the git rev-list command. It
also supports a few options applicable to the git diff-* commands to control how the changes each commit
introduces are shown. Finally, it supports some gitk-specific options.
gitk generally only understands options with arguments in the sticked form (see gitcli(7)) due to
limitations in the command-line parser.
%
device.
label.
%
fsck.minix - check consistency of Minix filesystem
fsck.minix [options] device
fsck.minix performs a consistency check for the Linux MINIX filesystem.
The  program  assumes  the  filesystem  is  quiescent.  fsck.minix should not be used on a mounted device
unless you can be sure nobody is writing to it.  Remember that the kernel can write  to  device  when  it
searches for files.
The device name will usually have the following form:
%
lslogins - display information about known users in the system
lslogins [options] [-s|-u[=UID]] [-g groups] [-l logins]
Examine the wtmp and btmp logs, /etc/shadow (if necessary) and /etc/passwd and output the desired data.
The default action is to list info about all the users in the system.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --acc-expiration
for more info).  (Requires root privileges.)
%
w - Show who is logged on and what they are doing.
w [options] user [...]
w  displays information about the users currently on the machine, and their processes.  The header shows,
in this order, the current time, how long the system has been  running,  how  many  users  are  currently
The following entries are displayed for each user: login name, the tty name, the remote host, login time,
idle time, JCPU, PCPU, and the command line of their current process.
The JCPU time is the time used by all processes attached to the tty.  It does not include past background
jobs, but does include currently running background jobs.
The PCPU time is the time used by the current process, named in the "what" field.
%
compile_et - error table compiler
compile_et file
Compile_et  converts  a table listing error-code names and associated messages into a C source file suit‐
The source file name must end with a suffix of ``.et''; the file consists of a declaration supplying  the
name (up to four characters long) of the error-code table:
error_table name
error_code name, " string "
%
gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
%
attr - extended attributes on XFS filesystem objects
attr [ -LRSq ] -s attrname [ -V attrvalue ] pathname
attr [ -LRSq ] -g attrname pathname
attr [ -LRSq ] -r attrname pathname
attr [ -LRSq ] -l pathname
Extended attributes implement the ability for a user to attach name:value pairs to objects within the XFS
filesystem.
name.  It is thus aimed specifically at users of the XFS filesystem - for filesystem independent extended
%
genl-ctrl-list - List available kernel-side Generic Netlink families
genl-ctrl-list [-d]
Queries the Generic Netlink controller in kernel and prints a list of all registered Generic Netlink fam‐
ilies including the version of the interface that has been registered.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
Print versioning information to console and exit.
-d or --details
%
ldns-test-edns - test if dns cache supports EDNS and DNSSEC.
ldns-test-edns [ -i ] { ip }
ldns-test-edns  tests a DNS cache and checks if it supports EDNS0 and DNSSEC types so that it can be used
as a dnssec-enabled DNS cache.  It sends two queries to the cache, one for the root key and one for a  DS
record.  These must succeed, the answer must have EDNS, that type and signatures.
If  the  IP address is good for DNSSEC, it is printed with 'OK'.  Otherwise short description is given of
the failure.  If OK is given, the cache should be good to use as a cache for a  local  configured  DNSSEC
validator.
The  tool  assumes the root is signed and Sweden is signed.  Also, the queries are sent with the CD flag,
the tool does not check that the results are validated, but that they can be validated.
%
ldns-update - send a dynamic update packet
ldns-update [ zone ] ip [ tsig_name tsig_als tsig_hmac ]
ldns-update is used to send a dynamic update packet.
zone   Use this zone instead of trying to read it from the zonefile's SOA record.
ip     Send the update to this IP address
tsig_name tsig_alg tsig_hmac
%
kprop [-r realm] [-f file] [-d] [-P port] [-s keytab] slave_host
-r realm
Specifies the realm of the master server.
-f file
Specifies the filename where the dumped principal database file is to be  found;  by  default  the
%
zmore - file perusal filter for crt viewing of compressed text
zmore [ name ...  ]
Zmore is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files one screenful at a time on a
soft-copy terminal.  zmore works on files compressed with compress, pack or  gzip,  and  also  on  uncom‐
pressed  files.  If a file does not exist, zmore looks for a file of the same name with the addition of a
.gz, .z or .Z suffix.
Zmore normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at the bottom of the screen.  If  the  user
then types a carriage return, one more line is displayed.  If the user hits a space, another screenful is
displayed.  Other possibilities are enumerated later.
Zmore looks in the file /etc/termcap to determine terminal characteristics, and to determine the  default
%
aclocal [OPTION]...
--automake-acdir=DIR
--system-acdir=DIR
directory holding third-party system-wide files
%
thin_rmap - output reverse map of a thin provisioned region of blocks from metadata device or file
thin_rmap [options] {device|file}
thin_rmap outputs the reverse mapping stored in the metadata on a device or file between a region of thin
provisioned pool blocks and the associated thin provisioned devices.
--region <block range>
output reverse map
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
%
msgunfmt - uncompile message catalog from binary format
msgunfmt [OPTION] [FILE]...
Convert binary message catalog to Uniforum style .po file.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Operation mode:
-j, --java
Java mode: input is a Java ResourceBundle class
--csharp
C# mode: input is a .NET .dll file
%
external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
indicates that further checking is required.
-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
%
tsort - perform topological sort
tsort [OPTION] [FILE]
Write totally ordered list consistent with the partial ordering in FILE.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Mark Kettenis.
%
gpgsm - CMS encryption and signing tool
gpgsm [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] command [args]
and the CMS protocol.  It is mainly used as a backend for S/MIME mail processing.  gpgsm includes a  full
featured certificate management and complies with all rules defined for the German Sphinx project.
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that only one command is allowed.
Commands not specific to the function
--version
%
fsadm — utility to resize or check filesystem on a device
fsadm [options] check device
fsadm [options] resize device [new_size]
-e|--ext-offline
-f|--force
Bypass some sanity checks.
%
pgrep, pkill - look up or signal processes based on name and other attributes
pgrep [options] pattern
pkill [options] pattern
pgrep  looks  through the currently running processes and lists the process IDs which match the selection
criteria to stdout.  All the criteria have to match.  For example,
$ pgrep -u root sshd
will only list the processes called sshd AND owned by root.  On the other hand,
$ pgrep -u root,daemon
will list the processes owned by root OR daemon.
%
Process macros in FILEs.  If no FILE or if FILE is `-', standard input is read.
Mandatory or optional arguments to long options are mandatory or optional for short options too.
Operation modes:
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
-E, --fatal-warnings
%
xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
served.
The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
%
msgfmt - compile message catalog to binary format
msgfmt [OPTION] filename.po ...
Generate binary message catalog from textual translation description.
Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for short options too.  Similarly for optional argu‐
ments.
Input file location:
filename.po ...
input files
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
%
nscd - name service cache daemon
Nscd is a daemon that provides a cache for the most common name service requests.  The default configura‐
There are two caches for each database: a positive one for items found, and a negative one for items  not
--help will give you a list with all options and what they do.
%
xzless, lzless - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
xzless [file...]
lzless [file...]
xzless  is a filter that displays text from compressed files to a terminal.  It works on files compressed
The command named lzless is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
ENVIRONMENT
%
and improves the file access speed.
mount point of it and reduces fragmentation of all files in this mount point.
-c     Get  a  current  fragmentation count and an ideal fragmentation count, and calculate fragmentation
%
factor - factor numbers
factor [NUMBER]...
factor OPTION
Print  the  prime  factors  of each specified integer NUMBER.  If none are specified on the command line,
read them from standard input.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Paul Rubin, Torbjorn Granlund, and Niels Moller.
%
strfile - create a random access file for storing strings
unstr - dump strings in pointer order
strfile [-iorsx] [-c char] sourcefile [outputfile]
unstr [-c char] datafile[.ext] [outputfile]
strfile  reads a file containing groups of lines separated by a line containing a single percent `%' sign
(or other specified delimiter character) and creates a data file which contains a header structure and  a
The output file, if not specified on the command line, is named sourcefile.dat.
The  purpose of unstr is to undo the work of strfile.  It prints out the strings contained in the source‐
file, which is datafile.ext without its extension, or datafile if no  extension  is  specified  (in  this
%
rtcwake - enter a system sleep state until specified wakeup time
rtcwake [options] [-d device] [-m standby_mode] {-s seconds|-t time_t}
specified time.  It uses any RTC framework driver that supports standard driver model wakeup flags.
disk).  Not all systems have persistent media that are appropriate for such suspend modes.
%
grog — guess options for a following groff command
grog [-C] [--run] [--warnings] [--ligatures] [ groff-option ....]  [--] [ filespec ....]
grog -h | --help
grog -v | --version
to perform the input with the groff program.
The corresponding groff command is usually displayed in standard output.  With the  option  --run,
the  generated  line  is  output into standard error and the generated groff command is run on the
standard output.
The option -v or --version prints information on the version number.  Also  -h  or  --help  prints  usage
%
blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
size ]
by device.
%
nl - number lines of files
nl [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Write each FILE to standard output, with line numbers added.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --body-numbering=STYLE
use STYLE for numbering body lines
-d, --section-delimiter=CC
use CC for separating logical pages
%
git-cvsserver - A CVS server emulator for Git
SSH:
export CVS_SERVER="git cvsserver"
cvs -d :ext:user@server/path/repo.git co <HEAD_name>
pserver (/etc/inetd.conf):
cvspserver stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/bin/git-cvsserver git-cvsserver pserver
git-cvsserver [options] [pserver|server] [<directory> ...]
%
ocsptool - GnuTLS OCSP tool
ocsptool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
Ocsptool  is  a  program  that  can  parse  and print information about OCSP requests/responses, generate
requests and verify responses.
-d number, --debug=number
constrained to being:
in the range  0 through 9999
%
grub-macbless - bless a mac file/directory
Mac-style bless on HFS or HFS+
-p, --ppc
bless for ppc-based macs
-v, --verbose
print verbose messages.
%
iptables-restore — Restore IP Tables
ip6tables-restore — Restore IPv6 Tables
iptables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
ip6tables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
iptables-restore  and  ip6tables-restore  are  used  to restore IP and IPv6 Tables from data specified on
STDIN or in file. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file or specify  file  as  an
argument.
-c, --counters
restore the values of all packet and byte counters
%
tbl - format tables for troff
tbl [-Cv] [files ...]
tbl compiles descriptions of tables embedded within troff input files into commands that  are  understood
by  troff.   Normally,  it  should be invoked using the -t option of groff.  It is highly compatible with
Unix tbl.  The output generated by GNU tbl cannot be processed with Unix troff; it must be processed with
GNU  troff.  If no files are given on the command line or a filename of - is given, the standard input is
read.
-C     Enable compatibility mode to recognize .TS and .TE even when followed by a  character  other  than
space or newline.  Leader characters (\a) are handled as interpreted.
%
networkctl - Query the status of network links
configuration syntax.
The following options are understood:
-a --all
Show all links with status.
-h, --help
%
gtester-report - test report formatting utility
gtester-report [option...] [gtester-log]
gtester-report is a script which converts the XML output generated by gtester into HTML.
-h, --help
print help and exit
-v, --version
print version information and exit
-s, --subunit
Output subunit. Needs python-subunit.
%
bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
%
watchgnupg - Read and print logs from a socket
watchgnupg [--force] [--verbose] socketname
Most  of  the main utilities are able to write their log files to a Unix Domain socket if configured that
way.  watchgnupg is a simple listener for such a socket.  It ameliorates the output with a time stamp and
available for Windows.
watchgnupg is commonly invoked as
watchgnupg --force ~/.gnupg/S.log
watchgnupg understands these options:
%
sudo, sudoedit — execute a command as another user
sudo -h | -K | -k | -V
sudo -v [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user]
sudo -l [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-U user] [-u user] [command]
sudo [-AbEHnPS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-r role] [-t type]
[-u user] [VAR=value] [-i | -s] [command]
sudoedit [-AknS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user] file ...
sudo allows a permitted user to execute a command as the superuser or another user, as specified by the
security policy.  The invoking user's real (not effective) user ID is used to determine the user name with
which to query the security policy.
sudo supports a plugin architecture for security policies and input/output logging.  Third parties can
develop and distribute their own policy and I/O logging plugins to work seamlessly with the sudo front end.
%
vercmp - version comparison utility
vercmp is used to determine the relationship between two given version numbers. It outputs values as
follows:
Version comparison operates as follows:
%
xxd - make a hexdump or do the reverse.
xxd -h[elp]
xxd [options] [infile [outfile]]
xxd -r[evert] [options] [infile [outfile]]
xxd  creates  a  hex  dump of a given file or standard input.  It can also convert a hex dump back to its
`mail-safe' ASCII representation, but has the advantage of decoding to standard output.  Moreover, it can
be used to perform binary file patching.
If no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile is specified as a `-' character, then input  is
taken from standard input.  If no outfile is given (or a `-' character is in its place), results are sent
to standard output.
%
tailf - follow the growth of a log file
tailf [option] file
days it's safe to use tail -f (from coreutils), in contrast to  what  the  original  documentation  below
says.
updating  the  access  time  for  the file, so a filesystem flush does not occur periodically when no log
activity is happening.
tailf is extremely useful for monitoring log files on a laptop when logging is infrequent  and  the  user
wishes the hard disk to spin down to conserve battery life.
%
fallocate - preallocate or deallocate space to a file
fallocate [-c|-p|-z] [-o offset] -l length [-n] filename
fallocate -d [-o offset] [-l length] filename
fallocate  is used to manipulate the allocated disk space for a file, either to deallocate or preallocate
it.  For filesystems which support the fallocate system call, preallocation is done quickly by allocating
creating a file by filling it with zeroes.
%
colcrt - filter nroff output for CRT previewing
colcrt [options] [file...]
colcrt  provides virtual half-line and reverse line feed sequences for terminals without such capability,
and on which overstriking is destructive.  Half-line characters and underlining (changed to dashing  `-')
are placed on new lines in between the normal output lines.
-, --no-underlining
Causes all half-lines to be printed, effectively double spacing the output.  Normally,  a  minimal
%
halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
The following options are understood:
--help
Print a short help text and exit.
%
mkfs.bfs - make an SCO bfs filesystem
mkfs.bfs [options] device [block-count]
mkfs.bfs creates an SCO bfs filesystem on a block device (usually a disk partition or a file accessed via
the loop device).
The block-count parameter is the desired size of the filesystem, in blocks.  If nothing is specified, the
entire partition will be used.
-N, --inodes number
%
vipw, vigr - edit the password or group file
vipw [options]
vigr [options]
vipw edits the password file after setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after
the password file is unlocked.  If the password file is already locked for editing by another user,  vipw
file in the same manner as vipw does the passwd file.
ENVIRONMENT
If the following environment variable exists, it will be utilized by vipw and vigr:
%
gapplication - D-Bus application launcher
gapplication version
gapplication list-apps
gapplication launch APPID
gapplication launch APPID [FILE...]
gapplication list-actions APPID
gapplication action APPID ACTION [PARAMETER]
%
gettext - translate message
gettext [OPTION] [[TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]
gettext [OPTION] -s [MSGID]...
The  gettext  program  translates  a natural language message into the user's language, by looking up the
translation in a message catalog.
Display native language translation of a textual message.
-d, --domain=TEXTDOMAIN
retrieve translated messages from TEXTDOMAIN
-e     enable expansion of some escape sequences
%
veritysetup - manage dm-verity (block level verification) volumes
veritysetup <options> <action> <action args>
Veritysetup is used to configure dm-verity managed device-mapper mappings.
Device-mapper verity target provides read-only transparent integrity checking of block devices using ker‐
nel crypto API.
The dm-verity devices are always read-only.
Veritysetup supports these operations:
format <data_device> <hash_device>
%
btrfs-map-logical - map btrfs logical extent to physical extent
btrfs-map-logical <options> <device>
btrfs-map-logical can be used to find out what the physical offsets are on the mirrors, the result is
dumped into stdout in default.
Mainly used for debug purpose.
-l|--logical <logical_num>
Logical extent to map.
-c|--copy <copy>
%
diff - compare files line by line
diff [OPTION]... FILES
Compare FILES line by line.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
--normal
output a normal diff (the default)
-q, --brief
report only when files differ
-s, --report-identical-files
%
psktool - GnuTLS PSK tool
psktool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
Program   that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a
key file.
-d number, --debug=number
constrained to being:
in the range  0 through 9999
%
AS - the portable GNU assembler.
as [-a[cdghlns][=file]] [--alternate] [-D]
[--compress-debug-sections]  [--nocompress-debug-sections]
[--debug-prefix-map old=new]
[--defsym sym=val] [-f] [-g] [--gstabs]
[--help] [-I dir] [-J]
[-K] [-L] [--listing-lhs-width=NUM]
[--listing-cont-lines=NUM] [--keep-locals]
[--no-pad-sections]
[-o objfile] [-R]
[--hash-size=NUM] [--reduce-memory-overheads]
[--statistics]
[-v] [-version] [--version]
%
mkfs.minix - make a Minix filesystem
mkfs.minix [options] device [size-in-blocks]
mkfs.minix creates a Linux MINIX filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
The device is usually of the following form:
on a character device :-).
%
id - print real and effective user and group IDs
id [OPTION]... [USER]
Print user and group information for the specified USER, or (when USER omitted) for the current user.
-a     ignore, for compatibility with other versions
-Z, --context
print only the security context of the process
-g, --group
print only the effective group ID
-G, --groups
%
xmlwf - Determines if an XML document is well-formed
xmlwf [-s] [-n] [-p] [-x] [-e encoding] [-w] [-d output-dir] [-c] [-m] [-r] [-t] [-v] [file ...]
xmlwf uses the Expat library to determine if an XML document is well-formed. It is non-validating.
If  you  do  not specify any files on the command-line, and you have a recent version of xmlwf, the input
file will be read from standard input.
A well-formed document must adhere to the following rules:
xmlwf does not currently check for a valid XML declaration.
%
wipefs - wipe a signature from a device
wipefs [-ahnpqtV] [-o offset] device...
wipefs can erase filesystem, raid or partition-table signatures (magic strings) from the specified device
to make the signatures invisible for libblkid.
wipefs does not erase the filesystem itself nor any other data from the device.  When  used  without  any
options, wipefs lists all visible filesystems and the offsets of their basic signatures.
wipefs  calls  the  BLKRRPART  ioctl  when it has erased a partition-table signature to inform the kernel
about the change.
command  lists  only  the first offset where a magic string has been detected.  The device is not scanned
%
Wget - The non-interactive network downloader.
wget [option]... [URL]...
GNU Wget is a free utility for non-interactive download of files from the Web.  It supports HTTP, HTTPS,
and FTP protocols, as well as retrieval through HTTP proxies.
Wget is non-interactive, meaning that it can work in the background, while the user is not logged on.
contrast, most of the Web browsers require constant user's presence, which can be a great hindrance when
transferring a lot of data.
Wget can follow links in HTML, XHTML, and CSS pages, to create local versions of remote web sites, fully
downloading."  While doing that, Wget respects the Robot Exclusion Standard (/robots.txt).  Wget can be
%
vgs — report information about volume groups
[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly] [--namepre‐
fixes] [--noheadings] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--separator
Separator]  [--unbuffered]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]  [--unquoted]  [-v|--verbose] [--version] [Vol‐
vgs produces formatted output about volume groups.
--all  List all volume groups.  Equivalent to not specifying any volume groups.
%
hwclock - read or set the hardware clock (RTC)
hwclock [function] [option...]
hwclock  is  a  tool  for accessing the Hardware Clock.  It can: display the Hardware Clock time; set the
Hardware Clock to a specified time; set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock; set  the  System  Clock
from the Hardware Clock; compensate for Hardware Clock drift; correct the System Clock timescale; set the
kernel's timezone, NTP timescale, and epoch (Alpha only); compare the System  and  Hardware  Clocks;  and
predict future Hardware Clock values based on its drift rate.
option --update-drift was added.  See their respective descriptions below.
FUNCTIONS
The following functions are mutually exclusive, only one can be given at a time.  If none is  given,  the
%
xfs_rtcp - XFS realtime copy command
xfs_rtcp [ -e extsize ] [ -p ] source ... target
xfs_rtcp -V
xfs_rtcp  copies a file to the realtime partition on an XFS filesystem.  If there is more than one source
and target, the final argument (the target) must be a directory which already exists.
-e extsize
Sets the extent size of the destination realtime file.
-p     Use if the size of the source file is not an even multiple of the block size  of  the  destination
filesystem. When -p is specified xfs_rtcp will pad the destination file to a size which is an even
%
iptables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
ip6tables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -I chain [rulenum] rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -R chain rulenum rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -D chain rulenum
iptables [-t table] -S [chain [rulenum]]
iptables [-t table] {-F|-L|-Z} [chain [rulenum]] [options...]
%
texindex - sort Texinfo index files
texindex [OPTION]... FILE...
Generate  a  sorted index for each TeX output FILE.  Usually FILE... is specified as `foo.??' for a docu‐
ment `foo.texi'.
-h, --help
display this help and exit
--version
display version information and exit
--     end option processing
%
xfs_mkfile - create an XFS file
xfs_mkfile [ -v ] [ -n ] [ -p ] size[k|b|m|g] filename ...
xfs_mkfile -V
xfs_mkfile  creates one or more files. The file is padded with zeroes by default.  The default size is in
bytes, but it can be flagged as kilobytes, blocks, megabytes, or gigabytes with the k, b, m,  or  g  suf‐
fixes, respectively.
-v     Verbose. Report the names and sizes of created files.
-n     No  bytes.  Create a holey file - that is, do not write out any data, just seek to end of file and
write a block.
%
autopoint - copies standard gettext infrastructure
autopoint [OPTION]...
Copies standard gettext infrastructure files into a source package.
--help print this help and exit
--version
print version information and exit
-f, --force
force overwriting of files that already exist
%
kbd_mode - report or set the keyboard mode
kbd_mode [ -a | -u | -k | -s ] [ -C CONSOLE ]
Without argument, kbd_mode prints the current keyboard mode (RAW, MEDIUMRAW or XLATE).  With argument, it
sets the keyboard mode as indicated:
-s: scancode mode (RAW),
-k: keycode mode (MEDIUMRAW),
-a: ASCII mode (XLATE),
%
pam_timestamp_check - Check to see if the default timestamp is valid
pam_timestamp_check [-k] [-d] [target_user]
With no arguments pam_timestamp_check will check to see if the default timestamp is valid, or optionally
remove it.
-k
-d
Instead of returning validity using an exit status, loop indefinitely, polling regularly and printing
the status on standard output.
%
chroot - run command or interactive shell with special root directory
chroot OPTION
--groups=G_LIST
--userspec=USER:GROUP
specify user and group (ID or name) to use
--skip-chdir
do not change working directory to '/'
%
lsns - list namespaces
lsns [options] [namespace]
lsns  lists  information about all the currently accessible namespaces or about the given namespace.  The
namespace identifier is an inode number.
The default output is subject to change.  So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in
your  scripts.   Always  explicitly  define expected columns by using the --output option together with a
columns list in environments where a stable output is required.
(see unshare --mount-proc for more details).  lsns is not able to see persistent namespaces without  pro‐
%
lvmsadc — LVM system activity data collector
lvmsadc
%
lzmainfo - show information stored in the .lzma file header
lzmainfo [--help] [--version] [file...]
fied file, decodes the header, and prints it to standard output in human readable format.   If  no  files
are given or file is -, standard input is read.
Usually  the most interesting information is the uncompressed size and the dictionary size.  Uncompressed
size can be shown only if the file is in the non-streamed .lzma format variant.   The  amount  of  memory
required to decompress the file is a few dozen kilobytes plus the dictionary size.
lzmainfo is included in XZ Utils primarily for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
%
lnstat - unified linux network statistics
lnstat [options]
lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
/proc/net/stat/.
Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
%
envsubst - substitutes environment variables in shell format strings
envsubst [OPTION] [SHELL-FORMAT]
Substitutes the values of environment variables.
Operation mode:
-v, --variables
output the variables occurring in SHELL-FORMAT
Informative output:
-h, --help
display this help and exit
-V, --version
%
iconv - convert text from one character encoding to another
iconv [options] [-f from-encoding] [-t to-encoding] [inputfile]...
The  iconv  program  reads in text in one encoding and outputs the text in another encoding.  If no input
files are given, or if it is given as a dash (-), iconv reads from standard input.  If no output file  is
given, iconv writes to standard output.
If no from-encoding is given, the default is derived from the current locale's character encoding.  If no
to-encoding is given, the default is derived from the current locale's character encoding.
-f from-encoding, --from-code=from-encoding
Use from-encoding for input characters.
%
kpropd  [-r  realm]  [-A  admin_server]  [-a  acl_file]  [-f  slave_dumpfile] [-F principal_database] [-p
program.   If  incremental  propagation is enabled, it periodically requests incremental updates from the
master KDC.
When the slave receives a kprop request from the master, kpropd  accepts  the  dumped  KDC  database  and
database  to  the slave servers.  Upon a successful download of the KDC database file, the slave Kerberos
server will have an up-to-date KDC database.
%
pgrep, pkill - look up or signal processes based on name and other attributes
pgrep [options] pattern
pkill [options] pattern
pgrep  looks  through the currently running processes and lists the process IDs which match the selection
criteria to stdout.  All the criteria have to match.  For example,
$ pgrep -u root sshd
will only list the processes called sshd AND owned by root.  On the other hand,
$ pgrep -u root,daemon
will list the processes owned by root OR daemon.
%
fold - wrap each input line to fit in specified width
fold [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Wrap input lines in each FILE, writing to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --bytes
count bytes rather than columns
-s, --spaces
break at spaces
%
chrt - manipulate the real-time attributes of a process
chrt [options] priority command [argument...]
chrt [options] -p [priority] pid
chrt  sets  or retrieves the real-time scheduling attributes of an existing pid, or runs command with the
given attributes.
POLICIES
-o, --other
-f, --fifo
Set scheduling policy to SCHED_FIFO.
%
sync - Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage
sync [OPTION] [FILE]...
Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage
If one or more files are specified, sync only them, or their containing file systems.
-d, --data
sync only file data, no unneeded metadata
-f, --file-system
sync the file systems that contain the files
--help display this help and exit
%
lvconvert — change LV type and other utilities
lvconvert [OPTION]...  VolumeGroup/LogicalVolume
-b, --background
--cachepolicy Policy
--cachesettings Key=Value
-c, --chunksize ChunkSize[b|B|s|S|k|K|m|M|g|G]
--corelog
--discards {ignore|nopassdown|passdown}
-i, --interval Seconds
--merge
--mirrorlog {disk|core|mirrored}
-m, --mirrors Number
%
dpa - DNS Packet Analyzer. Analyze DNS packets in ip trace files
dpa [ OPTION ] TRACEFILE
uniques (i.e. count all different occurences).
-c expressionlist
Count occurrences of matching expressions
-f expression
Filter: only process packets that match the expression
-h     Show usage
%
unlink - call the unlink function to remove the specified file
unlink FILE
unlink OPTION
Call the unlink function to remove the specified FILE.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Michael Stone.
%
ss - another utility to investigate sockets
ss [options] [ FILTER ]
ss  is  used to dump socket statistics. It allows showing information similar to netstat.  It can display
more TCP and state informations than other tools.
established connection.
-h, --help
Show summary of options.
-V, --version
%
split - split a file into pieces
split [OPTION]... [FILE [PREFIX]]
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --suffix-length=N
--additional-suffix=SUFFIX
append an additional SUFFIX to file names
%
dconf - Simple tool for manipulating a dconf database
dconf read KEY
dconf list DIR
dconf write KEY VALUE
dconf reset [-f] PATH
dconf compile OUTPUT KEYFILEDIR
dconf update
dconf watch PATH
%
iptables-restore — Restore IP Tables
ip6tables-restore — Restore IPv6 Tables
iptables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
ip6tables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
iptables-restore  and  ip6tables-restore  are  used  to restore IP and IPv6 Tables from data specified on
STDIN or in file. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file or specify  file  as  an
argument.
-c, --counters
restore the values of all packet and byte counters
%
tset, reset - terminal initialization
tset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
reset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
mination is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
ting TERM according to the type passed to it by /etc/inittab.)
%
getent [option]... database key...
are configured in /etc/nsswitch.conf.  If one or more key arguments are provided, then only  the  entries
that  match  the  supplied keys will be displayed.  Otherwise, if no key is provided, all entries will be
displayed (unless the database does not support enumeration).
enumerating each socket address structure returned.
%
rndc - name server control utility
rndc [-b source-address] [-c config-file] [-k key-file] [-s server] [-p port] [-q] [-r] [-V] [-y key_id]
{command}
rndc controls the operation of a name server. It supersedes the ndc utility that was provided in old BIND
releases. If rndc is invoked with no command line options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the
supported commands and the available options and their arguments.
rndc communicates with the name server over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with digital
signatures. In the current versions of rndc and named, the only supported authentication algorithms are
command request and the name server's response. All commands sent over the channel must be signed by a
key_id known to the server.
%
arping - send ARP REQUEST to a neighbour host
arping [-AbDfhqUV] [-c count] [-w deadline] [-s source] {-I interface} {destination}
Ping destination on device interface by ARP packets, using source address source.
-A     The same as -U, but ARP REPLY packets used instead of ARP REQUEST.
-b     Send  only MAC level broadcasts. Normally arping starts from sending broadcast, and switch to uni‐
cast after reply received.
Stop after sending count ARP REQUEST
timeout expires.
%
gobject-query - display a tree of types
gobject-query froots [OPTION...]
gobject-query tree [OPTION...]
gobject-query is a small utility that draws a tree of types.
gobject-query takes a mandatory argument that specifies whether it should iterate over the fundamental
types or print a type tree.
froots
iterate over fundamental roots
%
dbus-cleanup-sockets - clean up leftover sockets in a directory
dbus-cleanup-sockets [DIRECTORY]
The dbus-cleanup-sockets command cleans up unused D-Bus connection sockets. See
http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
If given no arguments, dbus-cleanup-sockets cleans up sockets in the standard default socket directory
for the per-user-login-session message bus; this is usually /tmp. Optionally, you can pass a different
directory on the command line.
On Linux, this program is essentially useless, because D-Bus defaults to using "abstract sockets" that
exist only in memory and don't have a corresponding file in /tmp.
%
lvrename — rename a logical volume
[-v|--verbose] [--version]  [-f|--force]  [--noudevsync]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  {OldLogicalVol‐
lvrename  renames an existing logical volume or an existing historical logical volume from OldLogicalVol‐
--noudevsync
Disable udev synchronisation. The process will not wait for notification from udev.  It will  con‐
tinue irrespective of any possible udev processing in the background.  You should only use this if
%
msgattrib - attribute matching and manipulation on message catalog
msgattrib [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
Filters  the  messages  of  a  translation  catalog  according  to  their attributes, and manipulates the
attributes.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE
input PO file
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
%
isc-hmac-fixup - fixes HMAC keys generated by older versions of BIND
isc-hmac-fixup {algorithm} {secret}
Versions of BIND 9 up to and including BIND 9.6 had a bug causing HMAC-SHA* TSIG keys which were longer
incompatible with other DNS implementations.
versions of BIND, when using long keys.  isc-hmac-fixup modifies those keys to restore compatibility.
To modify a key, run isc-hmac-fixup and specify the key's algorithm and secret on the command line. If
%
rcp - Remote copy
rcp [OPTION...] SOURCE DEST
rcp [OPTION...] SOURCE... DIRECTORY
rcp [OPTION...] --target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE...
Remote copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
-6, --ipv6
use only IPv6
-d, --target-directory[=DIRECTORY]
%
sed - stream editor for filtering and transforming text
sed [OPTION]... {script-only-if-no-other-script} [input-file]...
Sed is a stream editor.  A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream
(a file or input from a pipeline).  While in some ways similar to an editor which permits scripted  edits
(such  as  ed),  sed works by making only one pass over the input(s), and is consequently more efficient.
But it is sed's ability to filter text in a pipeline which particularly distinguishes it from other types
of editors.
-n, --quiet, --silent
suppress automatic printing of pattern space
-e script, --expression=script
%
run-parts - run scripts or programs in a directory
run-parts  [--test]  [--verbose]  [--report] [--lsbsysinit] [--regex=RE] [--umask=umask] [--arg=argument]
[--exit-on-error] [--help] [--version] [--list] [--reverse] [--] DIRECTORY
run-parts -V
run-parts runs all the executable files named within constraints  described  below,  found  in  directory
directory.  Other files and directories are silently ignored.
If  neither  the --lsbsysinit option nor the --regex option is given then the names must consist entirely
If the --lsbsysinit option is given, then the names must not end in .dpkg-old  or .dpkg-dist or .dpkg-new
or  .dpkg-tmp,  and must belong to one or more of the following namespaces: the LANANA-assigned namespace
%
ssh — OpenSSH SSH client (remote login program)
[-l login_name] [-m mac_spec] [-O ctl_cmd] [-o option] [-p port] [-Q query_option] [-R address]
[-S ctl_path] [-W host:port] [-w local_tun[:remote_tun]] [user@]hostname [command]
ssh (SSH client) is a program for logging into a remote machine and for executing commands on a remote
machine.  It is intended to provide secure encrypted communications between two untrusted hosts over an
the secure channel.
ssh connects and logs into the specified hostname (with optional user name).  The user must prove his/her
identity to the remote machine using one of several methods (see below).
%
flex - the fast lexical analyser generator
Generates programs that perform pattern-matching on text.
Table Compression:
-Ca, --align
trade off larger tables for better memory alignment
-Ce, --ecs
construct equivalence classes
-Cf    do not compress tables; use -f representation
%
trust - Tool for operating on the trust policy store
trust list
trust extract --filter=<what> --format=<type> /path/to/destination
trust anchor /path/to/certificate.crt
trust is a command line tool to examine and modify the shared trust policy store.
See the various sub commands below. The following global options can be used:
-v, --verbose
Run in verbose mode with debug output.
%
preconv - convert encoding of input files to something GNU troff understands
preconv [-dr] [-e encoding] [files ...]
preconv -h | --help
preconv -v | --version
It is possible to have whitespace between the -e command line option and its parameter.
standard output.  Currently, this means ASCII characters and ‘\[uXXXX]’ entities, where ‘XXXX’ is a hexa‐
decimal  number  with four to six digits, representing a Unicode input code.  Normally, preconv should be
invoked with the -k and -K options of groff.
-d     Emit debugging messages to standard error (mainly the used encoding).
%
dircolors - color setup for ls
dircolors [OPTION]... [FILE]
Output commands to set the LS_COLORS environment variable.
Determine format of output:
-b, --sh, --bourne-shell
output Bourne shell code to set LS_COLORS
-c, --csh, --c-shell
output C shell code to set LS_COLORS
-p, --print-database
output defaults
%
thin_dump - dump thin provisioning metadata from device or file to standard output
thin_dump [options] {device|file}
thin_dump  dumps  binary  thin provisioning metadata (optionally from alternate block; see option --meta‐
data-snap) created by the device-mapper thin provisioning target on a device or file to  standard  output
for  analysis or postprocessing in either XML or human readable format.  XML formated metadata can be fed
device-mapper target) or file.
-f, --format {xml|human_readable}
Print output in XML or human readable format.
%
iptables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
ip6tables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
iptables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
ip6tables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
iptables-save  and  ip6tables-save  are used to dump the contents of IP or IPv6 Table in easily parseable
format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
-M, --modprobe modprobe_program
Specify the path to the modprobe program. By default, iptables-save  will  inspect  /proc/sys/ker‐
nel/modprobe to determine the executable's path.
%
thin_repair - repair thin provisioning binary metadata from device/file to device/file
thin_repair [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
thin_repair  reads  binary thin provisioning metadata created by the respective device-mapper target from
one device or file , repairs it and writes it to another device or file.  If written to a metadata device
, the metadata can be processed by the device-mapper target.
-i, --input {device|file}
Input file or device with binary metadata.
-o, --output {device|file}
Output  file  or  device for repaired binary metadata.  If a file is used then it must be preallo‐
%
msgcat - combines several message catalogs
msgcat [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
Concatenates  and  merges  the  specified PO files.  Find messages which are common to two or more of the
extracted  comments,  and file positions will be cumulated, except that if --use-first is specified, they
will be taken from the first PO file to define them.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE ...
%
whatis - display one-line manual page descriptions
whatis [-dlv?V] [-r|-w] [-s list] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-L locale] [-C file] name ...
Each  manual page has a short description available within it.  whatis searches the manual page names and
displays the manual page descriptions of any name matched.
sary to quote the name or escape (\) the special characters to stop the shell from interpreting them.
index  databases  are  used  during  the search, and are updated by the mandb program.  Depending on your
pages  have  been  installed.  To produce an old style text whatis database from the relative index data‐
base, issue the command:
%
dnssec-importkey - import DNSKEY records from external systems so they can be managed
dnssec-importkey [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset] [-D date/offset]
[-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-v level] [-V] {keyfile}
dnssec-importkey {-f filename} [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset]
[-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-v level] [-V] [dnsname]
dnssec-importkey reads a public DNSKEY record and generates a pair of .key/.private files. The DNSKEY
.private files will be generated.
The newly-created .private file does not contain private key data, and cannot be used for signing.
However, having a .private file makes it possible to set publication (-P) and deletion (-D) times for the
%
logname - print user's login name
logname [OPTION]
Print the name of the current user.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by FIXME: unknown.
REPORTING BUGS
%
cat - concatenate files and print on the standard output
cat [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Concatenate FILE(s) to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-A, --show-all
equivalent to -vET
-b, --number-nonblank
number nonempty output lines, overrides -n
-e     equivalent to -vE
%
openvt - start a program on a new virtual terminal (VT).
openvt  will find the first available VT, and run on it the given command with the given command options,
standard input, output and error are directed to that terminal. The current search path ($PATH)  is  used
to find the requested command. If no command is specified then the environment variable $SHELL is used.
-c, --console=VTNUMBER
plied VT for this to work;
-f, --force
Force opening a VT without checking whether it is already in use;
%
msgmerge - merge message catalog and template
msgmerge [OPTION] def.po ref.pot
Merges  two  Uniforum style .po files together.  The def.po file is an existing PO file with translations
which will be taken over to the newly created file as long as they still match;  comments  will  be  pre‐
served,  but  extracted comments and file positions will be discarded.  The ref.pot file is the last cre‐
ated PO file with up-to-date source references but old translations, or a  PO  Template  file  (generally
created  by  xgettext);  any translations or comments in the file will be discarded, however dot comments
and file positions will be preserved.  Where an exact match cannot be found, fuzzy matching  is  used  to
produce better results.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
%
grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
matching lines.
In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
Generic Program Information
--help Output a usage message and exit.
%
tc - show / manipulate traffic control settings
dle qdisc-id ] qdisc [ qdisc specific parameters ]
qdisc [ qdisc specific parameters ]
protocol prio priority filtertype [ filtertype specific parameters ] flowid flow-id
%
systemd-inhibit - Execute a program with an inhibition lock taken
lock will be acquired before the specified command line is executed and released afterwards.
being recorded, or similar operations that should not be interrupted.
%
thin_trim - Issue discard requests for free pool space (offline tool).
thin_trim [options] {device|file}
thin_trim sends discard requests to the pool device for unprovisioned areas.
--pool-inactive
Indicates you are aware the pool should be inactive.  Suppresses a warning message and prompt.
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
%
Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
variable LATEX=tex.
General options:
-b, --batch
%
users - print the user names of users currently logged in to the current host
users [OPTION]... [FILE]
Output  who  is  currently  logged  in  according  to FILE.  If FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp.
/var/log/wtmp as FILE is common.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Joseph Arceneaux and David MacKenzie.
%
nsenter - run program with namespaces of other processes
nsenter [options] [program [arguments]]
Enters  the namespaces of one or more other processes and then executes the specified program.  Enterable
namespaces are:
mount namespace
Mounting and unmounting filesystems will not affect the rest of  the  system  (CLONE_NEWNS  flag),
except  for filesystems which are explicitly marked as shared (with mount --make-shared; see /proc
/self/mountinfo for the shared flag).
UTS namespace
Setting hostname or domainname will not affect the rest of the system.  (CLONE_NEWUTS flag)
%
tion  to  check  how many free blocks are present as contiguous and aligned free space. The percentage of
contiguous free blocks of size and of alignment chunk_kb is reported.  It also displays the minimum/maxi‐
tion can be used to gauge the level of free space fragmentation in the filesystem.
-c chunk_kb
available  in  units  of kilobytes (Kb).  The chunk size must be a power of two and be larger than
%
bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
%
cache_repair - repair cache binary metadata from device/file to device/file
cache_repair [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
cache_repair  reads  binary cache metadata created by the respective device-mapper target from one device
or file , repairs it and writes it to another device or file.  If written to  a  metadata  device  ,  the
metadata can be processed by the device-mapper target.
-i, --input {device|file}
Input file or device with binary metadata.
-o, --output {device|file}
Output  file  or  device for repaired binary metadata.  If a file is used then it must be preallo‐
%
GNU Parted - a partition manipulation program
parted [options] [device [command [options...]...]]
parted is a program to manipulate disk partitions.  It supports multiple partition table formats, includ‐
ing MS-DOS and GPT.  It is useful for creating space for new operating systems, reorganising disk  usage,
and copying data to new hard disks.
Info format.
-h, --help
displays a help message
%
dig - DNS lookup utility
dig [@server] [-b address] [-c class] [-f filename] [-k filename] [-m] [-p port#] [-q name] [-t type]
dig [-h]
dig [global-queryopt...] [query...]
dig (domain information groper) is a flexible tool for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS
lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS
administrators use dig to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and clarity
of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality than dig.
Although dig is normally used with command-line arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for
%
dmsetup — low level logical volume management
dmsetup clear device_name
dmsetup create device_name [-u|--uuid uuid] [--addnodeoncreate|--addnodeonresume] [-n|--notable|--table
{table|table_file}] [--readahead {[+]sectors|auto|none}]
dmsetup deps [-o options] [device_name]
dmsetup help [-c|-C|--columns]
dmsetup info [device_name]
dmsetup info -c|-C|--columns [--count count] [--interval seconds] [--nameprefixes] [--noheadings] [-o
fields] [-O|--sort sort_fields] [--separator separator] [device_name]
dmsetup load device_name [--table {table|table_file}]
dmsetup ls [--target target_type] [--exec command] [--tree] [-o options]
dmsetup mangle [device_name]
dmsetup message device_name sector message
dmsetup mknodes [device_name]
dmsetup reload device_name [--table {table|table_file}]
%
mv - move (rename) files
mv [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
mv [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
mv [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
--backup[=CONTROL]
make a backup of each existing destination file
-b     like --backup but does not accept an argument
%
grub-reboot - set the default boot entry for GRUB, for the next boot only
grub-reboot [OPTION] MENU_ENTRY
Set the default boot menu entry for GRUB, for the next boot only.
-h, --help
print this message and exit
-V, --version
print the version information and exit
--boot-directory=DIR
expect GRUB images under the directory DIR/grub instead of the /boot/grub directory
%
pldd - display dynamic shared objects linked into a process
pldd pid
pldd option
The  pldd command displays a list of the dynamic shared objects that are linked into the process with the
-?, --help
Display program help message.
--usage
Display a short usage message.
%
ldns-zsplit - split up a zone file
-n NUMBER
Split after NUMBER RRs, ldns-zsplit will not split in the middle of an RRs.
Each part is saved with a numerical suffix, starting with .000. The largest suffix is thus .999.
-o ORIGIN
use ORIGIN as origin when reading the zonefile.
-z     Sort the zone before splitting.
%
gsettings - GSettings configuration tool
gsettings get SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
gsettings monitor SCHEMA [:PATH]  [KEY]
gsettings writable SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
gsettings range SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
gsettings describe SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
gsettings set SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY VALUE
gsettings reset SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
%
lsipc - show information on IPC facilities currently employed in the system
lsipc [options]
lsipc  shows  information on the inter-process communication facilities for which the calling process has
read access.
-i, --id id
bined  with  one  of  the  three  resource  options: -m, -q or -s.  It is possible to override the
default output format for this option with the --list, --raw, --json or --export option.
-g, --global
%
resize_reiserfs - resizer tool for the ReiserFS filesystem
resize_reiserfs [ -s [+|-]size[K|M|G] ] [ -j dev ] [ -fqv ] device
The  resize_reiserfs  tool resizes an unmounted reiserfs file system.  It enlarges or shrinks an reiserfs
file system located on a device so that it will have size bytes or size=old_size +(-) size bytes if the +
or - prefix is used.  If the -s option is not specified, the filesystem will be resized to fill the given
ter is given in kilo-, mega-, gigabytes respectively.
The resize_reiserfs program does not manipulate the size of the device. If you wish to enlarge a filesys‐
titions,  by  deleting  the  partition and recreating it with a larger size (assuming there is free space
after the partition in question).  Make sure you re-create it with the same  starting  disk  cylinder  as
%
ldns-keygen - generate a DNSSEC key pair
ldns-keygen [ OPTION ] DOMAIN
with the public DNSKEY, a .private file with the private keydata and a .ds with  the  DS  record  of  the
DNSKEY record.
ldns-keygen  can also be used to create symmetric keys (for TSIG) by selecting the appropriate algorithm:
file.
ldns-keygen prints the basename for the key files: K<name>+<alg>+<id>
%
-c, --iteration-count=NUM
-l, --buflen=NUM
Length of generated hash
-s, --salt=NUM
Length of salt
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
nameif - name network interfaces based on MAC addresses
nameif [-c configfile] [-s]
nameif [-c configfile] [-s] {interface macaddress}
nameif  renames  network  interfaces  based  on mac addresses. When no arguments are given /etc/mactab is
read. Each line  of it contains an interface name and a Ethernet MAC address. Comments are allowed start‐
ing  with #.  Otherwise the interfaces specified on the command line are processed.  nameif looks for the
interface with the given MAC address and renames it to the name given.
When the -s argument is given all error messages go to the syslog.
When the -c argument is given with a file name that file is read instead of /etc/mactab.
%
ranlib - generate index to archive.
ranlib [--plugin name] [-DhHvVt] archive
ranlib generates an index to the contents of an archive and stores it in the archive.  The index lists
each symbol defined by a member of an archive that is a relocatable object file.
An archive with such an index speeds up linking to the library and allows routines in the library to call
each other without regard to their placement in the archive.
The GNU ranlib program is another form of GNU ar; running ranlib is completely equivalent to executing ar
-s.
%
jfs_fscklog - extract a JFS fsck service log into a file and/or format and display the extracted file
jfs_fscklog [ -d ] [ -e device ] [ -f output.file ] [ -p ] [ -V ]
jfs_fscklog  with  option  -e device extracts the contents of either the most recent or immediately prior
(specified with option -p) JFS fsck service log from the specified device, and writes  the  output  to  a
If the -p option is used, the default file name is <pwd>fscklog.old.
jfs_fscklog with option -d formats and displays the contents of the extracted file.
jfs_fscklog with options -d and -e device extracts and displays the JFS fsck service log.
-d     Format and display a previously extracted JFS fsck service log.
%
makeinfo [OPTION]... TEXINFO-FILE...
Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default Info files suitable for read‐
ing online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
not depend on the installed name.
General options:
--document-language=STR locale to use in translating Texinfo keywords
for the output document (default C).
--error-limit=NUM
%
psfgettable - extract the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
psfgettable fontfile [outfile]
psfgettable  extracts  the  embedded Unicode character table from a .psf format console font into a human
the font is read from standard input.
%
iptables-xml — Convert iptables-save format to XML
iptables-xml [-c] [-v]
iptables-xml  is  used  to convert the output of iptables-save into an easily manipulatable XML format to
STDOUT.  Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
-c, --combine
combine consecutive rules with the same matches but different targets. iptables does not currently
support more than one target per match, so this simulates that by collecting the targets from con‐
secutive iptables rules into one action tag, but only when the rule matches are identical.  Termi‐
nating actions like RETURN, DROP, ACCEPT and QUEUE are not combined with subsequent targets.
-v, --verbose
Output xml comments containing the iptables line from which the XML is derived
%
fgconsole - print the number of the active VT.
fgconsole [--help|--version|--next-available]
If the active Virtual Terminal is /dev/ttyN, then prints N on standard output.
If the console is a serial console, then "serial" is printed instead.
--next-available
Will  show the next unallocated virtual terminal. Normally 6 virtual terminals are allocated, with
%
whoami - print effective userid
whoami [OPTION]...
Print the user name associated with the current effective user ID.  Same as id -un.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Richard Mlynarik.
REPORTING BUGS
%
firewall-offline-cmd - firewalld offline command line client
firewall-offline-cmd is an offline command line client of the firewalld daemon. It should be used only if
the firewalld service is not running. For example to migrate from system-config-firewall/lokkit or in the
install environment to configure firewall settings with kickstart.
Some lokkit options can not be automatically converted for firewalld, they will result in an error or
with custom rules, modules and masquerading.
Check the firewall configuration after using this tool.
%
pcretest - a program for testing Perl-compatible regular expressions.
pcretest [options] [input file [output file]]
pcretest was written as a test program for the PCRE regular expression library itself, but it can also be
gram;  for  details of the regular expressions themselves, see the pcrepattern documentation. For details
The input for pcretest is a sequence of regular  expression  patterns  and  strings  to  be  matched,  as
described  below. The output shows the result of each match. Options on the command line and the patterns
control PCRE options and exactly what is output.
As PCRE has evolved, it has acquired many different features, and as a result, pcretest now has rather  a
lot  of  obscure  options  for  testing  every  possible  feature. Some of these options are specifically
%
btrfs-select-super - overwrite primary superblock with a backup copy
btrfs-select-super -s number <device>
for example when write barriers were disabled during a power failure and not all superblocks were
written, or if the primary superblock is damaged, eg. accidentally overwritten.
The filesystem specified by device must not be mounted.
Prior to overwriting the primary superblock, please make sure that the backup copies are valid!
To dump a superblock use the btrfs inspect-internal dump-super command, or the obsolete command
btrfs-show-super.
%
localedef - compile locale definition files
localedef [options] outputpath
localedef --list-archive [options]
localedef --delete-from-archive [options] localename ...
localedef --add-to-archive [options] compiledpath
localedef --version
localedef --help
localedef --usage
The localedef program reads the indicated charmap and input files, compiles them to a binary form quickly
put in outputpath.
The outputpath argument is interpreted as follows:
%
bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
%
Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
variable LATEX=tex.
General options:
-b, --batch
%
vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
vim [options] [file ..]
vim [options] -
vim [options] -t tag
vim [options] -q [errorfile]
ex
view
gvim gview evim eview
rvim rview rgvim rgview
Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
It is especially useful for editing programs.
%
raw - bind a Linux raw character device
raw /dev/raw/raw<N> <major> <minor>
raw /dev/raw/raw<N> /dev/<blockdev>
raw -q /dev/raw/raw<N>
raw -qa
kernel module later).
raw is used in two modes: it either sets raw device bindings, or it queries existing bindings.  When set‐
%
grolbp [ -l ] [ --landscape ] [ -v ] [ --version ] [ -cn ] [ --copies=numcopies ] [ -ppaper_size ]
[ --papersize=paper_size ] [ -oorientation ] [ --orientation=orientation ] [ -wwidth ]
[ --linewidth=width ] [ -Fdir ] [ --fontdir=dir ] [ -h ] [ --help ] [ files... ]
\D'R dh dv'
Draw a rule (i.e. a solid black rectangle), with one corner at the current position, and the diag‐
onally opposite corner at the current position +(dh,dv).
%
vipw, vigr - edit the password or group file
vipw [options]
vigr [options]
vipw edits the password file after setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after
the password file is unlocked.  If the password file is already locked for editing by another user,  vipw
file in the same manner as vipw does the passwd file.
ENVIRONMENT
If the following environment variable exists, it will be utilized by vipw and vigr:
%
captest - a program to demonstrate capabilities
captest [ --drop-all | --drop-caps | --id ] [ --init-grp ] [ --lock ] [ --text ]
captest  is  a  program  that  demonstrates  and prints out the current process capabilities. Each option
prints the same report. It will output current capabilities. then  it  will  try  to  access  /etc/shadow
directly  to  show if that can be done. Then it creates a child process that attempts to read /etc/shadow
and outputs the results of that. Then it outputs the capabilities that a child process would have.
You can also apply file system capabilities to this program to study how they work. For example,  filecap
/usr/bin/captest  chown.  Then  run captest as a normal user. Another interesting test is to make captest
suid root so that you can see what the interaction is between root's credentials  and  capabilities.  For
lation is possible. But do not leave this app setuid root after you are don testing so that  an  attacker
cannot take advantage of it.
%
rmmod - Simple program to remove a module from the Linux Kernel
rmmod [-f] [-s] [-v] [modulename]
rmmod is a trivial program to remove a module (when module unloading support is provided) from the
-v, --verbose
Print messages about what the program is doing. Usually rmmod prints messages only if something goes
wrong.
-f, --force
when the kernel was compiled. With this option, you can remove modules which are being used, or which
%
ipcs - show information on IPC facilities
ipcs [options]
ipcs  shows  information  on the inter-process communication facilities for which the calling process has
read access.  By default it shows information about all three resources: shared memory segments,  message
queues, and semaphore arrays.
-i, --id id
bined with one of the three resource options: -m, -q or -s.
-h, --help
Display help text and exit.
%
routel - list routes with pretty output format
routef - flush routes
routel [tablenr [raw ip args...]]
routef
The  routel  script will list routes in a format that some might consider easier to interpret then the ip
route list equivalent.
The routef script does not take any arguments and will simply flush the routing  table  down  the  drain.
FILES
/usr/bin/routef
/usr/bin/routel
%
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --check
checks the syntax only
-o, --output=FILE
output file
-h, --help
%
uptime - Tell how long the system has been running.
uptime [options]
uptime  gives a one line display of the following information.  The current time, how long the system has
System  load averages is the average number of processes that are either in a runnable or uninterruptable
state.  A process in a runnable state is either using the CPU or waiting to use the CPU.   A  process  in
uninterruptable  state  is waiting for some I/O access, eg waiting for disk.  The averages are taken over
the three time intervals.  Load averages are not normalized for the number of CPUs in a system, so a load
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
msguniq - unify duplicate translations in message catalog
msguniq [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
Unifies  duplicate  translations in a translation catalog.  Finds duplicate translations of the same mes‐
sage ID.  Such duplicates are invalid input for other programs  like  msgfmt,  msgmerge  or  msgcat.   By
default,  duplicates  are merged together.  When using the --repeated option, only duplicates are output,
and all other messages are discarded.  Comments and extracted comments will be cumulated, except that  if
--use-first  is  specified,  they will be taken from the first translation.  File positions will be cumu‐
lated.  When using the --unique option, duplicates are discarded.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE
%
newgrp - log in to a new group
newgrp [group]
logged in, and the current directory is unchanged, but calculations of access permissions  to  files  are
performed with respect to the new group ID.
If no group is specified, the GID is changed to the login GID.
FILES
/etc/group
/etc/passwd
%
nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
%
gnutls-cli - GnuTLS client
gnutls-cli [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [hostname]
Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer.  It sets up a TLS connection and
forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa.
-d number, --debug=number
constrained to being:
in the range  0 through 9999
%
xfs_repair - repair an XFS filesystem
xfs_repair  [  -dfLnPv  ]  [  -m  maxmem ] [ -c subopt=value ] [ -o subopt[=value] ] [ -t interval ] [ -l
logdev ] [ -r rtdev ] device
xfs_repair -V
the  device  argument  which  should  be  the  device name of the disk partition or volume containing the
filesystem. If given the name of a block device, xfs_repair will attempt to find the raw  device  associ‐
ated with the specified block device and will use the raw device instead.
inconsistent or corrupt.
%
addgnupghome - Create .gnupg home directories
If  GnuPG  is installed on a system with existing user accounts, it is sometimes required to populate the
GnuPG home directory with existing files.  Especially a ‘trustlist.txt’ and a keybox  with  some  initial
‘/etc/skel/.gnupg’ to the home directories of the accounts given on the command line.  It takes care  not
to overwrite existing GnuPG home directories.
addgnupghome is invoked by root as:
%
realpath - print the resolved path
realpath [OPTION]... FILE...
Print the resolved absolute file name; all but the last component must exist
-e, --canonicalize-existing
all components of the path must exist
-m, --canonicalize-missing
no path components need exist or be a directory
-L, --logical
resolve '..' components before symlinks
%
pvcreate — initialize a disk or partition for use by LVM
[-f[f]|--force [--force]] [-y|--yes] [--labelsector] [--bootloaderareasize size] [-M|--metadatatype type]
[--[pv]metadatacopies  NumberOfCopies]  [--metadatasize  size]  [--metadataignore {y|n}] [--dataalignment
alignment] [--dataalignmentoffset alignment_offset] [--restorefile file] [--norestorefile]  [--reportfor‐
mat {basic|json}] [--setphysicalvolumesize size] [-u|--uuid uuid] [-Z|--zero {y|n}] PhysicalVolume [Phys‐
icalVolume...]
pvcreate initializes PhysicalVolume for later use by the Logical Volume Manager (LVM).  Each PhysicalVol‐
ume  can  be  a  disk partition, whole disk, meta device, or loopback file.  For DOS disk partitions, the
first sector with:
%
stat - display file or file system status
stat [OPTION]... FILE...
Display file or file system status.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-L, --dereference
follow links
-f, --file-system
display file system status instead of file status
-c  --format=FORMAT
%
lvmsar — LVM system activity reporter
lvmsar
%
nsupdate - Dynamic DNS update utility
nsupdate [-d] [-D] [-L level] [[-g] | [-o] | [-l] | [-y [hmac:]keyname:secret] | [-k keyfile]]
[-t timeout] [-u udptimeout] [-r udpretries] [-R randomdev] [-v] [-T] [-P] [-V] [filename]
allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone without manually editing the zone file. A
single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one resource record.
Zones that are under dynamic control via nsupdate or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand. Manual
edits could conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
The resource records that are dynamically added or removed with nsupdate have to be in the same zone.
record.
%
grub-mkimage - make a bootable image of GRUB
grub-mkimage [OPTION...] [OPTION]... [MODULES]
Make a bootable image of GRUB.
-c, --config=FILE
embed FILE as an early config
-C, --compression=(xz|none|auto)
choose the compression to use for core image
-d, --directory=DIR
use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
%
getcap - examine file capabilities
getcap [-v] [-r] [-h] filename [ ... ]
getcap displays the name and capabilities of each specified
-r  enables recursive search.
-v  enables to display all searched entries, even if it has no file-capabilities.
-h  prints quick usage.
filename
One file per line.
%
firewall-config - firewalld GUI configuration tool
firewall-config is a GUI configuration tool for firewalld.
firewall-config does not support any special options. The only options that can be used are the general
options that Gtk uses for Gtk application initialization. For more information on these options, please
have a look at the runtime documentation for Gtk.
The following options are supported:
-h, --help
Prints a short help text and exists.
%
rtmon - listens to and monitors RTnetlink
rtmon [ options ] file FILE [ all | LISTofOBJECTS ]
rtmon listens on netlink socket and monitors routing table changes.
rtmon  can  be  started  before  the  first  network configuration command is issued.  For example if you
insert:
rtmon file /var/log/rtmon.log
in a startup script, you will be able to view the full history later.  Certainly, it is possible to start
rtmon at any time. It prepends the history with the state snapshot dumped at the moment of starting.
%
mkfs.cramfs - make compressed ROM file system
mkfs.cramfs [options] directory file
Files  on  cramfs  file  systems are zlib-compressed one page at a time to allow random read access.  The
metadata is not compressed, but is expressed in a terse representation that is more space-efficient  than
conventional file systems.
The  file  system  is  intentionally read-only to simplify its design; random write access for compressed
files is difficult to implement.  cramfs ships with a utility (mkcramfs) to pack files  into  new  cramfs
images.
%
named-rrchecker - syntax checker for individual DNS resource records
named-rrchecker [-h] [-o origin] [-p] [-u] [-C] [-T] [-P]
named-rrchecker read a individual DNS resource record from standard input and checks if it is
syntactically correct.
The -h prints out the help menu.
The -o origin option specifies a origin to be used when interpreting the record.
The -p prints out the resulting record in canonical form. If there is no canonical form defined then the
record will be printed in unknown record format.
The -u prints out the resulting record in unknown record form.
%
ing, otherwise the expansion of the FILES.
together with all the previous files.
Operation modes:
%
pvchange — change attributes of a physical volume
[--deltag Tag] [--metadataignore {y|n}] [-h|-?|--help] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select  Selec‐
tion] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [-a|--all] [-x|--allocatable {y|n}] [-u|--uuid] [PhysicalVolumePath...]
pvchange allows you to change the allocation permissions of one or more physical volumes.
-a, --all
If  PhysicalVolumePath  is not specified on the command line all physical volumes are searched for
and used.
%
Generate Makefile.in for configure from Makefile.am.
Operation modes:
--help print this help, then exit
--version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
verbosely list files processed
%
ctrlaltdel - set the function of the Ctrl-Alt-Del combination
ctrlaltdel hard|soft
Based  on  examination  of the linux/kernel/reboot.c code, it is clear that there are two supported func‐
tions that the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence can perform.
is the default.
soft   Make the kernel send the SIGINT (interrupt) signal to the init process (this is always the process
version that you are currently using.
%
file — determine file type
file [-bcdEhiklLNnprsvzZ0] [--apple] [--extension] [--mime-encoding] [--mime-type] [-e testname]
[-F separator] [-f namefile] [-m magicfiles] [-P name=value] file ...
file -C [-m magicfiles]
file [--help]
file tests each argument in an attempt to classify it.  There are three sets of tests, performed in this
order: filesystem tests, magic tests, and language tests.  The first test that succeeds causes the file
type to be printed.
The type printed will usually contain one of the words text (the file contains only printing characters and
a few common control characters and is probably safe to read on an ASCII terminal), executable (the file
%
firewall-cmd - firewalld command line client
firewall-cmd is the command line client of the firewalld daemon. It provides interface to manage runtime
and permanent configuration.
things can get changed in the runtime or permanent configuration.
The following options are supported:
General Options
-h, --help
%
Reads  a  PIC  program  as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graphics format)
images of mathematical formulae.
PIC  is  a  rather  expressive graphics minilanguage suitable for producing box-and-arrow diagrams of the
kind frequently used in technical papers and textbooks.  The language  is  sufficiently  flexible  to  be
quite  useful  for  state charts, Petri-net diagrams, flow charts, simple circuit schematics, jumper lay‐
outs, and other kinds of illustration involving repetitive uses of simple geometric  forms  and  splines.
Because PIC descriptions are procedural and object-based, they are both compact and easy to modify.
The  PIC  language  is  fully documented in Making Pictures With GNU PIC, a document which is part of the
%
gpasswd - administer /etc/group and /etc/gshadow
gpasswd [option] group
The gpasswd command is used to administer /etc/group, and /etc/gshadow. Every group can have
administrators, members and a password.
System administrators can use the -A option to define group administrator(s) and the -M option to define
members. They have all rights of group administrators and members.
gpasswd called by a group administrator with a group name only prompts for the new password of the group.
the password.
%
fmt - simple optimal text formatter
fmt [-WIDTH] [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Reformat  each paragraph in the FILE(s), writing to standard output.  The option -WIDTH is an abbreviated
form of --width=DIGITS.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --crown-margin
preserve indentation of first two lines
-p, --prefix=STRING
%
lvmdump [-a] [-c] [-d directory] [-h] [-l] [-m] [-p] [-s] [-u]
for submission along with a problem report.
The content of the tarball is as follows:
- dmsetup info
- table of currently running processes
- recent entries from /var/log/messages (containing system messages)
- complete lvm configuration and cache (content of /etc/lvm)
- list of device nodes present under /dev
- list of files present /sys/block
- list of files present /sys/devices/virtual/block
%
ldns-notify - notify DNS servers that updates are available
ldns-notify [options] -z zone servers
the master servers. It can perform TSIG signatures and it can add a SOA  serial  number  of  the  updated
zone.  If a server already has that serial number it will disregard the message.
-z zone
The zone that is updated.
-h     Show usage and exit
-v     Show the version and exit
%
mmroff - cross reference preprocessor
mmroff [ -x ] groff_arguments
mmroff  is  a  simple  preprocessor  for  groff,  it  is  used  for expanding cross references in mm, see
to do the real processing when the cross reference file is up to date.
isn't always needed to have accurate cross references and by using this option groff will only  be
run once.
FILES
%
readelf - Displays information about ELF files.
readelf [-a|--all]
[-h|--file-header]
[-l|--program-headers|--segments]
[-S|--section-headers|--sections]
[-g|--section-groups]
[-t|--section-details]
[-e|--headers]
[-s|--syms|--symbols]
[--dyn-syms]
[-n|--notes]
[-r|--relocs]
[-u|--unwind]
[-d|--dynamic]
[-V|--version-info]
%
dumpkeys - dump keyboard translation tables
dumpkeys   [  -hilfn  -ccharset  --help  --short-info  --long-info  --numeric  --full-table  --funcs-only
--keys-only --compose-only --charset=charset ]
dumpkeys writes, to the standard output, the  current  contents  of  the  keyboard  driver's  translation
Using the various options, the format of the output can be controlled and also other information from the
-h --help
Prints the program's version number and a short usage message to the program's standard error out‐
put and exits.
%
external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
indicates that further checking is required.
-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
%
numastat
numastat - Show per-NUMA-node memory statistics for processes and the operating system
numastat
numastat [-V]
numastat [<PID>|<pattern>...]
numastat [-c] [-m] [-n] [-p <PID>|<pattern>] [-s[<node>]] [-v] [-z] [<PID>|<pattern>...]
numastat  with no command options or arguments at all, displays per-node NUMA hit and miss system statis‐
previous  long-standing  numastat  perl  script,  written by Andi Kleen.  The default numastat statistics
shows per-node numbers (in units of pages of memory) in these categories:
%
jfs_logdump - dump a JFS formatted device's journal log
jfs_logdump [ -a ] device
jfs_logdump  dumps  the  contents  of the journal log from the specified JFS formatted device into output
file ./jfslog.dmp.
device is the special file name corresponding to the actual device from which the  journal  log  will  be
jfs_logdump must be run as root.
-a     Dump  the  entire contents of the journal log instead of just the committed transactions since the
last synch point.
%
man - an interface to the on-line reference manuals
man [-C file] [-d] [-D] [--warnings[=warnings]] [-R encoding] [-L locale] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-S
list] [-e extension] [-i|-I] [--regex|--wildcard] [--names-only] [-a] [-u] [--no-subpages] [-P pager] [-r
prompt]  [-7]  [-E  encoding]  [--no-hyphenation]  [--no-justification]  [-p  string]  [-t]  [-T[device]]
[-H[browser]] [-X[dpi]] [-Z] [[section] page ...] ...
man -k [apropos options] regexp ...
man -K [-w|-W] [-S list] [-i|-I] [--regex] [section] term ...
man -f [whatis options] page ...
man -l [-C file] [-d] [-D] [--warnings[=warnings]] [-R encoding] [-L locale] [-P pager] [-r prompt]  [-7]
[-E encoding] [-p string] [-t] [-T[device]] [-H[browser]] [-X[dpi]] [-Z] file ...
man -w|-W [-C file] [-d] [-D] page ...
man -c [-C file] [-d] [-D] page ...
man [-?V]
%
scp — secure copy (remote file copy program)
needed for authentication.
file names containing ‘:’ as host specifiers.  Copies between two remote hosts are also permitted.
The options are as follows:
%
xfs_quota - manage use of quota on XFS filesystems
xfs_quota  [ -x ] [ -p prog ] [ -c cmd ] ... [ -d project ] ... [ -D projects_file ] [ -P projid_file ] [
path ... ]
xfs_quota -V
xfs_quota is a utility for reporting and editing various aspects of filesystem quota.
The options to xfs_quota are:
gram exits.
-p prog   Set the program name for prompts and some error messages, the default value is xfs_quota.
%
talk - Talk client
talk [OPTION...] person [ttyname]
Talk to another user.
-?, --help
give this help list
--usage
give a short usage message
-V, --version
print program version
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-d, --decode
decode data
-i, --ignore-garbage
when decoding, ignore non-alphabet characters
%
addpart - tell the kernel about the existence of a partition
addpart device partition start length
addpart  tells  the Linux kernel about the existence of the specified partition.  The command is a simple
wrapper around the "add partition" ioctl.
PARAMETERS
device The disk device.
partition
The partition number.
%
pvremove — remove a physical volume
[-f[f]|--force [--force]] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-y|--yes] PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
pvremove wipes the label on a device so that LVM will no longer recognise it as a physical volume.
-ff, --force --force
Force the removal of a physical volume belonging to an  existing  volume  group.   Normally  vgre‐
by some active logical volume.
%
pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
pwconv [options]
pwunconv [options]
grpconv [options]
grpunconv [options]
The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
%
sleep - delay for a specified amount of time
sleep NUMBER[SUFFIX]...
sleep OPTION
trary  floating point number.  Given two or more arguments, pause for the amount of time specified by the
sum of their values.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
vgcfgrestore — restore volume group descriptor area
vgcfgbackup.  You can specify a backup file with --file.  If no backup file is specified, the most recent
-l, --list
%
rtpr - replace backslashes with newlines.
rtpr is a trivial bash script which converts backslashes in standard input to newlines. It's sole purpose
is to be fed with input from ip when executed with it's --oneline flag.
ip --oneline address show | rtpr
Undo oneline converted ip-address output.
Stephen Hemminger <shemming@brocade.com>
%
useradd - create a new user or update default new user information
useradd [options] LOGIN
useradd -D
useradd -D [options]
When invoked without the -D option, the useradd command creates a new user account using the values
specified on the command line plus the default values from the system. Depending on command line options,
initial files.
By default, a group will also be created for the new user (see -g, -N, -U, and USERGROUPS_ENAB).
%
dnssec-keyfromlabel - DNSSEC key generation tool
[-D sync date/offset] [-E engine] [-f flag] [-G] [-I date/offset] [-i interval] [-k]
[-K directory] [-L ttl] [-n nametype] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset]
[-p protocol] [-R date/offset] [-S key] [-t type] [-v level] [-V] [-y] {name}
dnssec-keyfromlabel generates a key pair of files that referencing a key object stored in a cryptographic
hardware service module (HSM). The private key file can be used for DNSSEC signing of zone data as if it
were a conventional signing key created by dnssec-keygen, but the key material is stored within the HSM,
and the actual signing takes place there.
key is being generated.
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
chcpu - configure CPUs
chcpu -c|-d|-e|-g cpu-list
chcpu -p mode
chcpu -r|-h|-V
chcpu  can  modify  the  state of CPUs.  It can enable or disable CPUs, scan for new CPUs, change the CPU
dispatching mode of the underlying hypervisor, and request CPUs from the hypervisor (configure) or return
CPUs to the hypervisor (deconfigure).
Some options have a cpu-list argument.  Use this argument to specify a comma-separated list of CPUs.  The
%
nologin - politely refuse a login
nologin [-V] [-h]
nologin  displays  a  message  that  an account is not available and exits non-zero.  It is intended as a
replacement shell field to deny login access to an account.
If the file /etc/nologin.txt exists, nologin displays its contents to the user  instead  of  the  default
message.
-h, --help
Display help text and exit.
%
pvs — report information about physical volumes
[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly] [--namepre‐
fixes] [--noheadings] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--segments]
[--separator  Separator]  [--unbuffered] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE] [--unquoted] [-v|--verbose] [--ver‐
sion] [PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]]
pvs produces formatted output about physical volumes.
%
agetty - alternative Linux getty
agetty [options] port [baud_rate...] [term]
agetty  opens  a  tty  port, prompts for a login name and invokes the /bin/login command.  It is normally
agetty has several non-standard features that are useful for hardwired and for dial-in lines:
when it reads a login name.  The program can handle 7-bit characters with even, odd, none or space
Control-U  (kill);  DEL  and  backspace (erase); carriage return and line feed (end of line).  See
also the --erase-chars and --kill-chars options.
%
ldns-revoke - sets the revoke bit of a DNSKEY
ldns-revoke file
ldns-revoke  is  used  to  revoke a public DNSKEY RR.  When run it will read file with a DNSKEY RR in it,
sets the revoke bit and write back the output to file .
-n     Write the result to stdout instead of a file
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
%
ebtables [-t table ] -[ACDI] chain rule specification [match extensions] [watcher extensions] target
ebtables [-t table ] -P chain ACCEPT | DROP | RETURN
ebtables [-t table ] -F [chain]
ebtables [-t table ] -Z [chain]
ebtables [-t table ] -N chain [-P ACCEPT | DROP | RETURN]
ebtables [-t table ] -X [chain]
ebtables [-t table ] -E old-chain-name new-chain-name
ebtables [-t table ] --init-table
ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-commit
ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-init
ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-save
%
yacc - GNU Project parser generator
yacc [OPTION]... FILE
information.
Written by Paul Eggert.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <bug-bison@gnu.org>.
%
systemd-analyze - Analyze system boot-up performance
%
dnssec-revoke - set the REVOKED bit on a DNSSEC key
dnssec-revoke [-hr] [-v level] [-V] [-K directory] [-E engine] [-f] [-R] {keyfile}
creates a new pair of key files containing the now-revoked key.
-h
Emit usage message and exit.
-K directory
Sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
-r
%
lspci - list all PCI devices
lspci [options]
lspci  is  a  utility  for  displaying information about PCI buses in the system and devices connected to
them.
By default, it shows a brief list of devices. Use the options described below to request  either  a  more
verbose output or output intended for parsing by other programs.
If you are going to report bugs in PCI device drivers or in lspci itself, please include output of "lspci
-vvx" or even better "lspci -vvxxx" (however, see below for possible caveats).
Some parts of the output, especially in the highly verbose modes, are probably intelligible only to expe‐
rienced PCI hackers. For exact definitions of the fields, please consult either the PCI specifications or
%
screen [ -options ] [ cmd [ args ] ]
screen -r [[pid.]tty[.host]]
screen -r sessionowner/[[pid.]tty[.host]]
Screen  is  a  full-screen  window manager that multiplexes a physical terminal between several processes
dards (e.g. insert/delete line and support for multiple character sets).  There is a  scrollback  history
buffer  for  each virtual terminal and a copy-and-paste mechanism that allows moving text regions between
windows.
When screen is called, it creates a single window with a shell in it (or the specified command) and  then
gets  out  of your way so that you can use the program as you normally would.  Then, at any time, you can
%
kernel-install - Add and remove kernel and initramfs images to and from /boot
kernel-install is used to install and remove kernel and initramfs images to and from /boot.
kernel-install will execute the files located in the directory /usr/lib/kernel/install.d/ and the local
administration directory /etc/kernel/install.d/. All files are collectively sorted and executed in
lexical order, regardless of the directory in which they live. However, files with identical filenames
replace each other. Files in /etc/kernel/install.d/ take precedence over files with the same name in
if needed; a symbolic link in /etc/kernel/install.d/ with the same name as an executable in
/usr/lib/kernel/install.d/, pointing to /dev/null, disables the executable entirely. Executables must
have the extension ".install"; other extensions are ignored.
%
setterm - set terminal attributes
setterm [options]
setterm  writes  to  standard output a character string that will invoke the specified terminal capabili‐
ties.  Where possible terminfo is consulted to find the string to  use.   Some  options  however  (marked
minal type is "con" or "linux" the string that invokes the specified capabilities on the PC Minix virtual
console driver is output.  Options that are not implemented by the terminal are ignored.
For boolean options (on or off), the default is on.
%
mapscrn - load screen output mapping table
mapscrn [-v] [-o map.orig] mapfile
The mapscrn command is obsolete - its function is now built-in into setfont.  However, for backwards com‐
patibility it is still available as a separate command.
The mapscrn command loads a user defined output character mapping table into the console driver. The con‐
character set.  When the -o option is given, the old map is saved in map.orig.
USE
There  are  two  kinds  of mapping tables: direct-to-font tables, that give a font position for each user
byte value, and user-to-unicode tables that give a unicode value for each user  byte.  The  corresponding
%
lvcreate - create a logical volume in an existing volume group
lvcreate [-a|--activate [a][e|l|s]{y|n}] [--addtag Tag] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup
{y|n}] [-H|--cache] [--cachemode {passthrough|writeback|writethrough}] [--cachepolicy Policy]
[--cachepool CachePoolLogicalVolume] [--cachesettings Key=Value] [-c|--chunksize ChunkSize] [--command‐
[--errorwhenfull {y|n}] [{-l|--extents LogicalExtentsNumber[%{FREE|PVS|VG}] | -L|--size LogicalVolume‐
Size} [-i|--stripes Stripes [-I|--stripesize StripeSize]]] [-h|-?|--help] [-K|--ignoreactivationskip]
Mirrors [--corelog|--mirrorlog {disk|core|mirrored}] [--nosync] [-R|--regionsize MirrorLogRegionSize]]
[--monitor {y|n}] [-n|--name LogicalVolume] [--noudevsync] [-p|--permission {r|rw}] [-M|--persistent
{y|n}] [--poolmetadatasize MetadataVolumeSize] [--poolmetadataspare {y|n}] [--[raid]maxrecoveryrate Rate]
[--[raid]minrecoveryrate Rate] [-r|--readahead {ReadAheadSectors|auto|none}] [--reportformat
{basic|json}] [-k|--setactivationskip {y|n}] [-s|--snapshot] [-V|--virtualsize VirtualSize] [-t|--test]
[-T|--thin] [--thinpool ThinPoolLogicalVolume] [--type SegmentType] [-v|--verbose] [-W|--wipesignatures
{y|n}] [-Z|--zero {y|n}] [VolumeGroup | {ExternalOrigin|Origin|Pool}LogicalVolume
%
renice - alter priority of running processes
renice [-n] priority [-g|-p|-u] identifier...
renice alters the scheduling priority of one or more running processes.  The first argument is the prior‐
ity value to be used.  The other arguments are interpreted as process IDs  (by  default),  process  group
IDs,  user  IDs,  or user names.  renice'ing a process group causes all processes in the process group to
have their scheduling priority altered.  renice'ing a user causes all processes owned by the user to have
their scheduling priority altered.
-n, --priority priority
Specify  the  scheduling  priority to be used for the process, process group, or user.  Use of the
option -n or --priority is optional, but when used it must be the first argument.
%
eqn - format equations for troff or MathML
eqn [-rvCNR] [-d xy] [-T name] [-M dir] [-f F] [-s n] [-p n] [-m n] [files...]
eqn compiles descriptions of equations embedded within troff input files into commands  that  are  under‐
stood  by  troff.  Normally, it should be invoked using the -e option of groff.  The syntax is quite com‐
patible with Unix eqn.  The output of GNU eqn cannot be processed with Unix troff; it must  be  processed
with  GNU troff.  If no files are given on the command line, the standard input is read.  A filename of -
causes the standard input to be read.
eqn searches  for  the  file  eqnrc  in  the  directories  given  with  the  -M  option  first,  then  in
/usr/lib/groff/site-tmac,  /usr/share/groff/site-tmac,  and  finally  in  the  standard  macro  directory
option prevents this.
%
who - show who is logged on
Print information about users who are currently logged in.
-a, --all
same as -b -d --login -p -r -t -T -u
-b, --boot
time of last system boot
-d, --dead
print dead processes
%
vgconvert - convert volume group metadata format
tor] [--bootloaderareasize size] [-M|--metadatatype type]  [--pvmetadatacopies  NumberOfCopies]  [--meta‐
into the same space.
Examples
%
zgrep - search possibly compressed files for a regular expression
zgrep [ grep_options ] [ -e ] pattern filename...
Zgrep  invokes  grep  on compressed or gzipped files.  All options specified are passed directly to grep.
If no file is specified, then the standard input is decompressed if necessary and fed to grep.  Otherwise
the given files are uncompressed if necessary and fed to grep.
If the GREP environment variable is set, zgrep uses it as the grep program to be invoked.
BUGS
The  following  grep  options  are  not  supported:  --dereference-recursive  (-R),  --directories  (-d),
%
fdisk - manipulate disk partition table
fdisk [options] device
fdisk -l [device...]
fdisk  is a dialog-driven program for creation and manipulation of partition tables.  It understands GPT,
MBR, Sun, SGI and BSD partition tables.
in  the  partition table, usually found in sector 0 of the disk.  (In the BSD world one talks about `disk
slices' and a `disklabel'.)
All partitioning is driven by device I/O limits (the topology) by default.  fdisk is able to optimize the
%
truncate - shrink or extend the size of a file to the specified size
truncate OPTION... FILE...
Shrink or extend the size of each FILE to the specified size
A FILE argument that does not exist is created.
If  a  FILE  is  larger  than  the  specified  size, the extra data is lost.  If a FILE is shorter, it is
extended and the extended part (hole) reads as zero bytes.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --no-create
do not create any files
%
gpinyin - Chinese European-like writing within groff
gpinyin [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
gpinyin -h|--help
gpinyin -v|--version
groff(7) files.
Breaking Options
An option is breaking, when the program just writes the information that was asked for  and  then  stops.
All other arguments will be ignored by that.  The breaking options are here
-h | --help
%
neqn - format equations for ascii output
neqn [eqn options]
device.
for very simple input).
%
rndc-confgen - rndc key generation tool
rndc-confgen [-a] [-A algorithm] [-b keysize] [-c keyfile] [-h] [-k keyname] [-p port] [-r randomfile]
[-s address] [-t chrootdir] [-u user]
rndc-confgen generates configuration files for rndc. It can be used as a convenient alternative to
writing the rndc.conf file and the corresponding controls and key statements in named.conf by hand.
Alternatively, it can be run with the -a option to set up a rndc.key file and avoid the need for a
rndc.conf file and a controls statement altogether.
-a
specified as when BIND was built) that is read by both rndc and named on startup. The rndc.key file
defines a default command channel and authentication key allowing rndc to communicate with named on
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
pathchk - check whether file names are valid or portable
Diagnose invalid or unportable file names.
-p     check for most POSIX systems
-P     check for empty names and leading "-"
--portability
check for all POSIX systems (equivalent to -p -P)
--help display this help and exit
%
-b     print the blocks which are reserved as bad in the filesystem.
-o superblock=superblock
by a filesystem wizard who is examining the remains of a very badly corrupted filesystem.
%
arp - manipulate the system ARP cache
arp [-vn] [-H type] [-i if] [-ae] [hostname]
arp [-v] [-i if] -d hostname [pub]
arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -s hostname hw_addr [temp]
arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -s hostname hw_addr [netmask nm] pub
arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -Ds hostname ifname [netmask nm] pub
arp [-vnD] [-H type] [-i if] -f [filename]
%
nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
-h or --help
Print help text to console and exit.
-v or --version
%
iptables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
ip6tables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -I chain [rulenum] rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -R chain rulenum rule-specification
iptables [-t table] -D chain rulenum
iptables [-t table] -S [chain [rulenum]]
iptables [-t table] {-F|-L|-Z} [chain [rulenum]] [options...]
%
false - do nothing, unsuccessfully
false [ignored command line arguments]
false OPTION
Exit with a status code indicating failure.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
%
objcopy - copy and translate object files
objcopy [-F bfdname|--target=bfdname]
[-I bfdname|--input-target=bfdname]
[-O bfdname|--output-target=bfdname]
[-B bfdarch|--binary-architecture=bfdarch]
[-S|--strip-all]
[-g|--strip-debug]
[-K symbolname|--keep-symbol=symbolname]
[-N symbolname|--strip-symbol=symbolname]
[--strip-unneeded-symbol=symbolname]
[-G symbolname|--keep-global-symbol=symbolname]
[--localize-hidden]
[-L symbolname|--localize-symbol=symbolname]
[--globalize-symbol=symbolname]
[-W symbolname|--weaken-symbol=symbolname]
%
Set up images to boot from DEVICE.
You should not normally run this program directly.  Use grub-install instead.
-a, --allow-floppy
make the drive also bootable as floppy (default for fdX devices). May break on some BIOSes.
-b, --boot-image=FILE
use FILE as the boot image [default=boot.img]
-c, --core-image=FILE
%
xtotroff - convert X font metrics into GNU troff font metrics
xtotroff [ -rresolution ] [ -spoint-size ] [ -v ] FontMap
fonts listed.  Each line in FontMap consists of GNU troff font name and an X font  name  (XLFD)  pattern,
separated by whitespace.  Example:
The wildcards in the patterns are filled with the arguments to the -r and -s switches.  If a font name is
still ambiguous, xtotroff aborts.
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
%
lvm [command|file]
If lvm is invoked with no arguments it presents a readline prompt (assuming it was compiled with readline
If  lvm is invoked with argv[0] set to the name of a specific LVM command (for example by using a hard or
soft link) it acts as that command.
On invocation, lvm requires that only the standard file descriptors stdin, stdout and stderr  are  avail‐
%
sulogin - single-user login
sulogin [options] [tty]
sulogin is invoked by init when the system goes into single-user mode.
The user is prompted:
Give root password for system maintenance
(or type Control-D for normal startup):
If the root account is locked and --force is specified, no password is required.
sulogin will be connected to the current terminal, or to the optional tty device that can be specified on
the command line (typically /dev/console).
%
mail -h | --help
mail [-BDdEFintv~] [-A account] [-a attachment] [-b bcc-addr] [-c cc-addr] [-q quote-file] [-r from-addr]
[-S variable[=value]] [-s subject] [-X cmd] [-.] to-addr ... [-- mta-option ...]
mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-X cmd] -f [file]
[-- mta-option ...]
mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-u user] [-X cmd]
[-- mta-option ...]
%
curl-config - Get information about a libcurl installation
curl-config [options]
curl-config displays information about the curl and libcurl installation.
--ca   Displays the built-in path to the CA cert bundle this libcurl uses.
--cc   Displays the compiler used to build libcurl.
--cflags
Set  of  compiler options (CFLAGS) to use when compiling files that use libcurl. Currently that is
only the include path to the curl include files.
%
grn - groff preprocessor for gremlin files
grn [ -Cv ] [ -Tdev ] [ -Mdir ] [ -Fdir ] [ file... ]
grn is a preprocessor for including gremlin pictures in groff input.  grn writes to standard output, pro‐
cessing only input lines between two that start with .GS and .GE.  Those lines must contain grn  commands
(see below).  These commands request a gremlin file, and the picture in that file is converted and placed
justify  the whole gremlin picture (default justification is center).  If no file is mentioned, the stan‐
dard input is read.  At the end of the picture, the position on the page is the  bottom  of  the  gremlin
picture.   If the grn entry is ended with .GF instead of .GE, the position is left at the top of the pic‐
ture.
Please note that currently only the -me macro package has support for .GS, .GE, and .GF.
%
lvreduce — reduce the size of a logical volume
[-v|--verbose]    [--version]    [-f|--force]    [--noudevsync]    {-l|--extents    [-]LogicalExtentsNum‐
ber[%{VG|LV|FREE|ORIGIN}] | -L|--size [-]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]} [-n|--nofsck] [--reportfor‐
lvreduce allows you to reduce the size of a logical volume.  Be careful when reducing a logical  volume's
size, because data in the reduced part is lost!!!
You  should therefore ensure that any filesystem on the volume is resized before running lvreduce so that
the extents that are to be removed are not in use.
Sizes  will be rounded if necessary - for example, the volume size must be an exact number of extents and
the size of a striped segment must be a multiple of the number of stripes.
%
grub-glue-efi - generate a fat binary for EFI
-o, --output=FILE
%
lkbib - search bibliographic databases
lkbib [ -v ] [ -ifields ] [ -pfilename ] [ -tn ] key...
lkbib  searches bibliographic databases for references that contain the keys key... and prints any refer‐
ences found on the standard output.  lkbib will search any databases given by  -p  options,  and  then  a
default database.  The default database is taken from the REFER environment variable if it is set, other‐
wise it is /usr/dict/papers/Ind.  For each database filename to be searched, if an index filename.i  cre‐
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
-v     Print the version number.
%
should give you access to the complete manual.
%
delpart - tell the kernel to forget about a partition
delpart device partition
delpart asks the Linux kernel to forget about the specified partition (a number) on the specified device.
The command is a simple wrapper around the "del partition" ioctl.
AVAILABILITY
The  delpart  command  is  part  of  the  util-linux  package  and  is  available   from   ftp://ftp.ker‐
nel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/.
%
zramctl - set up and control zram devices
Get info:
zramctl [options]
Reset zram:
zramctl -r zramdev...
Print name of first unused zram device:
zramctl -f
Set up a zram device:
%
gpg-connect-agent - Communicate with a running agent
gpg-connect-agent [options][commands]
The  gpg-connect-agent  is  a utility to communicate with a running gpg-agent.  It is useful to check out
the commands gpg-agent provides using the Assuan interface.  It might also be useful for scripting simple
applications.  Input is expected at stdin and out put gets printed to stdout.
It is very similar to running gpg-agent in server mode; but here we connect to a running instance.
-v
--verbose
Output additional information while running.
%
gxditview - display groff intermediate output files
gxditview [-toolkitoption ...] [-option ...] [filename]
several ways to use gxditview.
gxditview filename.  If filename is -, gxditview will read the standard input; filename cannot  be  omit‐
ted.  The groff intermediate output is different for all devices.  gxditview can view it for all devices,
but the quality is device dependent.
The best results are achieved with the X* devices for groff's option -T.   There  are  four  X*  devices:
%
wdctl - show hardware watchdog status
wdctl [options] [device...]
Show  hardware  watchdog status.  The default device is /dev/watchdog.  If more than one device is speci‐
fied then the output is separated by one blank line.
-f, --flags list
Print only the specified flags.
-F, --noflags
Do not print information about flags.
%
grub-mkstandalone - make a memdisk-based GRUB image
grub-mkstandalone [OPTION...] [OPTION] SOURCE...
Generate a standalone image (containing all modules) in the selected format
--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
compress GRUB files [optional]
-d, --directory=DIR
use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
--fonts=FONTS
install FONTS [default=unicode]
%
nslookup - query Internet name servers interactively
nslookup [-option] [name | -] [server]
Nslookup is a program to query Internet domain name servers.  Nslookup has two modes: interactive and
non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers for information about various
hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just the
name and requested information for a host or domain.
%
grub-render-label - generate a .disk_label for Apple Macs.
Render Apple .disk_label.
-b, --bgcolor=COLOR
use COLOR for background
-c, --color=COLOR
use COLOR for text
-f, --font=FILE
%
ar - create, modify, and extract from archives
The GNU ar program creates, modifies, and extracts from archives.  An archive is a single file holding a
collection of other files in a structure that makes it possible to retrieve the original individual files
(called members of the archive).
The original files' contents, mode (permissions), timestamp, owner, and group are preserved in the
archive, and can be restored on extraction.
GNU ar can maintain archives whose members have names of any length; however, depending on how ar is
%
btrfs-image - create/restore an image of the filesystem
btrfs-image [options] <source> <target>
btrfs-image is used to create an image of a btrfs filesystem. All data will be zeroed, but metadata and
the like is preserved. Mainly used for debugging purposes.
In the dump mode, source is the btrfs device/file and target is the output file (use - for stdout).
In the restore mode (option -r), source is the dumped image and target is the btrfs device/file.
-r
primary device, so that file system can be restored by running tree log reply if possible. To restore
%
jfs_mkfs - create a JFS formatted partition
jfs_mkfs [options] device [ blocks ]
jfs_mkfs is used to create (format) a JFS partition.  jfs_mkfs must be run as root.
system and/or JFS journal will be created.  blocks is the number of blocks to be used for the  file  sys‐
tem.  If omitted, jfs_mkfs automatically figures the file system size.
WARNING
jfs_mkfs will destroy all data on the specified device!
%
vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
vim [options] [file ..]
vim [options] -
vim [options] -t tag
vim [options] -q [errorfile]
ex
view
gvim gview evim eview
rvim rview rgvim rgview
Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
It is especially useful for editing programs.
%
btrfs-inspect-internal - query various internal information
btrfs inspect-internal <subcommand> <args>
simple UI to an ioctl or a more complex query that assembles the result from several internal structures.
The latter usually requires calls to privileged ioctls.
dump-super [options] <device> [device...]
(replaces the standalone tool btrfs-show-super)
Show btrfs superblock information stored on given devices in textual form. By default the first
superblock is printed, more details about all copies or additional backup data can be printed.
%
vdir - list directory contents
vdir [OPTION]... [FILE]...
List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --all
do not ignore entries starting with .
-A, --almost-all
do not list implied . and ..
%
ul - do underlining
ul [options] [file...]
ul  reads the named files (or standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores
to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use,  as  specified  by  the  environment
variable TERM.  The terminfo database is read to determine the appropriate sequences for underlining.  If
the terminal is incapable of underlining but is capable of a standout mode, then that  is  used  instead.
terminal cannot underline, underlining is ignored.
-i, --indicated
Underlining is indicated by a separate line containing appropriate dashes `-'; this is useful when
you want to look at the underlining which is present in an nroff output stream on a crt-terminal.
%
systool - view system device information by bus, class, and topology
systool [options [device]]
Calling  systool  without  parameters  will  present  all  available  bus types, device classes, and root
devices.
When device is supplied, the information reqested by options is shown only for the specified device, oth‐
erwise all present devices are displayed.
systool uses APIs provided by libsysfs to gather information.  systool runs only on Linux systems running
-a     Show attributes of the requested resource
%
udevadm - udev management tool
udevadm [--debug] [--version] [--help]
udevadm info options
udevadm trigger [options]
udevadm settle [options]
udevadm control command
udevadm monitor [options]
udevadm test [options] devpath
%
true - do nothing, successfully
true [ignored command line arguments]
true OPTION
Exit with a status code indicating success.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
%
loadunimap - load the kernel unicode-to-font mapping table
loadunimap [ -C console ] [ -o oldmap ] [ map ]
The  loadunimap  command is obsolete - its function is now built-in into setfont.  However, for backwards
compatibility it is still available as a separate command.
The program loadunimap loads the specified map in the kernel unicode-to-font mapping table.  If no map is
given def is assumed.  The default extension (that can be omitted) is .uni.
If the -o oldmap option is given, the old map is saved in the file specified.
Usually one does not call loadunimap directly - its function is also built into setfont.
%
keytab.
operation must be one of the following:
list   Lists the keys in a keytab showing version number and principal name.
change Uses the kadmin protocol to update the keys in the Kerberos  database  to  new  randomly-generated
keys,  and  updates  the keys in the keytab to match.  If a key's version number doesn't match the
version number stored in the Kerberos server's database, then the operation will fail.   Old  keys
are  retained  in  the keytab so that existing tickets continue to work.  If the -i flag is given,
%
hostid - print the numeric identifier for the current host
hostid [OPTION]
Print the numeric identifier (in hexadecimal) for the current host.
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
Written by Jim Meyering.
REPORTING BUGS
%
kdestroy - destroy Kerberos tickets
kdestroy [-A] [-q] [-c cache_name]
The  kdestroy utility destroys the user's active Kerberos authorization tickets by overwriting and delet‐
ing the credentials cache that contains them.  If the credentials cache is  not  specified,  the  default
credentials cache is destroyed.
-A     Destroys all caches in the collection, if a cache collection is available.
-q     Run quietly.  Normally kdestroy beeps if it fails to destroy the user's tickets.  The -q flag sup‐
presses this behavior.
-c cache_name
%
sysctl - configure kernel parameters at runtime
sysctl [options] [variable[=value]] [...]
sysctl -p [file or regexp] [...]
sysctl  is  used to modify kernel parameters at runtime.  The parameters available are those listed under
/proc/sys/.  Procfs is required for sysctl support in Linux.  You can use sysctl to both read  and  write
sysctl data.
PARAMETERS
variable
The  name of a key to read from.  An example is kernel.ostype.  The '/' separator is also accepted
in place of a '.'.
variable=value
%
ldns-testns - simple fake nameserver tool
ldns-testns [ OPTION ] datafile
ldns-testns  can be used to provide answers to DNS queries for testing.  The answers are premade, and can
be tailored to testing needs. The answers can be wildly invalid or unparseable.
ldns-testns is not meant for production use.
%
ipcrm - remove certain IPC resources
ipcrm [options]
ipcrm {shm|msg|sem} id...
ipcrm  removes  System V interprocess communication (IPC) objects and associated data structures from the
system.  In order to delete such objects, you must be superuser, or the creator or owner of the object.
System V IPC objects are of three types: shared memory, message queues, and semaphores.   Deletion  of  a
message  queue  or  semaphore  object  is immediate (regardless of whether any process still holds an IPC
identifier for the object).  A shared memory object is only removed after  all  currently  attached  pro‐
Two  syntax styles are supported.  The old Linux historical syntax specifies a three-letter keyword indi‐
%
ptx - produce a permuted index of file contents
ptx [OPTION]... [INPUT]...   (without -G)
ptx -G [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]]
Output a permuted index, including context, of the words in the input files.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-A, --auto-reference
output automatically generated references
-G, --traditional
%
awk — pattern scanning and processing language
awk [−F sepstring] [−v assignment]... program [argument...]
awk [−F sepstring] −f progfile [−f progfile]... [−v assignment]...
[argument...]
The  awk utility shall execute programs written in the awk programming language, which is specialized for
textual data manipulation. An awk program is a sequence of patterns and corresponding actions. When input
is read that matches a pattern, the action associated with that pattern is carried out.
%
ln - make links between files
ate  hard  links  by  default, symbolic links with --symbolic.  By default, each destination (name of new
link) should not already exist.  When creating hard links, each TARGET must exist.   Symbolic  links  can
hold  arbitrary  text; if later resolved, a relative link is interpreted in relation to its parent direc‐
tory.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
%
dbus-test-tool - D-Bus traffic generator and test tool
--empty] [--payload=S | --stdin | --message-stdin | --random-size]
dbus-test-tool is a multi-purpose tool for debugging and profiling D-Bus.
dbus-test-tool black-hole connects to D-Bus, optionally requests a name, then does not reply to messages.
It normally reads and discards messages from its D-Bus socket, but can be configured to sleep forever
without reading.
%
switch_root - switch to another filesystem as the root of the mount tree
switch_root [-hV]
switch_root newroot init [arg...]
switch_root  moves  already  mounted /proc, /dev, /sys and /run to newroot and makes newroot the new root
filesystem and starts init process.
WARNING: switch_root removes recursively all files and directories on the current root filesystem.
-h, --help
Display help text and exit.
%
isc-config.sh - Get information about the installed version of ISC BIND
isc-config.sh [--cflags] [--exec-prefix] [--libs] [--prefix] [--version] [libraries...]
isc-config.sh prints information related to the installed version of ISC BIND, such as the compiler and
linker flags required to compile and link programs that use ISC BIND libraries.
The optional libraries are used to report specific details for compiling and linking for the listed
listed on the command line. (Some libraries require other libraries, so are implied.)
--cflags
Prints the compiler command line options required to compile files that use ISC BIND. Use the
libraries command line argument(s) to print additional specific flags to pass to the C compiler.
%
xfs_bmap - print block mapping for an XFS file
xfs_bmap [ -adlpv ] [ -n num_extents ] file
xfs_bmap -V
xfs_bmap  prints  the  map  of disk blocks used by files in an XFS filesystem.  The map lists each extent
used by the file, as well as regions in the file that do not have any corresponding blocks (holes).  Each
line of the listings takes the following form:
extent: [startoffset..endoffset]: startblock..endblock
Holes  are  marked by replacing the startblock..endblock with hole.  All the file offsets and disk blocks
%
c99 — compile standard C programs
c99 [options...] pathname [[pathname] [−I directory]
[−L directory] [−l library]]...
The  c99  utility  is an interface to the standard C compilation system; it shall accept source code con‐
forming to the ISO C standard. The system conceptually consists of a compiler and link editor. The  input
files  referenced by pathname operands and −l option-arguments shall be compiled and linked to produce an
executable file. (It is unspecified whether the linking occurs entirely within the operation of c99; some
%
lvmconfig, lvm dumpconfig, lvm config — Display LVM configuration
lvmconfig [-f|--file Filename] [--type {current|default|diff|full|list|missing|new|profilable|profilable-
command|profilable-metadata}] [--atversion Version] [--sinceversion Version] [--ignoreadvanced]
[--ignoreunsupported] [--ignorelocal] [-l|--list] [--config ConfigurationString] [--commandprofile Pro‐
[--showunsupported] [--validate] [--withsummary] [--withcomments] [--withspaces] [--withversions] [Con‐
figurationNode...]
lvmconfig produces formatted output from the LVM configuration tree.  The command was  added  in  release
-f, --file Filename
Send output to a file named 'filename'.
%
ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock
ntp-wait [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
the boot sequence until after ntpd -g has set the time.
-n number, --tries=number
%
mtr - a network diagnostic tool
[--raw]  [--csv]  [--json]  [--split]  [--no-dns]  [--show-ips]  [-o FIELDS]   [-y IPINFO]   [--aslookup]
[-i INTERVAL]  [-c COUNT] [-s PACKETSIZE] [-B BITPATTERN] [-G GRACEPERIOD] [-Q TOS] [--mpls] [-a ADDRESS]
[-f FIRST-TTL]  [-m MAX-TTL]  [-U MAX-UNKNOWN]  [--udp]  [--tcp]  [-P PORT]  [-L LOCALPORT]  [-Z TIMEOUT]
mtr combines the functionality of the traceroute and ping programs in a single network diagnostic tool.
ing packets with purposely low TTLs.  It continues to send packets with low TTL, noting the response time
a bad (or simply overloaded) link.
%
runcon - run command with specified security context
by one or more of LEVEL, ROLE, TYPE, and USER.
If none of -c, -t, -u, -r, or -l, is specified, the first argument is used as the complete context.   Any
rent security context.
%
reiserfstune - The tunning tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
reiserfstune  [  -f ] [ -h | --help ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ --no-journal-available ] [ --jour‐
nal-new-device FILE ] [ --make-journal-standard ] [ -s | --journal-new-size N ] [ -o | --journal-new-off‐
set  N ] [ -t | --max-transaction-size N ] [ -b | --add-badblocks file ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -u |
--uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label LABEL ] [ -c | --check-interval  interval-in-days  ]  [  -C  |  --time-last-
checked timestamp ] [ -m | --max-mnt-count count ] [ -M | --mnt-count count ] device
reiserfstune  is used for tuning the ReiserFS. It can change two journal parameters (the journal size and
the maximum transaction size), and it can move the journal's location to a new  specified  block  device.
the  relocated  journal was implemented for a special release of ReiserFS, and was not expected to be put
you  must  apply  a  special patch. Without this patch the kernel will refuse to mount the newly modified
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
psfstriptable - remove the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
psfstriptable fontfile outfile
psfstriptable  reads a .psf format console font from fontfile, removes the embedded Unicode font table if
there is one, and writes the result to outfile.  An input file name of "-" denotes standard input, and an
output file name of "-" denotes standard output.
%
btrfs-convert [options] <device>
Warning
The conversion utilizes free space of the original filesystem. The exact estimate of the required space
cannot be foretold. The final btrfs metadata might occupy several gigabytes on a hundreds-gigabyte
filesystem.
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
kvno - print key version numbers of Kerberos principals
kvno  acquires a service ticket for the specified Kerberos principals and prints out the key version num‐
bers of each.
-c ccache
Specifies the name of a credentials cache to use (if not the default)
-e etype
Specifies the enctype which will be requested for the session key of all the services named on the
%
strfile - create a random access file for storing strings
unstr - dump strings in pointer order
strfile [-iorsx] [-c char] sourcefile [outputfile]
unstr [-c char] datafile[.ext] [outputfile]
strfile  reads a file containing groups of lines separated by a line containing a single percent `%' sign
(or other specified delimiter character) and creates a data file which contains a header structure and  a
The output file, if not specified on the command line, is named sourcefile.dat.
The  purpose of unstr is to undo the work of strfile.  It prints out the strings contained in the source‐
file, which is datafile.ext without its extension, or datafile if no  extension  is  specified  (in  this
%
msgcmp - compare message catalog and template
msgcmp [OPTION] def.po ref.pot
Compare  two  Uniforum  style  .po  files  to check that both contain the same set of msgid strings.  The
def.po file is an existing PO file with the translations.  The ref.pot file is the last created PO  file,
lated each and every message in your program.  Where an exact match cannot be found,  fuzzy  matching  is
used to produce better diagnostics.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
def.po translations
%
anacron - runs commands periodically
anacron [-s] [-f] [-n] [-d] [-q] [-t anacrontab] [-S spooldir] [job]
anacron [-S spooldir] -u [-t anacrontab] [job]
anacron [-V|-h]
anacron -T [-t anacrontab]
does not assume that the machine is running continuously.  Hence, it can be used on machines that are not
contains the list of jobs that Anacron controls.  Each job entry specifies a period in days, a  delay  in
minutes, a unique job identifier, and a shell command.
%
cut - remove sections from each line of files
cut OPTION... [FILE]...
Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --bytes=LIST
select only these bytes
-c, --characters=LIST
select only these characters
%
pactree - package dependency tree viewer
pactree [options] package
Pactree produces a dependency tree for a package.
By default, a tree-like output is generated, but with the --graph option, a Graphviz description is
generated.
-a, --ascii
Use ASCII characters for tree formatting. By default, pactree will use Unicode line drawing
characters if it is able to detect that the locale supports them.
-b, --dbpath
%
zic - timezone compiler
zic [ -v ] [ -d directory ] [ -l localtime ] [ -p posixrules ] [ -L leapsecondfilename ] [ -s ] [ -y com‐
mand ] [ filename ... ]
Zic reads text from the file(s) named on the command line and creates  the  time  conversion  information
files specified in this input.  If a filename is -, the standard input is read.
These options are available:
-d directory
Create time conversion information files in the named directory rather than in the standard direc‐
tory named below.
-l timezone
%
sfdisk - display or manipulate a disk partition table
sfdisk [options] device [-N partition-number]
sfdisk [options] command
sfdisk is a script-oriented tool for partitioning any block device.
functionality for CHS (Cylinder-Head-Sector) addressing.  CHS has never been  important  for  Linux,  and
this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices.
tive sizes are specified, or when the default values are used.
%
groupmod - modify a group definition on the system
groupmod [options] GROUP
The groupmod command modifies the definition of the specified GROUP by modifying the appropriate entry in
the group database.
The options which apply to the groupmod command are:
-g, --gid GID
The group ID of the given GROUP will be changed to GID.
option is used.
%
lessecho - expand metacharacters
lessecho [-ox] [-cx] [-pn] [-dn] [-mx] [-nn] [-ex] [-a] file ...
lessecho  is  a program that simply echos its arguments on standard output.  But any metacharacter in the
output is preceded by an "escape" character, which by default is a backslash.
A summary of options is included below.
-ex    Specifies "x", rather than backslash, to be the escape char for metachars.  If x is "-", no escape
char is used and arguments containing metachars are surrounded by quotes instead.
-ox    Specifies  "x", rather than double-quote, to be the open quote character, which is used if the -e-
option is specified.
%
mcookie - generate magic cookies for xauth
mcookie [options]
usage:
xauth add :0 . `mcookie`
the sources /dev/urandom, /dev/random, or the libc pseudo-random functions, in this preference order.
-f, --file file
Use  this  file as an additional source of randomness.  When file is '-', characters are read from
%
haveged - Generate random numbers and feed linux random device.
haveged [options]
haveged  generates an unpredictable stream of random numbers harvested from the indirect effects of hard‐
ware events on hidden processor state (caches, branch predictors, memory translation tables,  etc)  using
the  HAVEGE (HArdware Volatile Entropy Gathering and Expansion) algorithm. The algorithm operates in user
space, no special privilege is required for file system access to the output stream.
Linux pools randomness for distribution by the /dev/random and /dev/urandom device interfaces. The  stan‐
fill  the  /dev/random  pool  whenever the supply of random bits in /dev/random falls below the low water
mark of the device.
%
pluginviewer - list loadable SASL plugins and their properties
pluginviewer  [-a]  [-s]  [-c]  [-b min=N,max=N] [-e ssf=N,id=ID] [-m MECHS] [-x AUXPROP_MECH] [-f FLAGS]
[-p PATH]
pluginviewer can be used by a server administrator to troubleshoot SASL installations.  The  utility  can
list loadable (properly configured) client and server side plugins, as well as auxprop plugins.
-a     List auxprop plugins.
-s     List server authentication (SASL) plugins.
-c     List client authentication (SASL) plugins.
%
date - print or set the system date and time
date [OPTION]... [+FORMAT]
date [-u|--utc|--universal] [MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]]
Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the system date.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-d, --date=STRING
display time described by STRING, not 'now'
-f, --file=DATEFILE
like --date; once for each line of DATEFILE
%
uuidgen - create a new UUID value
uuidgen [options]
library.  The new UUID can reasonably be considered unique among all UUIDs created on the  local  system,
and among UUIDs created on other systems in the past and in the future.
There  are  two  types  of UUIDs which uuidgen can generate: time-based UUIDs and random-based UUIDs.  By
default uuidgen will generate a random-based UUID if a high-quality random number generator  is  present.
Otherwise,  it will choose a time-based UUID.  It is possible to force the generation of one of these two
UUID types by using the -r or -t options.
-r, --random
%
glib-mkenums - C language enum description generation utility
glib-mkenums [OPTION...] [FILE...]
glib-mkenums is a small perl-script utility that parses C code to extract enum definitions and produces
enum descriptions based on text templates specified by the user. Most frequently this script is used to
produce C code that contains enum values as strings so programs can provide value name strings for
introspection.
glib-mkenums takes a list of valid C code files as input. The options specified control the text that is
output, certain substitutions are performed on the text templates for keywords enclosed in @ characters.
Production text substitutions
Certain keywords enclosed in @ characters will be substituted in the emitted text. For the substitution
examples of the keywords below, the following example enum definition is assumed:
%
deallocvt - deallocate unused virtual consoles
deallocvt [N ...]
The  command deallocvt deallocates kernel memory and data structures for all unused virtual consoles.  If
one or more arguments N ...  are given, only the corresponding consoles /dev/ttyN are deallocated.
A virtual console is unused if it is not the foreground console, and no process has it open  for  reading
or writing, and no text has been selected on its screen.
%
ssh-agent — authentication agent
ssh-agent [-c | -s] [-Dd] [-a bind_address] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-t life] [command [arg ...]]
ssh-agent [-c | -s] -k
ssh-agent is usually started in the beginning of an X-session or a login session, and all other windows or
programs are started as clients to the ssh-agent program.  Through use of environment variables the agent
to query the keys that are held in one.
%
sum - checksum and count the blocks in a file
sum [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Print checksum and block counts for each FILE.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-s, --sysv
--help display this help and exit
%
cryptsetup-reencrypt - tool for offline LUKS device re-encryption
cryptsetup-reencrypt <options> <device>
Cryptsetup-reencrypt  can  be used to change reencryption parameters which otherwise require full on-disk
data change (re-encryption).
You can regenerate volume key (the real key used in on-disk encryption unclocked by passphrase),  cipher,
cipher mode.
Cryptsetup-reencrypt reencrypts data on LUKS device in-place. During reencryption process the LUKS device
is marked unavailable.
WARNING: The cryptsetup-reencrypt program is not resistant to hardware or kernel  failures  during  reen‐
%
msgconv - character set conversion for message catalog
msgconv [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
Converts a translation catalog to a different character encoding.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE
input PO file
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
%
partprobe - inform the OS of partition table changes
partprobe [-d] [-s] [devices...]
partprobe is a program that informs the operating system kernel of partition table changes.
-d, --dry-run
Don't update the kernel.
-s, --summary
%
loginctl - Control the systemd login manager
The following options are understood:
--no-ask-password
Do not query the user for authentication for privileged operations.
-p, --property=
When showing session/user/seat properties, limit display to certain properties as specified as
%
halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
The following options are understood:
--help
Print a short help text and exit.
%
sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program
sntp [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ hostname-or-IP ...]
sntp  can  be used as an SNTP client to query a NTP or SNTP server and either display the time or set the
local system's time (given suitable privilege).  It can be run as an interactive command or from  a  cron
job.   NTP  (the  Network  Time  Protocol)  and  SNTP  (the Simple Network Time Protocol) are defined and
The default is to write the estimated correct local date and time (i.e. not UTC) to the  standard  output
%
xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
served.
The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
%
ngettext - translate message and choose plural form
ngettext [OPTION] [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID MSGID-PLURAL COUNT
The  ngettext  program  translates a natural language message into the user's language, by looking up the
translation in a message catalog, and chooses the appropriate plural form, which depends  on  the  number
COUNT and the language of the message catalog where the translation was found.
Display native language translation of a textual message whose grammatical form depends on a number.
-d, --domain=TEXTDOMAIN
retrieve translated message from TEXTDOMAIN
-e     enable expansion of some escape sequences
%
lastlog - reports the most recent login of all users or of a given user
lastlog [options]
lastlog formats and prints the contents of the last login log /var/log/lastlog file. The login-name,
port, and last login time will be printed. The default (no flags) causes lastlog entries to be printed,
sorted by their order in /etc/passwd.
The options which apply to the lastlog command are:
-b, --before DAYS
Print only lastlog records older than DAYS.
-C, --clear
%
lvresize — resize a logical volume
[-I|--stripesize   StripeSize]]   {-l|--extents   [+|-]LogicalExtentsNumber[%{VG|LV|PVS|FREE|ORIGIN}]   |
-L|--size  [+|-]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]}  [--poolmetadatasize  [+]MetadataVolumeSize[bBsSkKm‐
[PhysicalVolumePath[:PE[-PE]]...]
lvresize  allows  you  to  resize  a  logical  volume.  Be careful when reducing a logical volume's size,
because data in the reduced part is lost!!!  You should therefore ensure that any filesystem on the  vol‐
ume is shrunk first so that the extents that are to be removed are not in use.  Resizing snapshot logical
%
keyctl - Key management facility control
keyctl --version
keyctl show [-x] [<keyring>]
keyctl add <type> <desc> <data> <keyring>
keyctl padd <type> <desc> <keyring>
keyctl request <type> <desc> [<dest_keyring>]
keyctl update <key> <data>
keyctl pupdate <key>
keyctl newring <name> <keyring>
keyctl revoke <key>
keyctl clear <keyring>
keyctl link <key> <keyring>
keyctl unlink <key> [<keyring>]
%
capsh - capability shell wrapper
capsh [OPTION]...
handy wrapper for certain types of capability testing and environment creation.  It  also  provides  some
debugging features useful for summarizing capability state.
The tool takes a number of optional arguments, acting on them in the order they are provided. They are as
follows:
--print               Display prevailing capability and related state.
%
systemd-firstboot, systemd-firstboot.service - Initialize basic system settings on or before the first
boot-up of a system
systemd-firstboot.service
systemd-firstboot initializes the most basic system settings interactively on the first boot, or
·   The system locale, more specifically the two locale variables LANG= and LC_MESSAGES
·   The system time zone
·   The system host name
%
gettextize - install or upgrade gettext infrastructure
gettextize [OPTION]... [package-dir]
Prepares a source package to use gettext.
--help print this help and exit
--version
print version information and exit
-f, --force
force writing of new files even if old exist
%
lt-recode [OPTION]... [ [CHARSET] | REQUEST [FILE]... ]
Free `recode' converts files between various character sets and surfaces.
If  a  long  option  shows an argument as mandatory, then it is mandatory for the equivalent short option
also.  Similarly for optional arguments.
Listings:
-l, --list[=FORMAT]
list one or all known charsets and aliases
-k, --known=PAIRS
restrict charsets according to known PAIRS list
%
elfedit - Update the ELF header of ELF files.
elfedit [--input-mach=machine]
[--input-type=type]
[--input-osabi=osabi]
--output-mach=machine
--output-type=type
--output-osabi=osabi
[-v|--version]
[-h|--help]
elffile...
elfedit updates the ELF header of ELF files which have the matching ELF machine and file types.  The
options control how and which fields in the ELF header should be updated.
%
grub-fstest - debug tool for GRUB filesystem drivers
Debug tool for filesystem driver.
Commands:
blocklist FILE
Display blocklist of FILE.
cat FILE
Copy FILE to standard output.
cmp FILE LOCAL
%
grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
matching lines.
In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
Generic Program Information
--help Output a usage message and exit.
%
ldns-config - show compiler and linker flags for ldns usage.
When  writing programs using ldns, you have to tell the compiler where to look for include files and what
libraries from which location to link to. ldns-config can be used to find out what flags to use with  the
C compiler and the linker.
--cflags
Show the C compiler flags needed to compile with ldns
--libs Show the flags to be used to link with ldns
--version
%
pmap - report memory map of a process
pmap [options] pid [...]
The pmap command reports the memory map of a process or processes.
-x, --extended
Show the extended format.
-d, --device
Show the device format.
-q, --quiet
Do not display some header or footer lines.
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
dnssec-keymgr - Ensures correct DNSKEY coverage for a zone based on a defined policy
dnssec-keymgr [-K directory] [-c file] [-f] [-k] [-q] [-v] [-z] [-g path] [-r path] [-s path] [zone...]
dnssec-keymgr is a high level Python wrapper to facilitate the key rollover process for zones handled by
BIND. It uses the BIND commands for manipulating DNSSEC key metadata: dnssec-keygen and dnssec-settime.
DNSSEC policy can be read from a configuration file (default /etc/dnssec-policy.conf), from which the key
parameters, publication and rollover schedule, and desired coverage duration for any given zone can be
default policy used for all zones.
When dnssec-keymgr runs, it examines the DNSSEC keys for one or more zones, comparing their timing
metadata against the policies for those zones. If key settings do not conform to the DNSSEC policy (for
example, because the policy has been changed), they are automatically corrected.
%
apropos - search the manual page names and descriptions
apropos [-dalv?V] [-e|-w|-r] [-s list] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-L locale] [-C file] keyword ...
Each  manual  page  has  a  short description available within it.  apropos searches the descriptions for
instances of keyword.
cial characters to stop the shell from interpreting them.
The standard matching rules allow matches to be made against the page name and  word  boundaries  in  the
description.
The  database  searched by apropos is updated by the mandb program.  Depending on your installation, this
%
dbus-binding-tool - C language GLib bindings generation utility.
dbus-binding-tool   [--force]   [--help]  [--ignore-unsupported]  [--mode=pretty|glib-client|glib-server]
[--output=file] [--prefix=symbol-prefix] [--version] [file...]
dbus-binding-tool is used to expose a GObject via D-Bus.  As input, dbus-binding-tool uses a D-Bus Intro‐
header file which eases the use of a remote D-Bus object.  Output is sent to standard out or to the file‐
name specified with the --output argument.
The following is a sample D-Bus Introspection XML file which describes an object that exposes one method,
named ManyArgs:
%
readprofile - read kernel profiling information
readprofile [options]
The  readprofile  command uses the /proc/profile information to print ascii data on standard output.  The
output is organized in three columns: the first is the number of clock ticks, the second is the  name  of
the  C  function in the kernel where those many ticks occurred, and the third is the normalized `load' of
the procedure, calculated as a ratio between the number of ticks and the length of  the  procedure.   The
output is filled with blanks to ease readability.
-a, --all
%
rsync - a fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool
Access via remote shell:
Pull: rsync [OPTION...] [USER@]HOST:SRC... [DEST]
Push: rsync [OPTION...] SRC... [USER@]HOST:DEST
Access via rsync daemon:
Pull: rsync [OPTION...] [USER@]HOST::SRC... [DEST]
rsync [OPTION...] rsync://[USER@]HOST[:PORT]/SRC... [DEST]
Push: rsync [OPTION...] SRC... [USER@]HOST::DEST
rsync [OPTION...] SRC... rsync://[USER@]HOST[:PORT]/DEST
%
clockdiff - measure clock difference between hosts
-o     Use  IP TIMESTAMP with ICMP ECHO instead of ICMP TIMESTAMP messages. It is useful with some desti‐
dresses  instead of four term one.  What flavor works better depends on target host. Particularly,
-o is better for Linux.
%
vgscan — scan all disks for volume groups and rebuild caches
[--notifydbus] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-v|--verbose]
vgscan scans all SCSI, (E)IDE disks, multiple devices and a bunch of other disk  devices  in  the  system
to avoid a CD ROM, for example.
hardware.
%
delv - DNS lookup and validation utility
[-q name] [-t type] [-x addr] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
delv [-h]
delv [-v]
delv [queryopt...] [query...]
delv (Domain Entity Lookup & Validation) is a tool for sending DNS queries and validating the results,
using the same internal resolver and validator logic as named.
delv will send to a specified name server all queries needed to fetch and validate the requested data;
%
pscap - a program to see capabilities
pscap [ -a ]
pscap is a program that prints out a report of process capabilities. If the application has any capabili‐
ties, it will be in the report with the exception of init. By giving the -a  command  line  option,  init
will be included, too. If a process is not in the report, it has dropped all capabilities. If the process
has partial capabilities, it is further examined to see if it has an open-ended bounding set. If this  is
found to be true, a '+' symbol is added.
Steve Grubb
%
dirname - strip last component from file name
output '.' (meaning the current directory).
-z, --zero
end each output line with NUL, not newline
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
zcmp, zdiff - compare compressed files
Zcmp  and zdiff are used to invoke the cmp or the diff program on files compressed via gzip.  All options
fed to cmp or diff.  The input files are not modified.  The exit status from cmp or diff is preserved.
BUGS
%
named-journalprint - print zone journal in human-readable form
named-journalprint {journal}
named-journalprint prints the contents of a zone journal file in a human-readable form.
Journal files are automatically created by named when changes are made to dynamic zones (e.g., by
nsupdate). They record each addition or deletion of a resource record, in binary format, allowing the
changes to be re-applied to the zone when the server is restarted after a shutdown or crash. By default,
the name of the journal file is formed by appending the extension .jnl to the name of the corresponding
zone file.
named-journalprint converts the contents of a given journal file into a human-readable text format. Each
line begins with "add" or "del", to indicate whether the record was added or deleted, and continues with
the resource record in master-file format.
%
debugreiserfs - The debugging tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
device
debugreiserfs  sometimes  helps to solve problems with reiserfs filesystems.  When run without options it
prints the super block of the ReiserFS filesystem found on the device.
device is the special file corresponding to the device (e.g  /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk  partition  or
/dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
-j device
prints  the  contents of the journal. The option -p allows it to pack the journal with other meta‐
%
thin_metadata_size - thin provisioning metadata device/file size calculator.
thin_metadata_size [options]
thin_metadata_size  calculates  the size of the thin provisioning metadata based on the block size of the
thin provisioned devices, the size of the thin provisioning pool and the maximum number of all thin  pri‐
sioned devices and snapshots.  Because thin provisioning pools are holding widely variable contents, this
tool is needed to provide sensible initial default size.
-b, --block-size BLOCKSIZE[bskKmMgGtTpPeEzZyY]
Block size of thin provisioned devices in units  of  bytes,  sectors,  kibibytes,  kilobytes,  ...
respectively.   Default  is  in  sectors  without a block size unit specifier.  Size/number option
%
findmnt - find a filesystem
findmnt [options]
findmnt [options] device|mountpoint
findmnt [options] [--source] device [--target|--mountpoint] mountpoint
findmnt  will  list  all  mounted  filesytems or search for a filesystem.  The findmnt command is able to
search in /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab or /proc/self/mountinfo.  If device  or  mountpoint  is  not  given,  all
filesystems are shown.
mountpoint (and vice versa) if the --target, --mountpoint or --source options are not specified.
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
last, lastb - show a listing of last logged in users
last [options] [username...] [tty...]
lastb [options] [username...] [tty...]
last  searches back through the /var/log/wtmp file (or the file designated by the -f option) and displays
a list of all users logged in (and out) since that file was created.  One or more usernames  and/or  ttys
be abbreviated, thus last 0 is the same as last tty0.
When catching a SIGINT signal (generated by the interrupt key, usually control-C) or  a  SIGQUIT  signal,
terminate.
The pseudo user reboot logs in each time the system is rebooted.  Thus last reboot will show a log of all
%
ethtool - query or control network driver and hardware settings
ethtool devname
ethtool -h|--help
ethtool --version
ethtool -a|--show-pause devname
ethtool -A|--pause devname [autoneg on|off] [rx on|off] [tx on|off]
ethtool -c|--show-coalesce devname
ethtool -C|--coalesce devname [adaptive-rx on|off] [adaptive-tx on|off] [rx-usecs N] [rx-frames N]
[rx-usecs-irq N] [rx-frames-irq N] [tx-usecs N] [tx-frames N] [tx-usecs-irq N] [tx-frames-irq N]
%
groupmems - administer members of a user's primary group
groupmems -a user_name | -d user_name | [-g group_name] | -l | -p
The groupmems command allows a user to administer his/her own group membership list without the
requirement of superuser privileges. The groupmems utility is for systems that configure its users to be
in their own name sake primary group (i.e., guest / guest).
Only the superuser, as administrator, can use groupmems to alter the memberships of other groups.
The options which apply to the groupmems command are:
-a, --add user_name
Add a user to the group membership list.
%
decoded structures.
-b, --benchmark
perform a benchmark on decoding
-s, --strict
use strict DER decoding
-h, --help
display this help and exit
%
mkfs.xfs - construct an XFS filesystem
mkfs.xfs  [  -b  block_size  ]  [  -m  global_metadata_options  ] [ -d data_section_options ] [ -f ] [ -i
inode_options ] [ -l log_section_options ] [ -n naming_options ] [ -p protofile ]  [  -q  ]  [  -r  real‐
time_section_options ] [ -s sector_size ] [ -L label ] [ -N ] [ -K ] device
mkfs.xfs -V
mkfs.xfs  constructs  an  XFS filesystem by writing on a special file using the values found in the argu‐
In its simplest (and most commonly used form), the size of the filesystem is  determined  from  the  disk
driver.   As  an  example,  to make a filesystem with an internal log on the first partition on the first
SCSI disk, use:
%
new_inode_size ] [ -j ] [  -J  journal-options  ]  [  -m  reserved-blocks-percentage  ]  [  -o  [^]mount-
options[,...]   ]  [  -p mmp_update_interval ] [ -r reserved-blocks-count ] [ -s sparse-super-flag ] [ -u
user ] [ -g group ] [ -C mount-count ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -L  volume-name  ]  [  -M  last-mounted-
directory  ]  [  -O  [^]feature[,...]   ]  [ -Q quota-options ] [ -T time-last-checked ] [ -U UUID ] [ -z
undo_file ] device
%
lsusb - list USB devices
lsusb [ options ]
lsusb  is a utility for displaying information about USB buses in the system and the devices connected to
them.
-v, --verbose
configuration  descriptors  for the device's current speed.  Class descriptors will be shown, when
available, for USB device classes including hub, audio, HID, communications, and chipcard.
-s [[bus]:][devnum]
%
cpio — copy files to and from archives
cpio -i [options] [pattern ...] [< archive]
cpio -o [options] < name-list [> archive]
cpio -p [options] dest-dir < name-list
zip, jar, ar, and ISO 9660 cdrom images and can create tar, pax, cpio, ar, and shar archives.
The first option to cpio is a mode indicator from the following list:
-i      Input.  Read an archive from standard input (unless overridden) and extract the contents to disk or
(if the -t option is specified) list the contents to standard output.  If one or more file patterns
are specified, only files matching one of the patterns will be extracted.
-o      Output.  Read a list of filenames from standard input and produce a new archive on standard output
(unless overridden) containing the specified items.
%
systemd, init - systemd system and service manager
systemd is a system and service manager for Linux operating systems. When run as first process on boot
telinit and pass all command line arguments unmodified. That means init and telinit are mostly equivalent
When run as a system instance, systemd interprets the configuration file system.conf and the files in
system.conf.d directories; when run as a user instance, systemd interprets the configuration file
%
nstat, rtacct - network statistics tools.
nstat and rtacct are simple tools to monitor kernel snmp counters and network interface statistics.
-h, --help Print help
-V, --version
Print version
-z, --zero
Dump zero counters too. By default they are not shown.
%
autoscan - Generate a preliminary configure.in
autoscan [OPTION]... [SRCDIR]
Examine  source  files in the directory tree rooted at SRCDIR, or the current directory if none is given.
Search the source files for common portability problems, check for incompleteness of `configure.ac',  and
create a file `configure.scan' which is a preliminary `configure.ac' for that package.
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
-V, --version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
%
vgchange — change attributes of a volume group
vgchange  [--addtag  Tag]  [--alloc  AllocationPolicy]  [-A|--autobackup  {y|n}] [-a|--activate [a|e|s|l]
{y|n}]  [--activationmode  {complete|degraded|partial}]  [-K|--ignoreactivationskip]  [--monitor   {y|n}]
Tag] [--detachprofile] [-h|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoremonitoring] [--ignoreskippedcluster]
[--sysinit]  [--noudevsync]  [--lock-start] [--lock-stop] [--lock-type LockType] [-l|--logicalvolume Max‐
datacopies    NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]   [-P|--partial]   [-s|--physicalextentsize   PhysicalExtent‐
Size[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [-S|--select  Selection]  [--systemid  SystemID]
vgchange  allows  you to change the attributes of one or more volume groups. Its main purpose is to acti‐
groups  are  subject  to changes and allow access to their logical volumes.  [Not yet implemented: During
%
systemd-run - Run programs in transient scope or service or timer units
If a command is run as transient service unit, it will be started and managed by the service manager like
any other service, and thus shows up in the output of systemctl list-units like any other unit. It will
run in a clean and detached execution environment, with the service manager as its parent process. In
this mode, systemd-run will start the service asynchronously in the background and return after the
command has begun execution.
%
netcat - GNU Netcat Manual
netcat [options] hostname port [port] ...
netcat -l -p port [options] [hostname] [port] ...
netcat -L hostname:port -p port [options] ...
Netcat is a simple Unix utility which reads and writes data across network connections, using TCP or UDP
protocol.  It is designed to be a reliable "back-end" tool that can be used directly or easily driven by
other programs and scripts.  At the same time, it is a feature-rich network debugging and exploration
tool, since it can create almost any kind of connection you would need and has several interesting built-
in capabilities.  Netcat, or "nc" as the original program was named, should have been supplied long ago
as another one of those cryptic but standard Unix tools.
%
telnet - User interface to TELNET
telnet [OPTION...] [HOST [PORT]]
Login to remote system HOST (optionally, on service port PORT)
General options:
-6, --ipv6
use only IPv6
%
If the output filename is present, the output is written there.  If it is - or absent the output is writ‐
ten to the standard output.
the BUGS section below.
%
grub-mkconfig - generate a GRUB configuration file
grub-mkconfig [OPTION]
Generate a grub config file
-o, --output=FILE
output generated config to FILE [default=stdout]
-h, --help
print this message and exit
-v, --version
print the version information and exit
%
arpd - userspace arp daemon.
rate ] [ <INTERFACES> ]
The arpd daemon collects gratuitous ARP information, saving it on local disk and feeding it to the kernel
on demand to avoid redundant broadcasting due to limited size of the kernel ARP cache.
-h -?  Print help
-l     Dump  the  arpd  database  to stdout and exit. The output consists of three columns: the interface
index, the IP address of the interface, and the MAC address of the interface. Negative entries for
a colon and the most recent time when the fact that the host is dead was proven.
%
soelim - interpret .so requests in groff input
soelim [-Crtv] [-I dir] [files ...]
It is possible to have whitespace between the -I command line option and its parameter.
soelim reads files and replaces lines of the form
.so file
by  the  contents  of  file.  It is useful if files included with .so need to be preprocessed.  Normally,
soelim should be invoked with the -s option of groff.
To embed ‘\’ in the file name, write ‘\\’ or ‘\e’.  To embed a  space,  write  ‘\ ’.   Any  other  escape
sequence in file makes soelim ignore the whole line.
%
gpg-error-config - Script to get information about the installed version of libgpg-error
gpg-error-config [options]
gpg-error-config  is  a  tool  that  is used to configure to determine the compiler and linker flags that
macros for GNU autoconf that are included with Libgpg-error.
gpg-error-config accepts the following options:
--mt   Provide  output  appropriate  for  multithreaded programs.  --mt is only useful when combined with
other options, and must be the first option if present.
--version
%
autoupdate - Update a configure.in to a newer Autoconf
autoupdate [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]...
Update  each  TEMPLATE-FILE if given, or `configure.ac' if present, or else `configure.in', to the syntax
of the current version of Autoconf.  The original files are backed up.
Operation modes:
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
-V, --version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
%
ldns-verify-zone - read a DNSSEC signed zone and verify it.
ldns-verify-zone ZONEFILE
ldns-verify-zone reads a DNS zone file and verifies it.
RRSIG resource records are checked against the DNSKEY set at the zone apex.
-h     Show usage and exit
-a     Apex only, check only the zone apex
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
info - read Info documents
info [OPTION]... [MENU-ITEM...]
Read documentation in Info format.
-a, --all
use all matching manuals.
-k, --apropos=STRING
look up STRING in all indices of all manuals.
-d, --directory=DIR
add DIR to INFOPATH.
%
netstat  -  Print  network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections, and
multicast memberships
[--rfcomm|-f]    [--listening|-l]    [--all|-a]    [--numeric|-n]   [--numeric-hosts]   [--numeric-ports]
[--numeric-users] [--symbolic|-N] [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]] [--timers|-o] [--program|-p]  [--verbose|-v]
[--continuous|-c] [--wide|-W]
netstat  {--route|-r}  [address_family_options]  [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]] [--verbose|-v] [--numeric|-n]
[--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continuous|-c]
netstat   {--interfaces|-i}   [--all|-a]   [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]]    [--verbose|-v]    [--program|-p]
[--numeric|-n] [--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continuous|-c]
netstat  {--groups|-g}  [--numeric|-n]  [--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continu‐
ous|-c]
%
ldns-zcat - reunite (z)split up a zone files
ldns-zcat zonefiles
ldns-zcat  will  read  in  a  bunch  of (z)split up zonefiles and creates a new larger zone file. The SOA
record in the first part is used as the SOA record in the generated zone.
The resulted zone file is printed to standard output.
-o ORIGIN
use ORIGIN when reading in the zone
-v     show the version number and exit
%
chem - groff preprocessor for producing chemical structure diagrams
chem [option ....]  [--] [filespec ....]
chem -h | --help
chem -v | --version
There  are  no  other options than -h, --help, -v, and --version; these options provoke the printing of a
version or usage information, respectively, and all filespec arguments are ignored.  A filespec  argument
is either a file name of an existing file or a minus character -, meaning standard input.  If no argument
is specified then standard input is taken automatically.
chem produces chemical structure diagrams.  Today's version is best suited for organic chemistry  (bonds,
%
seq - print a sequence of numbers
seq [OPTION]... LAST
seq [OPTION]... FIRST LAST
seq [OPTION]... FIRST INCREMENT LAST
Print numbers from FIRST to LAST, in steps of INCREMENT.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-f, --format=FORMAT
use printf style floating-point FORMAT
-s, --separator=STRING
use STRING to separate numbers (default: \n)
%
groups - display current group names
groups [user]
The groups command displays the current group names or ID values. If the value does not have a
corresponding entry in /etc/group, the value will be displayed as the numerical group value. The optional
user parameter will display the groups for the named user.
Systems which do not support concurrent group sets will have the information from /etc/group reported.
The user must use newgrp or sg to change his current real and effective group ID.
FILES
/etc/group
Group account information.
%
ifconfig - configure a network interface
ifconfig [-v] [-a] [-s] [interface]
ifconfig [-v] interface [aftype] options | address ...
Ifconfig  is used to configure the kernel-resident network interfaces.  It is used at boot time to set up
interfaces as necessary.  After that, it is usually only needed when debugging or when system  tuning  is
needed.
If  no arguments are given, ifconfig displays the status of the currently active interfaces.  If a single
interface argument is given, it displays the status of the given interface only; if a single -a  argument
is  given,  it displays the status of all interfaces, even those that are down.  Otherwise, it configures
an interface.
Address Families
%
vgdisplay — display attributes of volume groups
{basic|json}] [-s|--short] [-S|--select Selection] [-v|--verbose] [-d|--debug] [-h|--help] [--ignorelock‐
ingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE] [--version]
[-d|--debug] [-h|-?|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--logonly]  [--noheadings]
[--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--separator Separator] [--unbuffered] [--units
with it's physical and logical volumes and their sizes etc.
%
dnssec-dsfromkey - DNSSEC DS RR generation tool
[-A] [-v level] {dnsname}
dnssec-dsfromkey [-h] [-V]
%
blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
size ]
by device.
%
ftpd - File Transfer Protocol server.
ftpd [OPTION...]
File Transfer Protocol daemon.
-6, --ipv6
restrict daemon to IPv6
-a, --auth=AUTH
use AUTH for authentication
%
col - filter reverse line feeds from input
col [options]
col  filters  out  reverse (and half-reverse) line feeds so the output is in the correct order, with only
forward and half-forward line feeds.  It also replaces any whitespace characters with tabs  where  possi‐
col reads from standard input and writes to standard output.
-b, --no-backspaces
Do not output any backspaces, printing only the last character written to each column position.
-f, --fine
%
unhide — forensic tool to find hidden processes
unhide-posix proc | sys
unhide  is  a  forensic tool to find processes hidden by rootkits, Linux kernel modules or by other tech‐
niques.  It detects hidden processes using six techniques.
Options are only available for unhide-linux not for unhide-posix.
-d     Do a double check in brute test to avoid false positive.
-f     Write a log file (unhide-linux.log) in the current directory.
%
blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
size ]
by device.
%
route - show / manipulate the IP routing table
[irtt I] [reject] [mod] [dyn] [reinstate] [[dev] If]
route  [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
Route manipulates the kernel's IP routing tables.  Its primary use is to set up static routes to specific
When  the  add  or del options are used, route modifies the routing tables.  Without these options, route
%
setfont - load EGA/VGA console screen font
setfont [-O font+umap.orig] [-o font.orig] [-om cmap.orig] [-ou umap.orig] [-N] [font.new ...]  [-m cmap]
[-u umap] [-C console] [-hH] [-v] [-V]
The setfont command reads a font from the file font.new and loads it into the EGA/VGA  character  genera‐
tor,  and  optionally  outputs the previous font.  It can also load various mapping tables and output the
previous versions.
and load the union.  Typical use:
setfont
Load a default font.
%
python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
installed on your system as well.)
Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
%
flock - manage locks from shell scripts
flock [options] file|directory command [arguments]
flock [options] file|directory -c command
flock [options] number
The first and second of the above forms wrap the lock around the execution of a command, in a manner sim‐
priate  permissions)  if  it  does  not  already  exist.   By  default, if the lock cannot be immediately
acquired, flock waits until the lock is available.
The third form uses an open file by its file descriptor number.  See the examples below for how that  can
be used.
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-d, --decode
decode data
-i, --ignore-garbage
when decoding, ignore non-alphabet characters
%
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-c, --check
checks the syntax only
-o, --output=FILE
output file
%
infotocap - convert a terminfo description into a termcap description
infotocap  looks in each given text file for terminfo descriptions.  For each terminfo description found,
an equivalent termcap description is written to standard output.  Terminfo use  capabilities  are  trans‐
lated directly to termcap tc capabilities.
-v   print out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
-V   print out the version of the program in use on standard error and exit.
line to a maximum width of 60 characters.
%
setfattr - set extended attributes of filesystem objects
setfattr [-h] -n name [-v value] pathname...
setfattr [-h] -x name pathname...
setfattr [-h] --restore=file
The setfattr command associates a new value with an extended attribute name for each specified file.
-n name, --name=name
Specifies the name of the extended attribute to set.
-v value, --value=value
Specifies the new value of the extended attribute. There are three methods available for encoding the
value.  If the given string is enclosed in double quotes, the inner string is  treated  as  text.  In
%
kadmind  [-x  db_args]  [-r  realm]  [-m]  [-nofork]  [-proponly]  [-port  port-number] [-P pid_file] [-p
kadmind starts the Kerberos administration server.  kadmind typically runs on the master Kerberos server,
which  stores  the KDC database.  If the KDC database uses the LDAP module, the administration server and
the KDC server need not run on the same machine.  kadmind accepts remote requests from programs  such  as
kadmind requires a number of configuration files to be set up in order for it to work:
The KDC configuration file contains configuration information for the KDC and admin servers.  kad‐
mind uses settings in this file to locate the Kerberos database,  and  is  also  affected  by  the
%
btrfs-check - check or repair an unmounted btrfs filesystem
btrfs check [options] <device>
The filesystem checker is used to verify structural integrity of a filesystem and attempt to repair it if
requested. The filesystem must be unmounted.
By default, btrfs check will not modify the device but you can reaffirm that by the option --readonly.
btrfsck is an alias of btrfs check command and is now deprecated.
Warning
Do not use --repair unless you are advised to by a developer, an experienced user or accept the fact
that fsck cannot possibly fix all sorts of damage that could happen to a filesystem because of
software and hardware bugs.
%
lsinitcpio - Examine an initramfs
lsinitcpio [action] [options] image
Examines the contents of an initcpio image. Without any options, lsinitcpio simply lists the contents of
an image.
ACTIONS
-a, --analyze
Analyze the contents of the specified image and print output in human readable form.
-c, --config
Show the configuration file the given image was built with.
-l, --list
%
eject - eject removable media
eject [options] device|mountpoint
eject  allows removable media (typically a CD-ROM, floppy disk, tape, JAZ, ZIP or USB disk) to be ejected
under software control.  The command can also control some multi-disc  CD-ROM  changers,  the  auto-eject
feature supported by some devices, and close the disc tray of some CD-ROM drives.
The  device  corresponding to device or mountpoint is ejected.  If no name is specified, the default name
'/dev/sda'), UUID=uuid or LABEL=label tags.
There  are  four different methods of ejecting, depending on whether the device is a CD-ROM, SCSI device,
removable floppy, or tape.  By default eject tries all four methods in order until it succeeds.
%
clear - clear the terminal screen
clear
bility is defined).  clear looks in the environment for the terminal type and then in the terminfo  data‐
base to determine how to clear the screen.
%
rsh - Remote shell client
remote shell
-6, --ipv6
use only IPv6
allows an eight-bit input data path at all times
%
crontab - maintains crontab files for individual users
crontab [-u user] file
crontab [-u user] [-l | -r | -e] [-i] [-s]
crontab -n [ hostname ]
crontab -c
Crontab  is  the program used to install a crontab table file, remove or list the existing tables used to
/var/spool/,  they  are not intended to be edited directly.  For SELinux in MLS mode, you can define more
In this version of Cron it is possible to use a network-mounted shared /var/spool/cron across  a  cluster
of  hosts  and specify that only one of the hosts should run the crontab jobs in the particular directory
%
netctl-auto - Control automatic selection of wireless netctl profiles
netctl-auto [--help | --version]
netctl-auto@.service file. See netctl.special(7) for details about the service file.
The following commands are understood:
list
List all profiles which are currently available for automatic selection. Active profiles will be
marked with a ‘*’, disabled profiles will be marked with a ‘!’.
%
setfacl - set file access control lists
setfacl [-bkndRLPvh] [{-m|-x} acl_spec] [{-M|-X} acl_file] file ...
setfacl --restore=file
of commands is followed by a sequence of files (which in turn can be followed by another sequence of com‐
mands, ...).
The  options  -m,  and  -x expect an ACL on the command line. Multiple ACL entries are separated by comma
characters (`,'). The options -M, and -X read an ACL from a file or from standard input.  The  ACL  entry
format is described in Section ACL ENTRIES.
The --set and --set-file options set the ACL of a file or a directory. The previous ACL is replaced.  ACL
%
mkreiserfs - The create tool for the Linux ReiserFS filesystem.
mkreiserfs  [  -dfV  ]  [  -b | --block-size N ] [ -h | --hash HASH ] [ -u | --uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label
LABEL ] [ --format FORMAT ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ -s | --journal-size N  ]  [
-o  | --journal-offset N ] [ -t | --transaction-max-size N ] [ -B | --badblocks file ]  device [ filesys‐
tem-size ]
mkreiserfs creates a Linux ReiserFS filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
device is the special file corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk
partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
filesystem-size
is the size in blocks of the filesystem. If omitted, mkreiserfs will automatically set it.
%
jfs_debugfs - shell-type JFS file system editor
jfs_debugfs device
jfs_debugfs  is  a  program  which  can  be  used to perform various low-level actions on a JFS formatted
device.
jfs_debugfs must be run as root.
a[lter] <block> <offset> <hex_string>
replaces the data located at the <offset> of <block> with <hex_string>
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
gnutls-cli-debug - GnuTLS debug client
gnutls-cli-debug [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
TLS  debug  client.  It sets up multiple TLS connections to a server and queries its capabilities. It was
created to assist in debugging GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server's capabilities.  It
connects  to  a  TLS  server, performs tests and print the server's capabilities. If called with the `-v'
parameter more checks will be performed.  Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs.
-d number, --debug=number
constrained to being:
%
tty - print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input
tty [OPTION]...
Print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input.
-s, --silent, --quiet
print nothing, only return an exit status
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
csplit - split a file into sections determined by context lines
csplit [OPTION]... FILE PATTERN...
each piece to standard output.
Read standard input if FILE is -
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --suffix-format=FORMAT
-f, --prefix=PREFIX
%
systemd-cgtop - Show top control groups by their resource usage
systemd-cgtop shows the top control groups of the local Linux control group hierarchy, ordered by their
specified control group.
If systemd-cgtop is not connected to a tty, no column headers are printed and the default is to only run
Resource usage is only accounted for control groups in the relevant hierarchy, i.e. CPU usage is only
accounted for control groups in the "cpuacct" hierarchy, memory usage only for those in "memory" and disk
I/O usage for those in "blkio". If resource monitoring for these resources is required, it is recommended
%
tload - graphic representation of system load average
tload [options] [tty]
tload  prints  a  graph  of the current system load average to the specified tty (or the tty of the tload
process if none is specified).
-s, --scale number
The scale option allows a vertical scale to be specified for the display  (in  characters  between
graph ticks); thus, a smaller value represents a larger scale, and vice versa.
-d, --delay seconds
The delay sets the delay between graph updates in seconds.
%
firewallctl - firewalld command line client
firewallctl is an alternate command line client of the firewalld daemon. It provides interface to manage
runtime and permanent configuration.
things can get changed in the runtime or permanent configuration.
The following options are supported:
General Options
-h, --help
%
jfs_fsck - initiate replay of the JFS transaction log, and check and repair a JFS formatted device
jfs_fsck [ -afnpvV ] [ -j journal_device ] [ --omit_journal_replay ] [ --replay_journal_only ] device
jfs_fsck  is used to replay the JFS transaction log, check a JFS formatted device for errors, and fix any
errors found.
jfs_fsck must be run as root.
WARNING
jfs_fsck should only be used to check an unmounted file system or a file  system  that  is  mounted  READ
ONLY.  Using jfs_fsck to check a file system mounted other than READ ONLY could seriously damage the file
system!
%
pidof -- find the process ID of a running program.
pidof [-s] [-c] [-x] [-o omitpid[,omitpid..]]  [-o omitpid[,omitpid..]..]  program [program..]
Pidof finds the process id's (pids) of the named programs. It prints those id's on the standard output.
-s     Single shot - this instructs the program to only return one pid.
non-root users, as they will be unable to check the current root directory of  processes  they  do
not own.
-x     Scripts  too  -  this  causes  the program to also return process id's of shells running the named
scripts.
%
fdformat - low-level format a floppy disk
fdformat [options] device
fdformat  does  a  low-level format on a floppy disk.  device is usually one of the following (for floppy
%
tipc - a TIPC configuration and management tool
The Transparent Inter-Process Communication (TIPC) protocol offers total address transparency between
processes which allows applications in a clustered computer environment to communicate quickly and reli‐
ably with each other, regardless of their location within the cluster.
TIPC originated at the telecommunications manufacturer Ericsson. The first open source version of TIPC
%
install-info - update info/dir entries
install-info [OPTION]... [INFO-FILE [DIR-FILE]]
Add or remove entries in INFO-FILE from the Info directory DIR-FILE.  INFO-FILE and DIR-FILE are required
unless the --info-file or --dir-file (or --info-dir) options are given, respectively.
--add-once
add only to first matching section, not all.
--align=COL
start description of new entries at column COL.
--calign=COL
%
busctl - Introspect the bus
The following options are understood:
--address=ADDRESS
Connect to the bus specified by ADDRESS instead of using suitable defaults for either the system or
user bus (see --system and --user options).
--show-machine
When showing the list of peers, show a column containing the names of containers they belong to. See
%
make - GNU make utility to maintain groups of programs
make [OPTION]... [TARGET]...
The  make utility will determine automatically which pieces of a large program need to be recompiled, and
issue the commands to recompile them.  The manual describes the GNU implementation  of  make,  which  was
written  by Richard Stallman and Roland McGrath, and is currently maintained by Paul Smith.  Our examples
show C programs, since they are very common, but you can use make with  any  programming  language  whose
compiler  can  be run with a shell command.  In fact, make is not limited to programs.  You can use it to
describe any task where some files must be updated automatically from others whenever the others change.
To prepare to use make, you must write a file called the makefile that describes the relationships  among
files  in  your program, and the states the commands for updating each file.  In a program, typically the
executable file is updated from object files, which are in turn made by compiling source files.
%
mknod - make block or character special files
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-m, --mode=MODE
set file permission bits to MODE, not a=rw - umask
-Z     set the SELinux security context to default type
--context[=CTX]
like -Z, or if CTX is specified then set the SELinux or SMACK security context to CTX
%
lsmod - Show the status of modules in the Linux Kernel
lsmod
lsmod is a trivial program which nicely formats the contents of the /proc/modules, showing what kernel
modules are currently loaded.
others.
%
fsfreeze --freeze|--unfreeze mountpoint
fsfreeze suspends or resumes access to a filesystem.
fsfreeze halts any new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk.  fsfreeze is intended
to be used with hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots.
fsfreeze is unnecessary for device-mapper devices.  The device-mapper (and LVM) automatically  freezes  a
page.
The mountpoint argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.  The filesystem
%
klist - list cached Kerberos tickets
klist [-e] [[-c] [-l] [-A] [-f] [-s] [-a [-n]]] [-C] [-k [-t] [-K]] [-V] [cache_name|keytab_name]
klist  lists the Kerberos principal and Kerberos tickets held in a credentials cache, or the keys held in
a keytab file.
-e     Displays the encryption types of the session key and the ticket for each credential in the creden‐
tial cache, or each key in the keytab file.
-l     If a cache collection is available, displays a table summarizing the caches present in the collec‐
tion.
-A     If a cache collection is available, displays the contents of all of the caches in the collection.
%
pdfmom - Produce PDF documents using the mom macro set
pdfmom [-Tps [pdfroff options]] [groff options] files ...
pdfmom [-Tpdf] [groff options] files ...
pdfmom  is  a  wrapper around groff that facilitates the production of PDF documents from files formatted
with the mom macros.
pdfmom prints to stdout, so output must be redirected to a destination file.  The size of the  final  PDF
If  called  with the -Tpdf option (which is the default), pdfmom processes files using groff's native PDF
driver, gropdf.  If -Tps is given, processing is passed over to pdfroff, which  uses  groff's  PostScript
%
uname - print system information
uname [OPTION]...
Print certain system information.  With no OPTION, same as -s.
-a, --all
print all information, in the following order, except omit -p and -i if unknown:
-s, --kernel-name
print the kernel name
-n, --nodename
print the network node hostname
%
printenv - print all or part of environment
printenv [OPTION]... [VARIABLE]...
Print  the  values of the specified environment VARIABLE(s).  If no VARIABLE is specified, print name and
value pairs for them all.
-0, --null
end each output line with NUL, not newline
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
%
ipcmk - make various IPC resources
ipcmk [options]
ipcmk allows you to create shared memory segments, message queues, and semaphore arrays.
Resources can be specified with these options:
-M, --shmem size
for GB, etc.
%
mkdir - make directories
mkdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...
Create the DIRECTORY(ies), if they do not already exist.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-m, --mode=MODE
set file mode (as in chmod), not a=rwx - umask
-p, --parents
no error if existing, make parent directories as needed
-v, --verbose
%
mkfifo - make FIFOs (named pipes)
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-m, --mode=MODE
set file permission bits to MODE, not a=rw - umask
-Z     set the SELinux security context to default type
--context[=CTX]
like -Z, or if CTX is specified then set the SELinux or SMACK security context to CTX
%
genrandom - generate a file containing random data
genrandom [-n number] {size} {filename}
genrandom generates a file or a set of files containing a specified quantity of pseudo-random data, which
can be used as a source of entropy for other commands on systems with no random device.
-n number
size
The size of the file, in kilobytes, to generate.
filename
%
mount - mount a filesystem
mount [-l|-h|-V]
mount -a [-fFnrsvw] [-t fstype] [-O optlist]
mount [-fnrsvw] [-o options] device|dir
mount [-fnrsvw] [-t fstype] [-o options] device dir
All  files  accessible  in  a  Unix system are arranged in one big tree, the file hierarchy, rooted at /.
These files can be spread out over several devices.  The mount command serves to  attach  the  filesystem
The standard form of the mount command is:
%
gpg-agent - Secret key management for GnuPG
gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options]
gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] --server
gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] --daemon [command_line]
gpg-agent  is  a daemon to manage secret (private) keys independently from any protocol.  It is used as a
backend for gpg and gpgsm as well as for a couple of other utilities.
The agent is automatically started on demand by gpg, gpgsm, gpgconf, or gpg-connect-agent.  Thus there is
the agent using:
gpg-connect-agent /bye
%
xfs_admin - change parameters of an XFS filesystem
xfs_admin -V
Devices that are mounted cannot be modified.  Administrators must unmount filesystems before xfs_admin or
-e     Enables  unwritten  extent  support  on  a filesystem that does not already have this enabled (for
legacy filesystems, it can't be disabled anymore at mkfs time).
%
uncompress — expand compressed data
uncompress [−cfv] [file...]
The  uncompress utility shall restore files to their original state after they have been compressed using
the compress utility. If no files are specified, the standard input shall be uncompressed to the standard
output.  If the invoking process has appropriate privileges, the ownership, modes, access time, and modi‐
fication time of the original file shall be preserved.
%
gdbus - Tool for working with D-Bus objects
gdbus introspect [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name --object-path /path/to/object
[--xml] [--recurse] [--only-properties]
gdbus monitor [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name [--object-path /path/to/object]
gdbus call [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name --object-path /path/to/object
gdbus emit [--system | --session | --address address] --object-path /path/to/object
gdbus help
%
systemd-tmpfiles, systemd-tmpfiles-setup.service, systemd-tmpfiles-setup-dev.service, systemd-tmpfiles-
clean.service, systemd-tmpfiles-clean.timer - Creates, deletes and cleans up volatile and temporary files
and directories
systemd-tmpfiles-setup.service
systemd-tmpfiles-setup-dev.service
systemd-tmpfiles-clean.service
systemd-tmpfiles-clean.timer
systemd-tmpfiles creates, deletes, and cleans up volatile and temporary files and directories, based on
%
features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
%
telinit - Change SysV runlevel
the runlevel requests will be transparently translated into systemd unit activation requests.
The following options are understood:
--help
Print a short help text and exit.
--no-wall
Do not send wall message before reboot/halt/power-off.
%
bootctl - Control the firmware and boot manager settings
bootctl checks, updates, installs or removes the boot loader from the current system.
bootctl status checks and prints the currently installed versions of the boot loader binaries and all
current EFI boot variables.
%
devlink - Devlink tool
OBJECT := { dev | port | monitor }
-V, -Version
Print the version of the devlink utility and exit.
-n, -no-nice-names
Turn off printing out nice names, for example netdevice ifnames instead of devlink port identifi‐
cation.
%
mountpoint - see if a directory or file is a mountpoint
mountpoint [-d|-q] directory | file
mountpoint -x device
mountpoint checks whether the given directory or file is mentioned in the /proc/self/mountinfo file.
-d, --fs-devno
Show the major/minor numbers of the device that is mounted on the given directory.
-q, --quiet
Be quiet - don't print anything.
%
migratepages - Migrate the physical location a processes pages
migratepages pid from-nodes to-nodes
migratepages  moves the physical location of a processes pages without any changes of the virtual address
space of the process. Moving the pages allows one to change the distances of a  process  to  its  memory.
If  multiple nodes are specified for from-nodes or to-nodes then an attempt is made to preserve the rela‐
tive location of each page in each nodeset.
Valid node specifiers
%
ssh-keygen — authentication key generation, management and conversion
[-f output_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -p [-P old_passphrase] [-N new_passphrase] [-f keyfile]
ssh-keygen -i [-m key_format] [-f input_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -e [-m key_format] [-f input_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -y [-f input_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -c [-P passphrase] [-C comment] [-f keyfile]
ssh-keygen -l [-v] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-f input_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -B [-f input_keyfile]
ssh-keygen -F hostname [-f known_hosts_file] [-l]
ssh-keygen -H [-f known_hosts_file]
ssh-keygen -R hostname [-f known_hosts_file]
ssh-keygen -r hostname [-f input_keyfile] [-g]
%
accessdb - dumps the content of a man-db database in a human readable format
/usr/sbin/accessdb [-d?V] [<index-file>]
accessdb  will  output the data contained within a man-db database in a human readable form.  By default,
it will dump the data from /var/cache/man/index.<db-type>, where <db-type> is dependent on  the  database
library in use.
Supplying an argument to accessdb will override this default.
-d, --debug
Print debugging information.
-?, --help
%
sdiff - side-by-side merge of file differences
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-o, --output=FILE
operate interactively, sending output to FILE
-E, --ignore-tab-expansion
%
gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
%
dirmngr-client - Tool to access the Dirmngr services
dirmngr-client [options] [certfile|pattern]
The  dirmngr-client is a simple tool to contact a running dirmngr and test whether a certificate has been
revoked --- either by being listed in the corresponding CRL or by running the OCSP protocol.  If no dirm‐
ngr  is  running,  a new instances will be started but this is in general not a good idea due to the huge
performance overhead.
The usual way to run this tool is either:
dirmngr-client acert
or
%
whereis - locate the binary, source, and manual page files for a command
whereis [options] [-BMS directory... -f] name...
whereis  locates the binary, source and manual files for the specified command names.  The supplied names
are first stripped of leading pathname components and any (single) trailing extension of  the  form  .ext
(for example: .c) Prefixes of s.  resulting from use of source code control are also dealt with.  whereis
then attempts to locate the desired program in the standard Linux places, and in the places specified  by
$PATH and $MANPATH.
The  search restrictions (options -b, -m and -s) are cumulative and apply to the subsequent name patterns
on the command line.  Any new search restriction resets the search mask.  For example,
whereis -bm ls tr -m gcc
%
geoiplookup - look up country using IP Address or hostname
geoiplookup [-d directory] [-f filename] [-v] <ipaddress|hostname>
geoiplookup uses the GeoIP library and database to find the Country that an IP address or hostname origi‐
nates from.
For example
NL, Netherlands
%
blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
size ]
by device.
%
ldns-version - print out the version of the ldns-library and tools on this system
ldns-version
ldns-version is used to print out version information of the ldns library and tools
ldns-version has no options.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
%
Transform syslinux config into GRUB one.
-c, --cwd=DIR
current directory of syslinux [default is parent directory of input file].
-i, --isolinux
assume input is an isolinux configuration file.
-o, --output=FILE
write output to FILE [default=stdout].
%
pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
pwconv [options]
pwunconv [options]
grpconv [options]
grpunconv [options]
The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
%
features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
%
isosize - output the length of an iso9660 filesystem
isosize [options] iso9660_image_file
-x, --sectors
Show the block count and block size in human-readable form.  The output uses  the  term  "sectors"
for "blocks".
-d, --divisor number
%
toe - table of (terminfo) entries
toe [-v[n]] [-ahsuUV] file...
With  no  options,  toe lists all available terminal types by primary name with descriptions.  File argu‐
ments specify the directories to be scanned; if no such arguments are given, your default terminfo direc‐
tory  is scanned.  If you also specify the -h option, a directory header will be issued as each directory
is entered.
There are other options intended for use by terminfo file maintainers:
-a     report on all of the terminal databases which ncurses would search, rather than only the first one
that it finds.
%
gcc - GNU project C and C++ compiler
gcc [-c|-S|-E] [-std=standard]
[-g] [-pg] [-Olevel]
[-Wwarn...] [-Wpedantic]
[-Idir...] [-Ldir...]
[-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
[-foption...] [-mmachine-option...]
[-o outfile] [@file] infile...
Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.  g++ accepts mostly the same
options as gcc.
When you invoke GCC, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, assembly and linking.  The "overall
options" allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage.  For example, the -c option says not to
%
debugfs  [  -DVwcin  ]  [  -b  blocksize  ]  [  -s  superblock  ]  [  -f  cmd_file  ] [ -R request ] [ -d
data_source_device ] [ -z undo_file ] [ device ]
The debugfs program is an interactive file system debugger. It can be used  to  examine  and  change  the
device is a block device (e.g., /dev/sdXX) or a file containing the file system.
-w     Specifies that the file system should be opened in read-write mode.  Without this option, the file
system is opened in read-only mode.
%
badblocks - search a device for bad blocks
badblocks  [  -svwnfBX  ]  [  -b  block_size  ]  [  -c  blocks_at_once  ]  [  -d read_delay_factor ] [ -e
max_bad_blocks ] [ -i input_file ] [ -o output_file ] [ -p num_passes ] [  -t  test_pattern  ]  device  [
last_block ] [ first_block ]
badblocks is used to search for bad blocks on a device (usually a disk partition).  device is the special
not  specified,  the last block on the device is used as a default.  first_block is an optional parameter
specifying the starting block number for the test, which allows the testing to start in the middle of the
disk.  If it is not specified the first block on the disk is used as a default.
important that the block size is properly specified, since the block numbers which are generated are very
dependent  on  the block size in use by the filesystem.  For this reason, it is strongly recommended that
%
userdel - delete a user account and related files
userdel [options] LOGIN
The userdel command modifies the system account files, deleting all entries that refer to the user name
LOGIN. The named user must exist.
The options which apply to the userdel command are:
-f, --force
forces userdel to remove the user's home directory and mail spool, even if another user uses the same
home directory or if the mail spool is not owned by the specified user. If USERGROUPS_ENAB is defined
to yes in /etc/login.defs and if a group exists with the same name as the deleted user, then this
%
symcryptrun - Call a simple symmetric encryption tool
symcryptrun --class class --program program --keyfile keyfile [--decrypt|--encrypt] [inputfile]
Sometimes simple encryption tools are already in use for a long time and there might be a desire to inte‐
grate them into the GnuPG framework.  The protocols and encryption methods might be non-standard  or  not
even  properly  documented,  so  that  a  full-fledged  encryption tool with an interface like gpg is not
doable.  symcryptrun provides a solution: It operates by calling the external encryption/decryption  mod‐
ule and provides a passphrase for a key using the standard pinentry based mechanism through gpg-agent.
build time.
For encryption, the plain text must be provided on STDIN or as the argument inputfile, and the ciphertext
will be output to STDOUT.  For decryption vice versa.
%
ownership - Compaq ownership tag retriever
ownership  retrieves  and prints the "ownership tag" that can be set on Compaq computers. Contrary to all
other programs of the dmidecode package, ownership doesn't print any version information, nor labels, but
-d, --dev-mem FILE
Read memory from device FILE (default: /dev/mem)
-h, --help
Display usage information and exit
%
sln - create symbolic links
sln source dest
sln filelist
that if for some reason the dynamic linker is not working, sln can be used  to  make  symbolic  links  to
dynamic libraries.
The command line has two forms.  In the first form, it creates dest as a new symbolic link to source.
In the second form, filelist is a list of space-separated pathname pairs, and the effect is as if sln was
executed once for each line of the file, with the two pathnames as the arguments.
The sln program supports no command-line options.
%
gdbus-codegen - D-Bus code and documentation generator
gdbus-codegen [-h, --help] [--interface-prefix org.project.Prefix] [--generate-c-code OUTFILES]
[--c-namespace YourProject] [--c-generate-object-manager]
[--c-generate-autocleanup none|objects|all] [--generate-docbook OUTFILES]
[--xml-files FILE] [--annotate ELEMENT KEY VALUE]...  FILE [FILE...]
gdbus-codegen is used to generate code and/or documentation for one or more D-Bus interfaces. The tool
C code (via --generate-c-code) and Docbook XML (via --generate-docbook).
GENERATING C CODE
When generating C code, a #GInterface -derived type is generated for each D-Bus interface. Additionally,
for every generated type, FooBar, two concrete instantiable types, FooBarProxy and FooBarSkeleton,
implementing said interface are also generated. The former is derived from #GDBusProxy and intended for
%
talkd - Talk server
talkd [OPTION...]
Talk daemon, using service `ntalk'.
-a, --acl=FILE
read site-wide ACLs from FILE
-d, --debug
enable debugging
-i, --idle-timeout=SECONDS set idle timeout value to SECONDS
-l, --logging
%
dbus-run-session - start a process as a new D-Bus session
dbus-run-session --help
dbus-run-session --version
dbus-run-session is used to start a session bus instance of dbus-daemon from a shell script, and start a
specified program in that session. The dbus-daemon will run for as long as the program does, after which
it will terminate.
One use is to run a shell with its own dbus-daemon in a text‐mode or SSH session, and have the
dbus-daemon terminate automatically on leaving the sub‐shell, like this:
%
ldns-read-zone - read a zonefile and print it
ldns-read-zone ZONEFILE
pretty-printing makeup.
-c     Canonicalize all resource records in the zone before printing
-b     Include Bubble Babble encoding of DS's.
%
tracepath, tracepath6 - traces path to a network host discovering MTU along this path
tracepath [-n] [-b] [-l pktlen] [-m max_hops] [-p port] {destination}
It  traces  path  to  destination  discovering MTU along this path.  It uses UDP port port or some random
port.  It is similar to traceroute, only does not require superuser privileges and has no fancy options.
tracepath6 is good replacement for traceroute6 and classic example of application of Linux error  queues.
error messages.  Probably, it will change, when they will be updated.  For now  it  uses  Van  Jacobson's
trick, sweeping a range of UDP ports to maintain trace history.
-n     Print primarily IP addresses numerically.
%
msgfilter - edit translations of message catalog
msgfilter [OPTION] FILTER [FILTER-OPTION]
Applies a filter to all translations of a translation catalog.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
-i, --input=INPUTFILE
input PO file
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
%
arpaname - translate IP addresses to the corresponding ARPA names
arpaname {ipaddress ...}
BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.
%
ntp-keygen - Create a NTP host key
ntp-keygen [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
software library has been installed, it generates keys, certificate and identity files used in public key
cryptography.  These files are used for cookie encryption, digital signature and challenge/response iden‐
tification algorithms compatible with the Internet standard security infrastructure.
All  files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format, so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in mail
to other sites and certificate authorities.  By default, files are not encrypted.
%
dnsdomainname - show DNS domain name
dnsdomainname [OPTION...]
Show domain part of the system's fully qualified host name.
The tool uses gethostname to get the host name of the system and getaddrinfo to resolve it into a canoni‐
cal name.  The part after the first period ('.') of the canonical name is shown.
-?, --help
give this help list
--usage
give a short usage message
%
ntpd - NTP daemon program
The  ntpd  utility  is an operating system daemon which sets and maintains the system time of day in syn‐
chronism with Internet standard time servers.  It is a complete implementation of the Network Time Proto‐
onds.  While the ultimate precision is not achievable with ordinary workstations and networks  of  today,
%
indxbib - make inverted index for bibliographic databases
indxbib [ -vw ] [ -cfile ] [ -ddir ] [ -ffile ] [ -hn ] [ -istring ] [ -kn ] [ -ln ] [ -nn ] [ -ofile ]
[ -tn ] [ filename... ]
which is then renamed to this.  If no filenames are given on the command line because the -f  option  has
been used, and no -o option is given, the index will be named Ind.i.
Bibliographic  databases  are  divided  into records by blank lines.  Within a record, each fields starts
with a % character at the beginning of a line.  Fields have a one letter name which follows the % charac‐
ter.
The values set by the -c, -n, -l and -t options are stored in the index; when the index is searched, keys
%
gencat — generate a formatted message catalog
gencat catfile msgfile...
The gencat utility shall merge the message text source file msgfile into a formatted message catalog cat‐
file.  The file catfile shall be created if it does not already exist. If catfile does  exist,  its  mes‐
sages  shall  be  included  in the new catfile.  If set and message numbers collide, the new message text
defined in msgfile shall replace the old message text currently contained in catfile.
%
grub-mkrescue - make a GRUB rescue image
grub-mkrescue [OPTION...] [OPTION] SOURCE...
Make GRUB CD-ROM, disk, pendrive and floppy bootable image.
--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
compress GRUB files [optional]
-d, --directory=DIR
use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
--fonts=FONTS
install FONTS [default=unicode]
%
xfs_fsr - filesystem reorganizer for XFS
xfs_fsr [-vdg] [-t seconds] [-p passes] [-f leftoff] [-m mtab]
xfs_fsr [-vdg] [xfsdev | file] ...
xfs_fsr -V
xfs_fsr is applicable only to XFS filesystems.
xfs_fsr  improves  the organization of mounted filesystems.  The reorganization algorithm operates on one
file at a time, compacting or otherwise improving the layout of the file extents  (contiguous  blocks  of
file data).
The  following  options  are  accepted  by  xfs_fsr.   The  -m, -t, and -f options have no meaning if any
filesystems or files are specified on the command line.
%
touch - change file timestamps
touch [OPTION]... FILE...
Update the access and modification times of each FILE to the current time.
A FILE argument that does not exist is created empty, unless -c or -h is supplied.
A FILE argument string of - is handled specially and causes touch to change the times of the file associ‐
ated with standard output.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a     change only the access time
%
chacl - change the access control list of a file or directory
chacl acl pathname...
chacl -b acl dacl pathname...
chacl -d dacl pathname...
chacl -R pathname...
chacl -D pathname...
chacl -B pathname...
chacl -l pathname...
chacl -r pathname...
chacl  is  an IRIX-compatibility command, and is maintained for those users who are familiar with its use
%
secret-tool - Store and retrieve passwords
secret-tool store --label='Label' {attribute} {value} ...
secret-tool lookup {attribute} {value} ...
secret-tool clear {attribute} {value} ...
secret-tool search [--all]{attribute} {value} ...
secret-tool is a command line tool that can be used to store and retrieve passwords.
Each password is stored in an item. Items are uniquely identified by a set of attribute keys and values.
When storing a password you must specify unique pairs of attributes names and values, and when looking up
a password you provide the same attribute name and value pairs.
%
cations to provide batch processing features.
database file.  If the database file does not exist, it will be  created.   If  the  database  file  does
exist, it will be opened.
For  example,  to create a new database file named "mydata.db", create a table named "memos" and insert a
couple of records into that table:
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
glib-gettextize - gettext internationalization utility
glib-gettextize [OPTION...] [DIRECTORY]
glib-gettextize helps to prepare a source package for being internationalized through gettext. It is a
variant of the gettextize that ships with gettext.
glib-gettextize differs from gettextize in that it doesn't create an intl/ subdirectory and doesn't
modify po/ChangeLog (note that newer versions of gettextize behave like this when called with the
--no-changelog option).
--help
print help and exit
%
ldns-compare-zones - read and compare two zonefiles and print differences
ldns-compare-zones reads two DNS zone files and prints number of differences.
Output is formated to:
+NUM_INS        -NUM_DEL        ~NUM_CHG
are considered inserted, and counted as NUM_INS. If an owner name is present in both, but there is a dif‐
ference in the amount or content of the records, these are considered changed, and counted as NUM_CHG.
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
fsck.cramfs - fsck compressed ROM file system
fsck.cramfs [options] file
fsck.cramfs is used to check the cramfs file system.
-v, --verbose
Enable verbose messaging.
-b, --blocksize blocksize
Use  this  blocksize,  defaults to page size. Must be equal to what was set at creation time. Only
used for --extract.
--extract[=directory]
%
xmlcatalog - Command line tool to parse and manipulate XML or SGML catalog files.
--noout | --no-super-update | [-v | --verbose]] {CATALOGFILE} {ENTITIES...}
xmlcatalog is a command line application allowing users to monitor and manipulate XML and SGML catalogs.
Its functions can be invoked from a single command from the command line, or it can perform multiple
functions in interactive mode. It can operate on both XML and SGML files.
xmlcatalog accepts the following options (in alphabetical order):
--add TYPE ORIG REPLACE
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
irqbalance - distribute hardware interrupts across processors on a multiprocessor system
irqbalance
The purpose of irqbalance is to distribute hardware interrupts across processors on a multiprocessor sys‐
tem in order to increase performance.
-o, --oneshot
Causes irqbalance to be run once, after which the daemon exits.
-d, --debug
Causes irqbalance to print extra debug information.  Implies --foreground.
-f, --foreground
%
xfs_ncheck - generate pathnames from i-numbers for XFS
xfs_ncheck [ -i ino ] ... [ -f ] [ -s ] [ -l logdev ] device
xfs_ncheck -V
xfs_ncheck  with  no  -i  arguments generates an inode number and pathname list of all files on the given
order.   The  filesystem  to be examined is specified by the device argument, which should be the disk or
volume device for the filesystem.  Filesystems stored in files can also be checked, using the -f flag.
-f       Specifies that the filesystem image to be processed is stored in a regular file at  device  (see
into an ordinary file.
%
bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
%
btrfs-rescue - Recover a damaged btrfs filesystem
btrfs rescue <subcommand> <args>
btrfs rescue is used to try to recover a damaged btrfs filesystem.
chunk-recover [options] <device>
Recover the chunk tree by scanning the devices
Options
-y
assume an answer of yes to all questions.
%
tracepath, tracepath6 - traces path to a network host discovering MTU along this path
tracepath [-n] [-b] [-l pktlen] [-m max_hops] [-p port] {destination}
It  traces  path  to  destination  discovering MTU along this path.  It uses UDP port port or some random
port.  It is similar to traceroute, only does not require superuser privileges and has no fancy options.
tracepath6 is good replacement for traceroute6 and classic example of application of Linux error  queues.
error messages.  Probably, it will change, when they will be updated.  For now  it  uses  Van  Jacobson's
trick, sweeping a range of UDP ports to maintain trace history.
-n     Print primarily IP addresses numerically.
%
coredumpctl - Retrieve and process saved core dumps and metadata
coredumpctl is a tool that can be used to retrieve and process core dumps and metadata which were saved
The following options are understood:
-h, --help
Print a short help text and exit.
--version
Print a short version string and exit.
%
-D user_dn
tion on the LDAP server.
-w passwd
-H ldapuri
%
xfs_growfs, xfs_info - expand an XFS filesystem
xfs_growfs  [  -dilnrx  ]  [ -D size ] [ -e rtextsize ] [ -L size ] [ -m maxpct ] [ -t mtab ] [ -R size ]
mount-point
xfs_growfs -V
xfs_info [ -t mtab ] mount-point
xfs_info -V
The existing contents of the filesystem are undisturbed, and the added space becomes available for  addi‐
tional file storage.
%
tr - translate or delete characters
Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters from standard input, writing to standard output.
-c, -C, --complement
-d, --delete
-s, --squeeze-repeats
replace  each  sequence  of  a repeated character that is listed in the last specified SET, with a
single occurrence of that character
%
rarp - manipulate the system RARP table
rarp [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
rarp -a
rarp [-v] -d hostname ...
rarp [-v] [-t type] -s hostname hw_addr
replacement RARP daemon, see ftp://ftp.dementia.org/pub/net-tools
Rarp manipulates the kernel's RARP table in various ways.  The primary options are  clearing  an  address
mapping  entry  and manually setting up one.  For debugging purposes, the rarp program also allows a com‐
plete dump of the RARP table.
%
kadmin  [-O|-N]  [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [[-c cache_name]|[-k [-t keytab]]|-n] [-w password]
[-s admin_server[:port]]
kadmin.local [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [-d dbname] [-e enc:salt ...]  [-m] [-x db_args]
vide  nearly  identical  functionalities;  the  difference is that kadmin.local directly accesses the KDC
man  page  will  use "kadmin" to refer to both versions.  kadmin provides for the maintenance of Kerberos
principals, password policies, and service key tables (keytabs).
The remote kadmin client uses Kerberos to authenticate  to  kadmind  using  the  service  principal  kad‐
min/ADMINHOST  (where ADMINHOST is the fully-qualified hostname of the admin server) or kadmin/admin.  If
%
machinectl - Control the systemd machine manager
considered running instances of:
·   Virtual Machines (VMs) that virtualize hardware to run full operating system (OS) instances
(including their kernels) in a virtualized environment on top of the host OS.
·   Containers that share the hardware and OS kernel with the host OS, in order to run OS userspace
instances on top the host OS.
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
less - opposite of more
less -?
less --help
less -V
less --version
less [-[+]aABcCdeEfFgGiIJKLmMnNqQrRsSuUVwWX~]
[-b space] [-h lines] [-j line] [-k keyfile]
[-{oO} logfile] [-p pattern] [-P prompt] [-t tag]
[-T tagsfile] [-x tab,...] [-y lines] [-[z] lines]
[-# shift] [+[+]cmd] [--] [filename]...
movement.  Also, less does not have to read the entire input file before starting, so  with  large  input
%
nproc - print the number of processing units available
nproc [OPTION]...
of online processors
--all  print the number of installed processors
--ignore=N
if possible, exclude N processing units
--help display this help and exit
--version
%
unicode_start - put keyboard and console in unicode mode
unicode_start [font [umap]]
put accordingly.
The parameter font is a font that is loaded. It should have a built-in Unicode map,  or,  if  it  hasn't,
such  a map can be given explicitly as second parameter.  When no font was specified, the current font is
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
ldns-rrsig - print out the inception and expiration dates in human readable form
ldns-rrsig domain [ type ]
ldns-rrsig  is used to print the expiration and inception date of a RRSIG. The first argument is a domain
name. ldns-rrsig will query the authoritative servers for that domain to get a list of RRSIGs.   It  will
then print out the inception and experiration dates for the RRSIG covering the SOA record.
If the second argument type is given the RRSIG covering that type will be shown.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
%
blkdiscard - discard sectors on a device
blkdiscard [options] [-o offset] [-l length] device
ior based on range or size, as explained below.
The device argument is the pathname of the block device.
WARNING: All data in the discarded region on the device will be lost!
%
lvdisplay — display attributes of a logical volume
lockingfailure]   [--ignoreskippedcluster]   [--maps]   [--nosuffix]    [-P|--partial]    [--reportformat
{basic|json}]  [-S|--select  Selection]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]  [-v|--verbose]  [--version] [Vol‐
tion] ...]  [-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly]
[--noheadings]  [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--segments] [--separator Sepa‐
lvdisplay  allows  you  to  see the attributes of a logical volume like size, read/write status, snapshot
%
xmllint - command line XML tool
xmllint [--version | --debug | --shell | --xpath "XPath_expression" | --debugent | --copy | --recover |
--noent | --noout | --nonet | --path "PATH(S)" | --load-trace | --htmlout | --nowrap | --valid |
--postvalid | --dtdvalid URL | --dtdvalidfpi FPI | --timing | --output FILE | --repeat | --insert
| --compress | --html | --xmlout | --push | --memory | --maxmem NBBYTES | --nowarning |
--noblanks | --nocdata | --format | --encode ENCODING | --dropdtd | --nsclean | --testIO |
--catalogs | --nocatalogs | --auto | --xinclude | --noxincludenode | --loaddtd | --dtdattr |
--stream | --walker | --pattern PATTERNVALUE | --chkregister | --relaxng SCHEMA | --schema SCHEMA
xmllint --help
The xmllint program parses one or more XML files, specified on the command line as XML-FILE (or the
standard input if the filename provided is - ). It prints various types of output, depending upon the
%
gcc - GNU project C and C++ compiler
gcc [-c|-S|-E] [-std=standard]
[-g] [-pg] [-Olevel]
[-Wwarn...] [-Wpedantic]
[-Idir...] [-Ldir...]
[-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
[-foption...] [-mmachine-option...]
[-o outfile] [@file] infile...
Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.  g++ accepts mostly the same
options as gcc.
When you invoke GCC, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, assembly and linking.  The "overall
options" allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage.  For example, the -c option says not to
%
gcov - coverage testing tool
gcov [-v|--version] [-h|--help]
[-a|--all-blocks]
[-b|--branch-probabilities]
[-c|--branch-counts]
[-d|--display-progress]
[-f|--function-summaries]
[-i|--intermediate-format]
[-l|--long-file-names]
[-m|--demangled-names]
[-n|--no-output]
[-o|--object-directory directory|file]
[-p|--preserve-paths]
[-r|--relative-only]
[-s|--source-prefix directory]
%
libtoolize [OPTION]...
Prepare a package to use libtool.
-c, --copy
copy files rather than symlinking them
--debug
enable verbose shell tracing
-n, --dry-run
print commands rather than running them
%
cpp - The C Preprocessor
cpp [-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
[-Idir...] [-iquotedir...]
[-Wwarn...]
[-M|-MM] [-MG] [-MF filename]
[-MP] [-MQ target...]
[-MT target...]
[-P] [-fno-working-directory]
[-x language] [-std=standard]
infile outfile
Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.
The C preprocessor, often known as cpp, is a macro processor that is used automatically by the C compiler
%
wall - write a message to all users
wall [-n] [-t timeout] [message | file]
wall  displays a message, or the contents of a file, or otherwise its standard input, on the terminals of
all currently logged in users.  The command will wrap lines that are longer than  79  characters.   Short
lines are whitespace padded to have 79 characters.  The command will always put a carriage return and new
line at the end of each line.
Only the superuser can write on the terminals of users who have chosen to deny messages or  are  using  a
program which automatically denies messages.
Reading from a file is refused when the invoker is not superuser and the program is suid or sgid.
%
sftp — secure file transfer program
[-i identity_file] [-l limit] [-o ssh_option] [-P port] [-R num_requests] [-S program]
[-s subsystem | sftp_server] host
sftp [user@]host[:file ...]
sftp [user@]host[:dir[/]]
sftp -b batchfile [user@]host
compression.  sftp connects and logs into the specified host, then enters an interactive command mode.
The second usage format will retrieve files automatically if a non-interactive authentication method is
used; otherwise it will do so after successful interactive authentication.
%
systemd-cat - Connect a pipeline or program's output with the journal
filter tool in a shell pipeline to pass the output the previous pipeline element generates to the
journal.
If no parameter is passed, systemd-cat will write everything it reads from standard input (stdin) to the
journal.
If parameters are passed, they are executed as command line with standard output (stdout) and standard
error output (stderr) connected to the journal, so that all it writes is stored in the journal.
%
glilypond — integrate lilypond parts into groff
glilypond [ options] [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
glilypond transforms sheet music written in the lilypond language into the groff(7) language using the
Files in groff language and standard input can be provided as arguments.
Breaking Options
-?|-h|--help|--usage
Print help or usage information, then leave the program.
--version
%
hostname - show or set system host name
Show or set the system's host name.
-a, --aliases
alias names
-d, --domain
DNS domain name
-f, --fqdn, --long
DNS host name or FQDN
%
systemd-sysusers, systemd-sysusers.service - Allocate system users and groups
systemd-sysusers.service
systemd-sysusers creates system users and groups, based on the file format and location specified in
If invoked with no arguments, it applies all directives from all files found. If one or more filenames
are passed on the command line, only the directives in these files are applied. If only the basename of a
string - is specified as filename, entries from the standard input of the process are read.
%
dnssec-keygen - DNSSEC key generation tool
[-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-E engine] [-f flag] [-G] [-g generator] [-h]
[-I date/offset] [-i interval] [-K directory] [-k] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset]
[-P sync date/offset] [-p protocol] [-q] [-R date/offset] [-r randomdev] [-S key]
[-s strength] [-t type] [-V] [-v level] [-z] {name}
The name of the key is specified on the command line. For DNSSEC keys, this must match the name of the
zone for which the key is being generated.
%
msgen - create English message catalog
msgen [OPTION] INPUTFILE
Creates an English translation catalog.  The input file is the last created English PO file, or a PO Tem‐
plate file (generally created by xgettext).  Untranslated entries are  assigned  a  translation  that  is
identical to the msgid.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE
input PO or POT file
-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
%
srptool - GnuTLS SRP tool
srptool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
Simple  program  that  emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure Remote Password) libraries using
GnuTLS.  It is intended for use in  places where you don't expect SRP authentication to be the  used  for
system users.
In  brief,  to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password file that holds the users and
the verifiers associated with  them  and  the configuration file to hold  the  group  parameters  (called
tpasswd.conf).
%
install - copy files and set attributes
install [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
install [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
install [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORY...
want to download and install a ready-to-use package on a GNU/Linux system, you should instead be using  a
In the first three forms, copy SOURCE to DEST or multiple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY, while set‐
TORY(ies).
%
modinfo - Show information about a Linux Kernel module
modinfo [-0] [-F field] [-k kernel] [modulename|filename...]
modinfo -V
modinfo -h
modinfo extracts information from the Linux Kernel modules given on the command line. If the module name
when loading kernel modules.
modinfo by default lists each attribute of the module in form fieldname : value, for easy reading. The
filename is listed the same way (although it's not really an attribute).
%
scriptreplay - play back typescripts, using timing information
scriptreplay [options] [-t] timingfile [typescript [divisor]]
rhythm as it originally appeared when the script was recorded.
The replay simply displays the information again; the programs that were  run  when  the  typescript  was
being  recorded are not run again.  Since the same information is simply being displayed, scriptreplay is
only guaranteed to work properly if run on the same type of terminal  the  typescript  was  recorded  on.
which scriptreplay is sending its output.
%
routel - list routes with pretty output format
routef - flush routes
routel [tablenr [raw ip args...]]
routef
The  routel  script will list routes in a format that some might consider easier to interpret then the ip
route list equivalent.
The routef script does not take any arguments and will simply flush the routing  table  down  the  drain.
FILES
/usr/bin/routef
/usr/bin/routel
%
xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
served.
The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
%
ldnsd - simple daemon example code
ldnsd port zone zonefile
server!
ldnsd takes a port, zone and zonefile as arguments.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
%
ncursesw6-config - helper script for ncurses libraries
ncursesw6-config [options]
libraries.
--prefix
echos the package-prefix of ncurses
--exec-prefix
echos the executable-prefix of ncurses
--cflags
%
bsdcat — expand files to standard output
bsdcat [options] [files]
bsdcat expands files to standard output.
decompressed data it written to standard output.
To decompress a file:
bsdcat example.txt.gz > example.txt
%
mesg - display (or do not display) messages from other users
mesg [option] [n|y]
The  mesg utility is invoked by a user to control write access others have to the terminal device associ‐
Traditionally,  write  access  is allowed by default.  However, as users become more conscious of various
security risks, there is a trend to remove write access by default, at least for the primary login shell.
To  make  sure  your  ttys are set the way you want them to be set, mesg should be executed in your login
scripts.
n      Disallow messages.
%
pvmove — move physical extents
[-d|--debug] [-h|--help] [-i|--interval Seconds] [--noudevsync] [--reportformat {basic|json}]  [-v|--ver‐
bose]     [-n|--name    LogicalVolume]    [SourcePhysicalVolume[:PE[-PE]...]     [DestinationPhysicalVol‐
ume[:PE[-PE]...]...]]
pvmove allows you to move the allocated physical extents (PEs) on SourcePhysicalVolume  to  one  or  more
extents used by that LV will be moved to free (or specified) extents on DestinationPhysicalVolume(s).  If
no DestinationPhysicalVolume is specified, the normal allocation rules for the Volume Group are used.
If  pvmove  gets  interrupted for any reason (e.g. the machine crashes) then run pvmove again without any
PhysicalVolume arguments to restart any moves that were in progress from the last  checkpoint.   Alterna‐
tively use pvmove --abort at any time to abort.  The resulting location of logical volumes after an abort
%
makeinfo [OPTION]... TEXINFO-FILE...
Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default Info files suitable for read‐
ing online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
not depend on the installed name.
General options:
--document-language=STR locale to use in translating Texinfo keywords
for the output document (default C).
--error-limit=NUM
%
lsof - list open files
lsof  [  -?abChKlnNOPRtUvVX ] [ -A A ] [ -c c ] [ +c c ] [ +|-d d ] [ +|-D D ] [ +|-e s ] [ +|-E ] [ +|-f
[cfgGn] ] [ -F [f] ] [ -g [s] ] [ -i [i] ] [ -k k ] [ +|-L [l] ] [ +|-m m ] [ +|-M ] [ -o [o] ] [ -p s  ]
[ +|-r [t[m<fmt>]] ] [ -s [p:s] ] [ -S [t] ] [ -T [t] ] [ -u s ] [ +|-w ] [ -x [fl] ] [ -z [z] ] [ -Z [Z]
] [ -- ] [names]
%
setcap - set file capabilities
setcap [-q] [-v] (capabilities|-|-r) filename [ ... capabilitiesN fileN ]
In  the  absence of the -v (verify) option setcap sets the capabilities of each specified filename to the
capabilities specified.  The -v option is used to verify that the specified  capabilities  are  currently
associated with the file.
The  special capability string, '-', can be used to indicate that capabilities are read from the standard
The special capability string, '-r', is used to remove a capability set from a file.
%
jfs_tune - adjust tunable file system parameters on JFS
jfs_tune [options] device
jfs_tune adjusts tunable parameters on a Linux JFS file system or external journal.  jfs_tune must be run
as root.
system or JFS external journal has been created.
-J device=external-journal
Attach the JFS external journal located on external-journal to the JFS file system on device.
The  external journal must already have been created using the command.  More than one file system
%
resizecons - change kernel idea of the console size
resizecons COLSxROWS
resizecons -lines ROWS
The  resizecons command tries to change the videomode of the console.  There are several aspects to this:
(a) the kernel must know about it, (b) the hardware must know about it, (c) user programs must know about
console screen memory for all virtual consoles, and might fail if there is not enough memory.   (In  that
The most difficult part of this is (b), since it requires detailed knowledge of the video card  hardware,
%
firewalld - Dynamic Firewall Manager
firewalld provides a dynamically managed firewall with support for network/firewall zones to define the
ethernet bridges and has a separation of runtime and permanent configuration options. It also supports an
interface for services or applications to add firewall rules directly.
These are the command line options of firewalld:
-h, --help
Prints a short help text and exists.
%
mkinitcpio - Create an initial ramdisk environment
mkinitcpio [options]
Creates an initial ramdisk environment for booting the linux kernel. The initial ramdisk is in essence a
very small environment (early userspace) which loads various kernel modules and sets up necessary things
filesystems and root filesystems on a software RAID array. mkinitcpio allows for easy extension with
custom hooks, has autodetection at runtime, and many other features.
-A, --addhooks hooks
Add the additional hooks to the image. These will be processed in order after all other hooks from
times.
%
chage - change user password expiry information
chage [options] LOGIN
The chage command changes the number of days between password changes and the date of the last password
The options which apply to the chage command are:
-d, --lastday LAST_DAY
be expressed in the format YYYY-MM-DD (or the format more commonly used in your area).
-E, --expiredate EXPIRE_DATE
%
groupadd - create a new group
groupadd [options] group
The groupadd command creates a new group account using the values specified on the command line plus the
default values from the system. The new group will be entered into the system files as needed.
The options which apply to the groupadd command are:
-f, --force
exists. When used with -g, and the specified GID already exists, another (unique) GID is chosen (i.e.
-g is turned off).
%
features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
%
workers] [-P pid_file] [-T time_offset]
The -r realm option specifies the realm for which the server should provide service.
does not apply to the LDAP database.
The  -k keytype option specifies the key type of the master key to be entered manually as a password when
-m is given; the default is des-cbc-crc.
%
env - run a program in a modified environment
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-i, --ignore-environment
start with an empty environment
-0, --null
end each output line with NUL, not newline
%
mdadm - manage MD devices aka Linux Software RAID
mdadm [mode] <raiddevice> [options] <component-devices>
devices (typically disk drives or partitions thereof) to be combined into a single device  to  hold  (for
example)  a  single  filesystem.   Some  RAID levels include redundancy and so can survive some degree of
device failure.
Linux Software RAID devices are implemented through the md (Multiple Devices) device driver.
MULTIPATH  is  not a Software RAID mechanism, but does involve multiple devices: each device is a path to
%
features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
%
bc - An arbitrary precision calculator language
bc [ -hlwsqv ] [long-options] [  file ... ]
bc  is  a  language  that  supports arbitrary precision numbers with interactive execution of statements.
There are some similarities in the syntax to the C programming language.   A  standard  math  library  is
available by command line option.  If requested, the math library is defined before processing any files.
bc starts by processing code from all the files listed on the command line in the  order  listed.   After
all  files  have  been  processed, bc reads from the standard input.  All code is executed as it is read.
(If a file contains a command to halt the processor, bc will never read from the standard input.)
document describes the language accepted by this processor.  Extensions will be identified as such.
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
taskset - set or retrieve a process's CPU affinity
taskset [options] mask command [argument...]
taskset [options] -p [mask] pid
taskset  is  used  to set or retrieve the CPU affinity of a running process given its pid, or to launch a
new command with a given CPU affinity.  CPU affinity is a scheduler property that "bonds" a process to  a
given  set  of CPUs on the system.  The Linux scheduler will honor the given CPU affinity and the process
scheduler  attempts  to  keep  processes  on  the  same CPU as long as practical for performance reasons.
Therefore, forcing a specific CPU affinity is useful only in certain applications.
The CPU affinity is represented as a bitmask, with the lowest order bit corresponding to the first  logi‐
%
nm - list symbols from object files
nm [-A|-o|--print-file-name] [-a|--debug-syms]
[-B|--format=bsd] [-C|--demangle[=style]]
[-D|--dynamic] [-fformat|--format=format]
[-g|--extern-only] [-h|--help]
[-l|--line-numbers] [-n|-v|--numeric-sort]
[-P|--portability] [-p|--no-sort]
[-r|--reverse-sort] [-S|--print-size]
[-s|--print-armap] [-t radix|--radix=radix]
[-u|--undefined-only] [-V|--version]
[--plugin name] [--size-sort] [--special-syms]
[--synthetic] [--target=bfdname]
[objfile...]
%
gropdf - PDF driver for groff
gropdf [-delvs] [-F dir] [-p papersize] [-y foundry] [-u [cmapfile]] [files ...]
It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
gropdf  translates  the output of GNU troff to PDF.  Normally gropdf should be invoked by using the groff
command with a -Tpdf option.  If no files are given, gropdf reads the standard input.  A  filename  of  -
also  causes  gropdf  to  read  the  standard input.  PDF output is written to the standard output.  When
gropdf is run by groff options can be passed to gropdf using groff's -P option.
See section FONT INSTALLATION below for a guide how to install fonts for gropdf.
-d     Include debug information as comments within the PDF.  Also produces an uncompressed PDF.
%
ksu - Kerberized super-user
ksu [ target_user ] [ -n target_principal_name ] [ -c source_cache_name ] [ -k ] [ -r time ] [ -pf ] [ -l
lifetime ] [ -z | Z ] [ -q ] [ -e command [ args ...  ] ] [ -a [ args ...  ] ]
REQUIREMENTS
use ksu.
ksu  is  a Kerberized version of the su program that has two missions: one is to securely change the real
and effective user ID to that of the target user, and the other is to create a new security context.
For the sake of clarity, all references to and attributes of the user invoking the program will  start
with "source" (e.g., "source user", "source cache", etc.).
%
msgcomm - match two message catalogs
msgcomm [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
Find  messages  which  are  common  to  two  or more of the specified PO files.  By using the --more-than
print the unique messages).  Translations, comments and extracted comments will be  preserved,  but  only
from the first PO file to define them.  File positions from all PO files will be cumulated.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE ...
input files
%
reiserfsck - The checking tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
reiserfsck  [ -aprVy ] [ --rebuild-sb | --check | --fix-fixable | --rebuild-tree | --clean-attributes ] [
-j | --journal device ] [ -z | --adjust-size ] [ -n | --nolog ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -l  |  --log‐
file file ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -y | --yes ] [ -f | --force ] [ -S | --scan-whole-partition ] [ --no-jour‐
nal-available ] device
Reiserfsck searches for a Reiserfs filesystem on a device, replays any necessary transactions, and either
checks or repairs the file system.
device is  the  special  file  corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX for an IDE disk
partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
--rebuild-sb
%
xfs_metadump - copy XFS filesystem metadata to a file
xfs_metadump [ -aefFgow ] [ -m max_extents ] ] [ -l logdev ] source target
xfs_metadump -V
xfs_metadump  is  a debugging tool that copies the metadata from an XFS filesystem to a file.  The source
argument must be the pathname of the device or file containing the XFS filesystem and the target argument
output to be redirected to another program such as a compression application.
xfs_metadump does not alter the source filesystem in any way. The target  image  is  a  contiguous  (non-
sparse) file containing all the filesystem's metadata and indexes to where the blocks were copied from.
%
ldd - print shared object dependencies
ldd [option]... file...
ldd  prints  the shared objects (shared libraries) required by each program or shared object specified on
the command line.  An example of its use and output is the following:
$ ldd /bin/ls
%
expand - convert tabs to spaces
expand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Convert tabs in each FILE to spaces, writing to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-i, --initial
do not convert tabs after non blanks
-t, --tabs=NUMBER
%
basename - strip directory and suffix from filenames
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --multiple
-s, --suffix=SUFFIX
remove a trailing SUFFIX; implies -a
%
safety mechanism.  The -f option disables this safety mechanism.
-h     Display a usage message.
-n     Dry-run; do not actually write blocks back to the filesystem.
%
mkfs.btrfs - create a btrfs filesystem
mkfs.btrfs [-A|--alloc-start <alloc-start>] [-b|--byte-count <byte-count>] [-d|--data <data-profile>]
[-m|--metadata <metadata profile>] [-M|--mixed] [-l|--leafsize <leafsize>] [-n|--nodesize <nodesize>]
[-s|--sectorsize <sectorsize>] [-L|--label <label>] [-K|--nodiscard] [-r|--rootdir <rootdir>]
[-V|--version] <device> [<device>...]
mkfs.btrfs is used to create the btrfs filesystem on a single or multiple devices. <device> is typically
a block device but can be a file-backed image as well. Multiple devices are grouped by UUID of the
filesystem.
Before mounting such filesystem, the kernel module must know all the devices either via preceding
execution of btrfs device scan or using the device mount option. See section MULTIPLE DEVICES for more
details.
%
runlevel - Print previous and current SysV runlevel
runlevel [options...]
"Runlevels" are an obsolete way to start and stop groups of services used in SysV init. systemd provides
a compatibility layer that maps runlevels to targets, and associated binaries like runlevel.
Nevertheless, only one runlevel can be "active" at a given time, while systemd can activate multiple
targets concurrently, so the mapping to runlevels is confusing and only approximate. Runlevels should not
be used in new code, and are mostly useful as a shorthand way to refer the matching systemd targets in
kernel boot parameters.
┌─────────┬───────────────────┐
│Runlevel │ Target            │
├─────────┼───────────────────┤
%
pdfroff - create PDF documents using groff
pdfroff [-abcegilpstzCEGNRSUVXZ] [-d cs] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-L arg] [-m name] [-M dir] [-n num]
[-o list] [-P arg] [-r cn] [-T dev] [-w name] [-W name] [--emit-ps] [--no-toc-relocation] [--no-
kill-null-pages] [--stylesheet=name] [--no-pdf-output] [--pdf-output=name]
[--no-reference-dictionary] [--reference-dictionary=name] [--report-progress]
[--keep-temporary-files] file ...
pdfroff -h | --help
pdfroff -v | --version [option ...]
pdfroff  is  a  wrapper  program for the GNU text processing system, groff.  It transparently handles the
mechanics of multiple pass groff processing, when applied to suitably marked up groff source files,  such
that tables of contents and body text are formatted separately, and are subsequently combined in the cor‐
rect order, for final publication as a single PDF document.  A further optional “style sheet”  capability
is  provided;  this  allows  for the definition of content which is required to precede the table of con‐
%
update-smart-drivedb - update smartmontools drive database
other platforms.]
update-smart-drivedb updates /usr/share/smartmontools/drivedb.h or DESTFILE from smartmontools SVN repos‐
itory.
It  tries  to  download first from the current branch and then from trunk. The tools used for downloading
The old file is kept if the downloaded file is identical (ignoring the differences in Id  string)  other‐
wise it is moved to drivedb.h.old.
%
sg - execute command as different group ID
sg [-] [group [-c ] command]
The sg command works similar to newgrp but accepts a command. The command will be executed with the
Another difference between newgrp and sg is that some shells treat newgrp specially, replacing themselves
command you are returned to your previous group ID.
CONFIGURATION
The following configuration variables in /etc/login.defs change the behavior of this tool:
SYSLOG_SG_ENAB (boolean)
Enable "syslog" logging of sg activity.
%
slabtop - display kernel slab cache information in real time
slabtop [options]
slabtop  displays  detailed kernel slab cache information in real time.  It displays a listing of the top
caches sorted by one of the listed sort criteria.  It also displays a statistics header filled with  slab
layer information.
Normal  invocation  of slabtop does not require any options.  The behavior, however, can be fine-tuned by
specifying one or more of the following flags:
-d, --delay=N
Refresh the display every n in seconds.  By default, slabtop refreshes  the  display  every  three
seconds.  To exit the program, hit q.
%
journalctl - Query the systemd journal
If called without parameters, it will show the full contents of the journal, starting with the oldest
entry collected.
If one or more match arguments are passed, the output is filtered accordingly. A match is in the format
"FIELD=VALUE", e.g.  "_SYSTEMD_UNIT=httpd.service", referring to the components of a structured journal
entry. See systemd.journal-fields(7) for a list of well-known fields. If multiple matches are specified
matching different fields, the log entries are filtered by both, i.e. the resulting output will show only
entries matching all the specified matches of this kind. If two matches apply to the same field, then
%
setmetamode - define the keyboard meta key handling
setmetamode [ {meta|bit|metabit | esc|prefix|escprefix} ]
Without argument, setmetamode prints the current Meta key mode.  With argument, it sets the Meta key mode
as indicated.  The setting before and after the change are reported.
The Meta key mode is specific for each VT (and the VT corresponding to stdin is  used).   One  might  use
setmetamode in /etc/rc to define the initial state of the Meta key mode, e.g. by
for tty in $INITTY; do
setmetamode escprefix < $tty
done
%
gpgconf - Modify .gnupg home directories
gpgconf [options] --list-components
gpgconf [options] --list-options component
gpgconf [options] --change-options component
The  gpgconf  is a utility to automatically and reasonable safely query and modify configuration files in
the ‘.gnupg’ home directory.  It is designed not to be invoked manually by the user, but automatically by
graphical  user  interfaces  (GUI). ([Please note that currently no locking is done, so concurrent access
guarantees.])
gpgconf provides access to the configuration of one or more components of the GnuPG system.  These compo‐
nents correspond more or less to the programs that exist in the GnuPG framework, like GnuPG, GPGSM, DirM‐
%
grub-set-default - set the saved default boot entry for GRUB
grub-set-default [OPTION] MENU_ENTRY
-h, --help
print this message and exit
-V, --version
print the version information and exit
--boot-directory=DIR
expect GRUB images under the directory DIR/grub instead of the /boot/grub directory
%
vgimport — make exported volume groups known to the system
vgimport  [-a|--all]  [-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select Selection]
system again, perhaps after moving its Physical Volumes from a different machine.  vgexport clears the VG
system ID, and vgimport sets the VG system ID to match the host running vgimport (if the host has a  sys‐
tem ID).
-a, --all
Import all exported Volume Groups.
%
chsh - change your login shell
chsh [-s shell] [-l] [-u] [-v] [username]
chsh  is  used to change your login shell.  If a shell is not given on the command line, chsh prompts for
one.
chsh supports non-local entries (kerberos, LDAP, etc.) if linked  with  libuser,  otherwise  use  ypchsh,
lchsh or any other implementation for non-local entries.
-s, --shell shell
Specify your login shell.
-l, --list-shells
%
localectl - Control the system locale and keyboard layout settings
The system locale controls the language settings of system services and of the UI before the user logs
in, such as the display manager, as well as the default for users after login.
The keyboard settings control the keyboard layout used on the text console and of the graphical UI before
the user logs in, such as the display manager, as well as the default for users after login.
during early system boot. The initramfs is not rebuilt automatically by localectl.
%
whistles you can expect from a decent OpenPGP implementation.
as it requires several other modules to be installed.
RETURN VALUE
for fatal errors.
%
biosdecode - BIOS information decoder
biosdecode  parses the BIOS memory and prints information about all structures (or entry points) it knows
of. Currently known entry point types are:
· SMBIOS (System Management BIOS)
Use dmidecode for a more detailed output.
· DMI (Desktop Management Interface, a legacy version of SMBIOS)
Use dmidecode for a more detailed output.
· SYSID
%
whistles you can expect from a decent OpenPGP implementation.
as it requires several other modules to be installed.
RETURN VALUE
for fatal errors.
%
manpath - determine search path for manual pages
manpath [-qgdc?V] [-m system[,...]] [-C file]
If  $MANPATH  is set, manpath will simply display its contents and issue a warning.  If not, manpath will
determine a suitable manual page hierarchy search path and display the results.
The colon-delimited path is determined using information gained from  the  man-db  configuration  file  -
(/etc/man_db.conf) and the user's environment.
-q, --quiet
Do not issue warnings.
-d, --debug
%
guile - The GNU Project Extension Language
guile [-L DIRECTORY] [-l FILE] [-e FUNCTION] [\] [-c EXPR] [-s SCRIPT] [--] [SCRIPT [ARGs for SCRIPT]]
Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.
standards, providing additional features necessary for real-world use.
Guile works well for interactive use, basic scripting, and extension of larger applications, as  well  as
for stand-alone Scheme application development.
The guile executable itself provides a stand-alone interactive compiler and run-time for Scheme programs,
both for interactive use and for executing Scheme scripts or programs.
%
namei - follow a pathname until a terminal point is found
namei [options] pathname...
namei  interprets  its arguments as pathnames to any type of Unix file (symlinks, files, directories, and
so forth).  namei then follows each pathname until an endpoint is found (a file, a  directory,  a  device
node,  etc).  If it finds a symbolic link, it shows the link, and starts following it, indenting the out‐
put to show the context.
For each line of output, namei uses the following characters to identify the file type found:
f: = the pathname currently being resolved
d = directory
%
emacs - GNU project Emacs
emacs [ command-line switches ] [ files ... ]
The user functionality of GNU Emacs encompasses everything other editors do, and it is easily  extensible
since its editing commands are written in Lisp.
The  primary documentation of GNU Emacs is in the GNU Emacs Manual, which you can read using Info, either
from Emacs or as a standalone program.  Please look there  for  complete  and  up-to-date  documentation.
Emacs  has  an extensive interactive help facility, but the facility assumes that you know how to manipu‐
%
swapon, swapoff - enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping
swapon [options] [specialfile...]
swapoff [-va] [specialfile...]
swapon is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place.
to indicate a device by label or uuid.
Calls to swapon normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that  the
paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files.
swapoff  disables  swapping  on  the specified devices and files.  When the -a flag is given, swapping is
disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in /proc/swaps or /etc/fstab).
%
perl [ -sTtuUWX ]      [ -hv ] [ -V[:configvar] ]      [ -cw ] [ -d[t][:debugger] ] [ -D[number/list] ]
[ -pna ] [ -Fpattern ] [ -l[octal] ] [ -0[octal/hexadecimal] ]
[ -Idir ] [ -m[-]module ] [ -M[-]'module...' ] [ -f ]      [ -C [number/list] ]      [ -S ]
[ -x[dir] ]      [ -i[extension] ]      [ [-e|-E] 'command' ] [ -- ] [ programfile ] [ argument ]...
For more information on these options, you can run "perldoc perlrun".
GETTING HELP
The perldoc program gives you access to all the documentation that comes with Perl.  You can get more
documentation, tutorials and community support online at <http://www.perl.org/>.
If you're new to Perl, you should start by running "perldoc perlintro", which is a general intro for
beginners and provides some background to help you navigate the rest of Perl's extensive documentation.
Run "perldoc perldoc" to learn more things you can do with perldoc.
%
usbhid-dump - dump USB HID device report descriptors and streams
usbhid-dump [OPTION]...
usbhid-dump  uses  libusb to dump report descriptors and streams from HID (human interface device) inter‐
faces of USB devices.  By default, it dumps HID interfaces of all connected USB  devices,  but  could  be
limited to a subset of them, or to a single interface, using options.
other program receives the input in the meantime.  The report descriptor dumping  is  instantaneous,  but
the stream dumping continues until terminated with SIGINT (^C from the terminal) or a timeout expires.
If  you  accidentally  start  dumping a stream from the USB keyboard you use to control the terminal, the
system will stop receiving the input and you won't be able to terminate usbhid-dump. Just stop your input
and  wait until the timeout expires. The stream dumping will stop, the keyboard will be reattached to the
%
grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
matching lines.
In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
Generic Program Information
--help Output a usage message and exit.
%
chvt - change foreground virtual terminal
chvt N
The  command  chvt N makes /dev/ttyN the foreground terminal.  (The corresponding screen is created if it
%
dmidecode - DMI table decoder
dmidecode  is  a  tool  for dumping a computer's DMI (some say SMBIOS) table contents in a human-readable
pieces  of  information  such as serial numbers and BIOS revision. Thanks to this table, you can retrieve
this information without having to probe for the actual hardware.  While this is a good point in terms of
report speed and safeness, this also makes the presented information possibly unreliable.
The DMI table doesn't only describe what the system is currently made of, it also can report the possible
evolutions (such as the fastest supported CPU or the maximal amount of memory supported).
SMBIOS stands for System Management BIOS, while DMI stands for Desktop Management Interface.  Both  stan‐
dards are tightly related and developed by the DMTF (Desktop Management Task Force).
%
ld - The GNU linker
ld [options] objfile ...
ld combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their data and ties up symbol references.
Usually the last step in compiling a program is to run ld.
ld accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language
syntax, to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
command language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
read, combine, and write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or "a.out".
%
vgmerge — merge two volume groups
-l, --list
%
reiserfstune - The tunning tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
reiserfstune  [  -f ] [ -h | --help ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ --no-journal-available ] [ --jour‐
nal-new-device FILE ] [ --make-journal-standard ] [ -s | --journal-new-size N ] [ -o | --journal-new-off‐
set  N ] [ -t | --max-transaction-size N ] [ -b | --add-badblocks file ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -u |
--uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label LABEL ] [ -c | --check-interval  interval-in-days  ]  [  -C  |  --time-last-
checked timestamp ] [ -m | --max-mnt-count count ] [ -M | --mnt-count count ] device
reiserfstune  is used for tuning the ReiserFS. It can change two journal parameters (the journal size and
the maximum transaction size), and it can move the journal's location to a new  specified  block  device.
the  relocated  journal was implemented for a special release of ReiserFS, and was not expected to be put
you  must  apply  a  special patch. Without this patch the kernel will refuse to mount the newly modified
%
fuser - identify processes using files or sockets
fuser -l
fuser -V
fuser  displays  the PIDs of processes using the specified files or file systems.  In the default display
mode, each file name is followed by a letter denoting the type of access:
c      current directory.
e      executable being run.
f      open file.  f is omitted in default display mode.
F      open file for writing.  F is omitted in default display mode.
r      root directory.
m      mmap'ed file or shared library.
%
pstree - display a tree of processes
pstree [-a, --arguments] [-c, --compact] [-h, --highlight-all, -Hpid, --highlight-pid pid]
[-g] --show-pgids] [-l, --long] [-n, --numeric-sort] [-N, --ns-sortns [-p, --show-pids] [-s, --show-par‐
ents] [-S, --ns-changes] [-u, --uid-changes] [-Z, --security-context]
pstree -V, --version
pstree shows running processes as a tree.  The tree is rooted at either pid or init if  pid  is  omitted.
If a user name is specified, all process trees rooted at processes owned by that user are shown.
pstree  visually merges identical branches by putting them in square brackets and prefixing them with the
repetition count, e.g.
init-+-getty
%
emacsclient - tells a running Emacs to visit a file
emacsclient [options] files ...
but is not specific to that system.
emacsclient works in conjunction with the built-in Emacs server.
You can either call emacsclient directly or let other programs run it for you when necessary.  On GNU and
Unix systems many programs consult the environment variable EDITOR (sometimes also VISUAL) to obtain  the
command used for editing.  Thus, setting this environment variable to 'emacsclient' will allow these pro‐
grams to use an already running Emacs for editing.  Other operating systems might have their own  methods
for defining the default editor.
%
vgcfgbackup — backup volume group descriptor area
vgcfgbackup allows you to backup the metadata of your volume groups.  If you don't name any volume groups
on the command line, all of them will be backed up.
In  a default installation, each volume group gets backed up into a separate file bearing the name of the
volume group in the directory /etc/lvm/backup.  You can write the backup to an alternative file using -f.
%s gets replaced by the volume group name.
%
mouse-test - a tool for determining mouse type and device it's attached to.
mouse-test [ device ... ]
speak. It is able to detect MouseMan devices, and to choose between -t ms (three-buttons  aware)  and  -t
bare old two-buttons-only serial mice.
BUGS
I know the application is buggy, but I only own one mouse device.  If you are interested in this applica‐
tion, just call me and awake me from my laziness.
device [ device ... ]
%
grub-mount - export GRUB filesystem with FUSE
Debug tool for filesystem driver.
-C, --crypto
Mount crypto devices.
-d, --debug=STRING
Set debug environment variable.
-K, --zfs-key=FILE|prompt
Load zfs crypto key.
%
gnutls-serv - GnuTLS server
gnutls-serv [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
All arguments must be options.
Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections.
-d number, --debug=number
constrained to being:
in the range  0 through 9999
Specifies the debug level.
%
faked - daemon that remembers fake ownership/permissions of files manipulated by fakeroot processes.
faked  [--debug] [--foreground] [--cleanup] [--key msg-key] [--load] [--save-file save-file] [--port TCP-
port]
If a fakeroot process wants to change the ownership of a file, then faked is the process  that  remembers
that  new owner. If later the same fakeroot process does a stat() for that filename, then the libfakeroot
wrapped stat() call will first ask faked for the fake ownership etc of that file, and then report it.
--debug
Print debugging information on stderr.
--foreground
Don't fork into the background.
%
era_invalidate - Provide a list of blocks that have changed since a particular era.
era_invalidate [options] {device|file}
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
-V, --version
Output version information and exit.
%
vmstat - Report virtual memory statistics
vmstat [options] [delay [count]]
vmstat reports information about processes, memory, paging, block IO, traps, disks and cpu activity.
The first report produced gives averages since the last reboot.  Additional reports give information on a
delay  The delay between updates in seconds.  If no delay is specified, only one report is  printed  with
the average values since boot.
count  Number of updates.  In absence of count, when delay is defined, default is infinite.
%
vgreduce — reduce a volume group
umePath...]
vgreduce allows you to remove one or more unused physical volumes from a volume group.
-a, --all
Removes all empty physical volumes if none are given on command line.
--removemissing
%
serve  as a pager for text files named as arguments or passed on standard input, and as a general purpose
directory browser.
capabilities do not meet your needs, the target URL can be handed over to a graphical browser with a sin‐
gle command.
%
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-i, --input=MODE
adjust standard input stream buffering
-o, --output=MODE
adjust standard output stream buffering
-e, --error=MODE
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
usermod - modify a user account
usermod [options] LOGIN
The usermod command modifies the system account files to reflect the changes that are specified on the
command line.
The options which apply to the usermod command are:
-a, --append
Add the user to the supplementary group(s). Use only with the -G option.
-c, --comment COMMENT
%
zless - file perusal filter for crt viewing of compressed text
zless [ name ...  ]
Zless is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files one screenful at a time on a
soft-copy terminal.  It is the equivalent of setting the environment variable LESSOPEN to '|gzip -cdfq --
%s',  and  the environment variable LESSMETACHARS to '<space><tab><newline>;*?"()<>[|&^`#\$%=~', and then
running less.  However, enough people seem to think that having the command zless available is  important
to be worth providing it.
BUGS
Zless  does  not work with compressed data that is piped to it via standard input; it requires that input
%
timeout - run a command with a time limit
timeout [OPTION]
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
--preserve-status
command times out
%
openssl - OpenSSL command line tool
openssl command [ command_opts ] [ command_args ]
openssl [ list-standard-commands | list-message-digest-commands | list-cipher-commands | list-cipher-
algorithms | list-message-digest-algorithms | list-public-key-algorithms]
openssl no-XXX [ arbitrary options ]
The openssl program is a command line tool for using the various cryptography functions of OpenSSL's
crypto library from the shell.  It can be used for
%
dnssec-checkds - DNSSEC delegation consistency checking tool
dnssec-checkds [-l domain] [-f file] [-d dig path] [-D dsfromkey path] {zone}
dnssec-dsfromkey [-l domain] [-f file] [-d dig path] [-D dsfromkey path] {zone}
dnssec-checkds verifies the correctness of Delegation Signer (DS) or DNSSEC Lookaside Validation (DLV)
resource records for keys in a specified zone.
-f file
If a file is specified, then the zone is read from that file to find the DNSKEY records. If not, then
the DNSKEY records for the zone are looked up in the DNS.
-l domain
%
column - columnate lists
column [options] [file...]
The  column utility formats its input into multiple columns.  By default, rows are filled before columns.
Input is taken from file, or otherwise from standard input.  Empty lines are ignored.
-c, --columns width
Output is formatted to a width specified as number of characters.
-o, --output-separator string
Specify the columns delimiter for table output (default is two spaces).
-s, --separator separators
%
cal - display a calendar
cal [options] [[[day] month] year]
cal displays a simple calendar.  If no arguments are specified, the current month is displayed.
Display three months spanning the date.
-n , --months number
Display number of months, starting from the month containing the date.
%
echo - display a line of text
echo [SHORT-OPTION]... [STRING]...
echo LONG-OPTION
Echo the STRING(s) to standard output.
-n     do not output the trailing newline
-e     enable interpretation of backslash escapes
-E     disable interpretation of backslash escapes (default)
--help display this help and exit
%
chmod - change file mode bits
chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE...
chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE...
chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
according to mode, which can be either a symbolic representation of changes to make, or an  octal  number
representing the bit pattern for the new mode bits.
The  format  of a symbolic mode is [ugoa...][[-+=][perms...]...], where perms is either zero or more let‐
ters from the set rwxXst, or a single letter from the set ugo.  Multiple symbolic  modes  can  be  given,
separated by commas.
A  combination of the letters ugoa controls which users' access to the file will be changed: the user who
%
sshd — OpenSSH SSH daemon
[-g login_grace_time] [-h host_key_file] [-k key_gen_time] [-o option] [-p port] [-u len]
and provide secure encrypted communications between two untrusted hosts over an insecure network.
sshd listens for connections from clients.  It is normally started at boot from /etc/rc.  It forks a new
daemon for each incoming connection.  The forked daemons handle key exchange, encryption, authentication,
command execution, and data exchange.
mand-line options override values specified in the configuration file.  sshd rereads its configuration file
when it receives a hangup signal, SIGHUP, by executing itself with the name and options it was started
%
sort - sort lines of text files
sort [OPTION]... [FILE]...
sort [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
Write sorted concatenation of all FILE(s) to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.  Ordering options:
-b, --ignore-leading-blanks
ignore leading blanks
-d, --dictionary-order
%
mdmon - monitor MD external metadata arrays
mdmon [--all] [--takeover] [--foreground] CONTAINER
user space handles all updates to the metadata.  The kernel's responsibility is to notify user space when
a  "metadata  event" occurs, like disk failures and clean-to-dirty transitions.  The kernel, in important
Metadata updates:
To service metadata update requests a daemon, mdmon, is introduced.  Mdmon is  tasked  with  polling  the
sysfs  namespace  looking for changes in array_state, sync_action, and per disk state attributes.  When a
change is detected it calls a per metadata type handler to make modifications to the metadata.  The  fol‐
lowing actions are taken:
%
somewhat smaller than the fully-blown gpg and uses a different (and simpler) way to check that the public
keys  used  to  make the signature are valid. There are no configuration files and only a few options are
implemented.
for expired or revoked keys.
By  default  a  keyring named ‘trustedkeys.kbx’ is used; if that does not exist a keyring named ‘trusted‐
%
grub-ofpathname - find OpenBOOT path for a device
grub-ofpathname DEVICE
The  full  documentation  for  grub-ofpathname  is maintained as a Texinfo manual.  If the info and grub-
ofpathname programs are properly installed at your site, the command
info grub-ofpathname
should give you access to the complete manual.
%
firewall-applet - firewalld applet
firewall-applet is a tray applet for firewalld.
firewall-applet does not support any special options.
The following options are supported:
-h, --help
Prints a short help text and exists.
QSETTINGS
%
mail -h | --help
mail [-BDdEFintv~] [-A account] [-a attachment] [-b bcc-addr] [-c cc-addr] [-q quote-file] [-r from-addr]
[-S variable[=value]] [-s subject] [-X cmd] [-.] to-addr ... [-- mta-option ...]
mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-X cmd] -f [file]
[-- mta-option ...]
mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-u user] [-X cmd]
[-- mta-option ...]
%
nohup - run a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty
nohup OPTION
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
If  standard input is a terminal, redirect it from an unreadable file.  If standard output is a terminal,
append output to 'nohup.out' if possible, '$HOME/nohup.out' otherwise.  If standard error is a  terminal,
%
mkswap - set up a Linux swap area
mkswap [options] device [size]
mkswap sets up a Linux swap area on a device or in a file.
The  device  argument will usually be a disk partition (something like /dev/sdb7) but can also be a file.
The Linux kernel does not look at partition IDs, but many installation scripts will  assume  that  parti‐
type.  Be careful not to kill your Solaris partitions.)
The size parameter is superfluous but retained for backwards compatibility.  (It  specifies  the  desired
%
systemd-delta - Find overridden configuration files
files. Files in /etc have highest priority, files in /run have the second highest priority, ..., files in
/lib have lowest priority. Files in a directory with higher priority override files with the same name in
directories of lower priority. In addition, certain configuration files can have ".d" directories which
contain "drop-in" files with configuration snippets which augment the main configuration file. "Drop-in"
files can be overridden in the same way by placing files with the same name in a directory of higher
containing directory, which corresponds to the name of the main configuration file, must match). For a
The command line argument will be split into a prefix and a suffix. Either is optional. The prefix must
%
xgettext - extract gettext strings from source
xgettext [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
Extract translatable strings from given input files.
Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for short options too.  Similarly for optional argu‐
ments.
Input file location:
INPUTFILE ...
input files
-f, --files-from=FILE
get list of input files from FILE
%
era_check - validate era metadata on device or file
era_check [options] {device|file}
era_check checks era metadata created by the device-mapper era target on a device or file.
-q, --quiet
Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
%
xfs_db - debug an XFS filesystem
xfs_db [ -c cmd ] ... [ -i|r|x|F ] [ -f ] [ -l logdev ] [ -p progname ] device
xfs_db -V
xfs_db  is  used  to examine an XFS filesystem. Under rare circumstances it can also be used to modify an
run xfs_db.
-f     Specifies that the filesystem image to be processed is stored in a regular file at device (see the
%
chown - change file owner and group
chown [OPTION]... [OWNER][:[GROUP]] FILE...
chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
each given file.  If only an owner (a user name or numeric user ID) is given, that user is made the owner
of each given file, and the files' group is not changed.  If the owner is followed by a colon and a group
name (or numeric group ID), with no spaces between them, the group ownership of the files is  changed  as
well.   If  a colon but no group name follows the user name, that user is made the owner of the files and
the group of the files is changed to that user's login group.  If the colon and group are given, but  the
as chgrp.  If only a colon is given, or if the entire operand is empty, neither the owner nor  the  group
is changed.
%
blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
size ]
by device.
%
kinit - obtain and cache Kerberos ticket-granting ticket
kinit [-V] [-l lifetime] [-s start_time] [-r renewable_life] [-p | -P] [-f | -F] [-a] [-A] [-C] [-E] [-v]
[-R] [-k [-t keytab_file]] [-c cache_name] [-n] [-S service_name] [-I input_ccache] [-T armor_ccache] [-X
attribute[=value]] [principal]
kinit obtains and caches an initial ticket-granting ticket for principal.
-V     display verbose output.
-l lifetime
(duration string.)  Requests a ticket with the lifetime lifetime.
%
tset, reset - terminal initialization
tset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
reset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
mination is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
ting TERM according to the type passed to it by /etc/inittab.)
%
vgimportclone — import and rename duplicated volume group (e.g. a hardware snapshot)
vgimportclone  is used to import a duplicated VG (e.g. hardware snapshot).  Duplicate VG(s) and PV(s) are
not able to be used until they are made to coexist  with  the  origin  VG(s)  and  PV(s).   vgimportclone
renames the VG associated with the specified PV(s) and changes the associated VG and PV UUIDs.
By  default  the  snapshot  VG will be renamed to the original name plus a numeric suffix to avoid
base  VG  name  that is used for all VG renames.  If a VG already exists with the specified name a
%
newuidmap - set the uid mapping of a user namespace
newuidmap pid uid loweruid count [uid loweruid count [ ... ]]
The newuidmap sets /proc/[pid]/uid_map based on its command line arguments and the uids allowed in
uid
Beginning of the range of UIDs inside the user namespace.
loweruid
Beginning of the range of UIDs outside the user namespace.
%
getconf — get configuration values
getconf [−v specification] system_var
getconf [−v specification] path_var pathname
In the first synopsis form, the getconf utility shall write to the standard output the value of the vari‐
able specified by the system_var operand.
In the second synopsis form, the getconf utility shall write to the standard  output  the  value  of  the
%
setvtrgb - set the virtual terminal RGB colors
setvtrgb vga|FILE|-
The  setvtrgb command takes a single argument, either the string vga , or a path to a file containing the
red, green, and blue colors to be used by the Linux virtual terminals.
RED, GREEN, and BLUE.
To seed a valid FILE :
cat /sys/module/vt/parameters/default_{red,grn,blu} > FILE
And then edit the values in FILE
%
nstat, rtacct - network statistics tools.
nstat and rtacct are simple tools to monitor kernel snmp counters and network interface statistics.
-h, --help Print help
-V, --version
Print version
-z, --zero
Dump zero counters too. By default they are not shown.
%
pwck - verify integrity of password files
pwck [options] [passwd [ shadow ]]
The pwck command verifies the integrity of the users and authentication information. It checks that all
entries in /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow have the proper format and contain valid data. The user is
prompted to delete entries that are improperly formatted or which have other uncorrectable errors.
Checks are made to verify that each entry has:
·   the correct number of fields
·   a unique and valid user name
·   a valid user and group identifier
%
pic - compile pictures for troff or TeX
pic [ -nvCSU ] [ filename ... ]
pic -t [ -cvzCSU ] [ filename ... ]
pic compiles descriptions of pictures embedded within troff or TeX input files  into  commands  that  are
understood  by  TeX  or  troff.   Each picture starts with a line beginning with .PS and ends with a line
beginning with .PE.  Anything outside of .PS and .PE is passed through without change.
It is the user's responsibility to provide appropriate definitions of the PS and  PE  macros.   When  the
macro package being used does not supply such definitions (for example, old versions of -ms), appropriate
definitions can be obtained with -mpic: These will center each picture.
%
salt
The salt provided to the hash algorithm.
algorithm
argument.
%
rlogin - Remote login
rlogin [OPTION...] HOST
Starts a terminal session on a remote host.
-6, --ipv6
use only IPv6
allows an eight-bit input data path at all times
%
ssh-copy-id — use locally available keys to authorise logins on a remote machine
ssh-copy-id [-f] [-n] [-i [identity_file]] [-p port] [-o ssh_option] [user@]hostname
ssh-copy-id -h | -?
so password authentication should be enabled, unless you've done some clever use of multiple identities).
It assembles a list of one or more fingerprints (as described below) and tries to log in with each key, to
you being repeatedly prompted for pass-phrases).  It then assembles a list of those that failed to log in,
and using ssh, enables logins with those keys on the remote server.  By default it adds the keys by append‐
ing them to the remote user's ~/.ssh/authorized_keys (creating the file, and directory, if necessary).  It
is also capable of detecting if the remote system is a NetScreen, and using its ‘set ssh pka-dsa key ...’
command instead.
%
mktemp - create a temporary file or directory
mktemp [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE]
secutive 'X's in last component.  If TEMPLATE is not  specified,  use  tmp.XXXXXXXXXX,  and  --tmpdir  is
implied.  Files are created u+rw, and directories u+rwx, minus umask restrictions.
-d, --directory
create a directory, not a file
-u, --dry-run
do not create anything; merely print a name (unsafe)
-q, --quiet
%
tabs - set tabs on a terminal
tabs [options]] [tabstop-list]
set_tab capabilities.  If either is absent, tabs is unable to clear/set tab-stops.  The  terminal  should
be configured to use hard tabs, e.g.,
stty tab0
General Options
-Tname
Tell tabs which terminal type to use.  If this option is not given, tabs will use the $TERM environ‐
ment variable.  If that is not set, it will use the ansi+tabs entry.
%
libtool [OPTION]... [MODE-ARG]...
Provide generalized library-building support services.
--config
show all configuration variables
--debug
enable verbose shell tracing
-n, --dry-run
display commands without modifying any files
%
The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
gram instantly.
All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
%
cache_check - repair cache metadata on device or file
cache_check [options] {device|file}
cache_check checks cache  metadata created by the device-mapper cache target on a device or file.
-q, --quiet
Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
-h, --help
Print help and exit.
%
xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
xz [option...]  [file...]
unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
%
ssh-add — adds private key identities to the authentication agent
ssh-add [-cDdkLlXx] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-t life] [file ...]
After loading a private key, ssh-add will try to load corresponding certificate information from the file‐
name obtained by appending -cert.pub to the name of the private key file.  Alternative file names can be
given on the command line.
If any file requires a passphrase, ssh-add asks for the passphrase from the user.  The passphrase is read
from the user's tty.  ssh-add retries the last passphrase if multiple identity files are given.
%
ktutil - Kerberos keytab file maintenance utility
ktutil
The  ktutil  command  invokes  a  command  interface from which an administrator can read, write, or edit
list
list
Displays the current keylist.
Alias: l
%
filefrag - report on file fragmentation
filefrag [ -bblocksize ] [ -BeksvxX ] [ files...  ]
filefrag  reports  on  how badly fragmented a particular file might be.  It makes allowances for indirect
The filefrag program initially attempts to get the extent information using FIEMAP ioctl  which  is  more
efficient and faster.  If FIEMAP is not supported then filefrag will fall back to using FIBMAP.
-B     Force the use of the older FIBMAP ioctl instead of the FIEMAP ioctl for testing purposes.
-bblocksize
Use  blocksize  in  bytes  for output instead of the filesystem blocksize.  For compatibility with
%
prtstat - print statistics of a process
prtstat [-r|--raw] pid
prtstat -V|--version
file.
-r, --raw
Print the information in raw format.
-V, --version
Show the version information for prtstat.
%
kill - terminate a process
kill [-signal|-s signal|-p] [-q value] [-a] [--] pid|name...
kill -l [number] | -L
The  command  kill sends the specified signal to the specified processes or process groups.  If no signal
caught.
Most modern shells have a builtin kill function, with a usage rather  similar  to  that  of  the  command
described  here.  The --all, --pid, and --queue options, and the possibility to specify processes by com‐
mand name, are local extensions.
If signal is 0, then no actual signal is sent, but error checking is still performed.
%
Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
variable LATEX=tex.
General options:
-b, --batch
%
lvs — report information about logical volumes
[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help] [-H|--history] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--logonly]
{basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--separator Separator] [--segments] [--unbuffered] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]
lvs produces formatted output about logical volumes.
%
pkaction - Get details about a registered action
pkaction [--version] [--help]
pkaction [--verbose]
pkaction --action-id action [--verbose]
pkaction is used to obtain information about registered polkit actions. If called without --action-id
then all actions are displayed. Otherwise the action action. If called without the --verbose option only
the name of the action is shown. Otherwise details about the actions are shown.
RETURN VALUE
On success pkaction returns 0. Otherwise a non-zero value is returned and a diagnostic message is printed
on standard error.
%
printf - format and print data
printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]...
printf OPTION
Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT, or execute according to OPTION:
--help display this help and exit
--version
output version information and exit
FORMAT controls the output as in C printf.  Interpreted sequences are:
\"     double quote
%
gpm - a cut and paste utility and mouse server for virtual consoles
gpm [ options ]
intended  as  a  replacement  for  "selection"  as a cut-and-paste mechanism; it also provides additional
facilities. The "selection" package offered the first cut-and-paste implementation for  Linux  using  two
mouse  buttons, and the cut buffer is still called "selection buffer" or just "selection" throughout this
document.  The information below is extracted from the texinfo file, which is  the  preferred  source  of
information.
is meant to describe the command-line options for gpm, while its internals are outlined in the next  sec‐
tion.
%
ldconfig - configure dynamic linker run-time bindings
/sbin/ldconfig [ -nNvXV ] [ -f conf ] [ -C cache ] [ -r root ] directory ...
/sbin/ldconfig -l [ -v ] library ...
/sbin/ldconfig -p
ldconfig  creates the necessary links and cache to the most recent shared libraries found in the directo‐
ries specified on the command line, in the file /etc/ld.so.conf, and in the trusted directories, /lib and
The cache is used by the run-time linker, ld.so or ld-linux.so.  ldconfig checks the header and filenames
of the libraries it encounters when determining which versions should have their links updated.
%
gdbm_dump - dump a GDBM database to a file
gdbm_dump [-H FMT] [--format=FMT] DB_FILE [FILE]
gdbm_dump [-Vh] [--help] [--usage] [--version]
dump file is supplied by the second argument (FILE).  If not specified, the output goes to  the  standard
error.
of the DB_FILE.
-H, --format=FMT
%
chgpasswd - update group passwords in batch mode
chgpasswd [options]
The chgpasswd command reads a list of group name and password pairs from standard input and uses this
information to update a set of existing groups. Each line is of the format:
group_name:password
By default the supplied password must be in clear-text, and is encrypted by chgpasswd.
The default encryption algorithm can be defined for the system with the ENCRYPT_METHOD variable of
/etc/login.defs, and can be overwritten with the -e, -m, or -c options.
%
dbus-send - Send a message to a message bus
[--reply-timeout=MSEC] [--type=TYPE] OBJECT_PATH INTERFACE.MEMBER [CONTENTS...]
The dbus-send command is used to send a message to a D-Bus message bus. See
http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
There are two well-known message buses: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as the
"messagebus" service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs in). The
--system and --session options direct dbus-send to send messages to the system or session buses
respectively. If neither is specified, dbus-send sends to the session bus.
Nearly all uses of dbus-send must provide the --dest argument which is the name of a connection on the
bus to send the message to. If --dest is omitted, no destination is set.
%
named-checkzone, named-compilezone - zone file validity checking or converting tool
named-checkzone [-d] [-h] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename] [-i mode]
[-k mode] [-m mode] [-M mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-o filename] [-r mode]
[-s style] [-S mode] [-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {zonename}
{filename}
named-compilezone [-d] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-C mode] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename]
[-i mode] [-k mode] [-m mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-r mode] [-s style]
[-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {-o filename} {zonename}
{filename}
named-checkzone checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It performs the same checks as named does
into a name server.
%
dbus-monitor - debug probe to print message bus messages
dbus-monitor [--system | --session | --address ADDRESS] [--profile | --monitor | --pcap | --binary]
[watch expressions]
The dbus-monitor command is used to monitor messages going through a D-Bus message bus. See
http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
There are two well-known message buses: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as the
"messagebus" service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs in). The
--system and --session options direct dbus-monitor to monitor the system or session buses respectively.
If neither is specified, dbus-monitor monitors the session bus.
dbus-monitor has two different text output modes: the 'classic'-style monitoring mode, and profiling
mode. The profiling format is a compact format with a single line per message and microsecond-resolution
%
rlogind - Remote login server
rlogind [OPTION...]
Remote login server
-6, --ipv6
only IPv6 in daemon mode
-a, --verify-hostname
ask hostname for verification
%
ldns-signzone - sign a zonefile with DNSSEC data
ldns-signzone  is used to generate a DNSSEC signed zone. When run it will create a new zonefile that con‐
Keys must be specified by their base name (i.e. without .private). If the DNSKEY that belongs to the  key
in  the  .private file is not present in the zone, it will be read from the file <base name>.key. If that
file does not exist, the DNSKEY value will be generated from the private key.
Multiple keys can be specified, Key Signing Keys are used as such when they are either already present in
the zone, or specified in a .key file, and have the KSK bit set.
%
grub-file - check file type
Check if FILE is of specified type.
%
lesskey - specify key bindings for less
lesskey [-o output] [--] [input]
lesskey [--output=output] [--] [input]
lesskey -V
lesskey --version
Lesskey is used to specify a set of key bindings to be used by less.  The input file is a text file which
describes the key bindings.  If the input file is "-", standard input is read.  If no input file is spec‐
ified, a standard filename is used as the name of the input file, which depends on the system being used:
$HOME/lesskey.ini  is used, or $INIT/lesskey.ini if $HOME is undefined.  The output file is a binary file
which is used by less.  If no output file is specified, and the environment variable LESSKEY is set,  the
value  of  LESSKEY is used as the name of the output file.  Otherwise, a standard filename is used as the
name of the output file, which depends on the system being used: On Unix and OS-9 systems, $HOME/.less is
%
pg - browse pagewise through text files
pg [-amount] [-p prompt] [-cefnrs] [+line] [+/pattern/] [file...]
pg  displays  a  text  file on a CRT one screenful at once.  After each page, a prompt is displayed.  The
If no filename is given on the command line, pg reads from standard input.  If standard output is  not  a
If  input comes from a pipe, pg stores the data in a buffer file while reading, to make navigation possi‐
ble.
pg accepts the following options:
%
debugreiserfs - The debugging tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
device
debugreiserfs  sometimes  helps to solve problems with reiserfs filesystems.  When run without options it
prints the super block of the ReiserFS filesystem found on the device.
device is the special file corresponding to the device (e.g  /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk  partition  or
/dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
-j device
prints  the  contents of the journal. The option -p allows it to pack the journal with other meta‐
%
unexpand - convert spaces to tabs
unexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Convert blanks in each FILE to tabs, writing to standard output.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --all
convert all blanks, instead of just initial blanks
--first-only
convert only leading sequences of blanks (overrides -a)
%
loadkeys - load keyboard translation tables
loadkeys  [ -b --bkeymap ] [ -c --clearcompose ] [ -C '<FILE>' | --console=<FILE> ] [ -d --default ] [ -h
--help ] [ -m --mktable ] [ -q --quiet ] [ -s --clearstrings ] [ -u --unicode ] [ -v --verbose ] [  file‐
name...  ]
The  program  loadkeys reads the file or files specified by filename....  Its main purpose is to load the
kernel keymap for the console.  You can specify console device by the -C (or --console ) option.
RESET TO DEFAULT
If the -d (or --default  )  option  is  given,  loadkeys  loads  a  default  keymap,  probably  the  file
defkeymap.map  either  in /usr/share/kbd/keymaps or in /usr/src/linux/drivers/char.  (Probably the former
times,  with  a strange keymap loaded (with the minus on some obscure unknown modifier combination) it is
easier to type `loadkeys defkeymap'.
%
dbus-uuidgen - Utility to generate UUIDs
The dbus-uuidgen command generates or reads a universally unique ID.
spec. Many systems have a separate command for that (often called "uuidgen").
See http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about D-Bus.
The primary usage of dbus-uuidgen is to run in the post-install script of a D-Bus package like this:
dbus-uuidgen --ensure
%
ldns-resolver - tries to create a resolver from a resolv.conf file.
ldns-resolver file
library for robusteness with input data.
ldns-resolver  takes  a  filename  of  the  resolv.conf  file  as  input.   For   example   ldns-resolver
/etc/resolv.conf will show if the file can be parsed successfully.
Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
REPORTING BUGS
%
vpddecode - VPD structure decoder
vpddecode prints the "vital product data" information that can be found in almost all IBM and Lenovo com‐
puters. Available items are:
· BIOS Build ID
· Box Serial Number
· Motherboard Serial Number
· Machine Type/Model
%
git-upload-archive - Send archive back to git-archive
git upload-archive <directory>
Invoked by git archive --remote and sends a generated archive to the other end over the Git protocol.
archive side, and the program pair is meant to be used to get an archive from a remote repository.
SECURITY
pruned, git-upload-archive avoids serving archives for commits and trees that are not reachable from the
repository’s refs. However, because calculating object reachability is computationally expensive,
git-upload-archive implements a stricter but easier-to-check set of rules:
%
cmp - compare two files byte by byte
Compare two files byte by byte.
default).
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --print-bytes
print differing bytes
-i, --ignore-initial=SKIP
%
plipconfig - fine tune PLIP device parameters
plipconfig interface [nibble NN] [trigger NN]
plipconfig [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
Plipconfig is used to (hopefully) improve PLIP performance by changing the default timing parameters used
by the PLIP protocol. Results are dependent on the parallel port hardware, cable, and the  CPU  speed  of
each machine on each end of the PLIP link.
If  the  single  interface argument is given, plipconfig displays the status of the given interface only.
Otherwise, it will try to set the options.
nibble NN
%
uuidd - UUID generation daemon
uuidd [options]
The  uuidd  daemon  is used by the UUID library to generate universally unique identifiers (UUIDs), espe‐
cially time-based UUIDs, in a secure and guaranteed-unique fashion, even in the face of large numbers  of
threads running on different CPUs trying to grab UUIDs.
-d, --debug
-F, --no-fork
Do not daemonize using a double-fork.
%
dbus-update-activation-environment - update environment used for D-Bus session services
dbus-update-activation-environment [--systemd] [--verbose] --all | VAR... | VAR=VAL...
dbus-update-activation-environment updates the list of environment variables used by dbus-daemon
--session when it activates session services without using systemd.
With the --systemd option, if an instance of systemd --user is available on D-Bus, it also updates the
list of environment variables used by systemd --user when it activates user services, including D-Bus
a service is started. For instance, it is not useful to add DBUS_SESSION_BUS_ADDRESS to dbus-daemon's
activation environment, although it might still be useful to add it to systemd's activation environment.
%
shred - overwrite a file to hide its contents, and optionally delete it
shred [OPTION]... FILE...
Overwrite  the  specified FILE(s) repeatedly, in order to make it harder for even very expensive hardware
probing to recover the data.
If FILE is -, shred standard output.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-f, --force
change permissions to allow writing if necessary
-n, --iterations=N
%
cryptsetup - manage plain dm-crypt and LUKS encrypted volumes
cryptsetup <options> <action> <action args>
cryptsetup is used to conveniently setup dm-crypt managed device-mapper mappings. These include plain dm-
crypt volumes and LUKS volumes. The difference is that LUKS uses a metadata header and  can  hence  offer
more features than plain dm-crypt. On the other hand, the header is visible and vulnerable to damage.
In  addition,  cryptsetup  provides limited support for the use of historic loopaes volumes and for True‐
Crypt compatible volumes.
PLAIN DM-CRYPT OR LUKS?
Unless you understand the cryptographic background well, use LUKS.  With plain dm-crypt there are a  num‐
ber  of  possible  user  errors  that massively decrease security. While LUKS cannot fix them all, it can
lessen the impact for many of them.
%
getkeycodes - print kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table
getkeycodes
The getkeycodes command prints the kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table.
None.
%
locale - get locale-specific information
locale [option]
locale [option] -a
locale [option] -m
locale [option] name...
The locale command displays information about the current locale, or all locales, on standard output.
When invoked without arguments, locale displays the current locale settings for each locale category (see
Values for variables set in the environment are printed without double quotes, implied values are printed
with double quotes.
If either the -a or the -m option (or one of their long-format equivalents) is specified, the behavior is
%
runuser - run a command with substitute user and group ID
runuser [options] -u user command [argument...]
runuser [options] [-] [user [argument...]]
runuser  allows  to  run commands with a substitute user and group ID.  If the option -u is not given, it
falls back to su-compatible semantics and a shell is  executed.   The  difference  between  the  commands
only) and it uses a different PAM configuration.  The command runuser does not have to be installed  with
suid permissions.
When called without arguments, runuser defaults to running an interactive shell as root.
For  backward  compatibility,  runuser  defaults  to not change the current directory and to only set the
%
groffer - display groff files and man pages on X and tty
groffer [--] [filespec ....]
groffer [mode-option ....]  [groff-options ....]  [man-options ....]  [X-options ....]  [--] [‐
filespec ....]
groffer -h | --help
groffer -v | --version
the groff language, see groff(7), or other roff languages, see roff(7), that are compatible to the origi‐
nal troff language.  It finds and runs all necessary groff preprocessors, such as chem.
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
pwdx - report current working directory of a process
pwdx [options] pid [...]
-V, --version
Output version information and exit.
-h, --help
Output help screen and exit.
STANDARDS
No standards apply, but pwdx looks an awful lot like a SunOS command.
%
newgidmap - set the gid mapping of a user namespace
newgidmap pid gid lowergid count [gid lowergid count [ ... ]]
The newgidmap sets /proc/[pid]/gid_map based on its command line arguments and the gids allowed in
gid
Beginning of the range of GIDs inside the user namespace.
lowergid
Beginning of the range of GIDs outside the user namespace.
%
ntpq - standard NTP query program
ntpq [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ host ...]
The  ntpq  utility  program  is used to query NTP servers which implement the standard NTP mode 6 control
read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and  pretty-printed  output  options  being
available.  The ntpq utility can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending mul‐
tiple queries to the server.  If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is
executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as com‐
mand line arguments, or on localhost by default.  If no request options are given, ntpq will  attempt  to
read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given
%
ps - report a snapshot of the current processes.
ps [options]
ps displays information about a selection of the active processes.  If you want a repetitive update of
options, which are functionally identical, due to the many standards and ps implementations that this ps
%
drill - get (debug) information out of DNS(SEC)
drill  is a tool to designed to get all sorts of information out of the DNS. It is specificly designed to
be used with DNSSEC.
The name drill is a pun on dig. With drill you should be able get even more information than with dig.
If no arguments are  given  class  defaults  to  'IN'  and  type  to  'A'.  The  server(s)  specified  in
/etc/resolv.conf are used to query against.
name Ask for this name.
@server Send to query to this server. If not specified use the nameservers from /etc/resolv.conf.
%
kbdrate - reset the keyboard repeat rate and delay time
kbdrate [ -s ] [ -r rate ] [ -d delay ]
kbdrate  is used to change the keyboard repeat rate and delay time.  The delay is the amount of time that
a key must be depressed before it will start to repeat.
-s     Silent.  No messages are printed.
-r rate
%
grpck - verify integrity of group files
grpck [options] [group [ shadow ]]
The grpck command verifies the integrity of the groups information. It checks that all entries in
/etc/group and /etc/gshadow have the proper format and contain valid data. The user is prompted to delete
entries that are improperly formatted or which have other uncorrectable errors.
Checks are made to verify that each entry has:
·   the correct number of fields
·   a unique and valid group name
·   a valid group identifier (/etc/group only)
%
tac - concatenate and print files in reverse
tac [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Write each FILE to standard output, last line first.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-b, --before
attach the separator before instead of after
-r, --regex
interpret the separator as a regular expression
%
gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
%
vgck — check volume group metadata
vgck checks LVM metadata for each named volume group for consistency.
%
lvextend — extend the size of a logical volume
[-h|-?|--help] [-f|--force] [-i|--stripes Stripes [-I|--stripesize  StripeSize]]  {-l|--extents  [+]Logi‐
calExtentsNumber[%{VG|LV|PVS|FREE|ORIGIN}] | -L|--size [+]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]} [-n|--nof‐
sck] [--noudevsync] [-r|--resizefs] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--use-policies] [-t|--test] [-v|--ver‐
bose] LogicalVolumePath [PhysicalVolumePath[:PE[-PE]]...]
lvextend  allows  you to extend the size of a logical volume.  Extension of snapshot logical volumes (see
%
grub-bios-setup - set up a device to boot using GRUB
grub-bios-setup [OPTION...] DEVICE
Set up images to boot from DEVICE.
You should not normally run this program directly.  Use grub-install instead.
-a, --allow-floppy
make the drive also bootable as floppy (default for fdX devices). May break on some BIOSes.
-b, --boot-image=FILE
use FILE as the boot image [default=boot.img]
-c, --core-image=FILE
%
catman - create or update the pre-formatted manual pages
catman [-d?V] [-M path] [-C file] [section] ...
catman  is  used to create an up to date set of pre-formatted manual pages known as cat pages.  Cat pages
are generally much faster to display than the original manual pages, but  require  extra  storage  space.
The  decision to support cat pages is that of the local administrator, who must provide suitable directo‐
ries to contain them.
The options available to catman are the manual page hierarchies and sections to pre-format.  The  default
hierarchies  are  those specified as system hierarchies in the man-db configuration file, and the default
sections are either the colon-delimited contents of the environment variable $MANSECT or the standard set
compiled  into man if $MANSECT is undefined.  Supplying catman with a set of whitespace-delimited section
names will override both of the above.
%
xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
served.
The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
%
sprof - read and display shared object profiling data
sprof [option]... shared-object-path [profile-data-path]
The  sprof  command  displays a profiling summary for the shared object (shared library) specified as its
first command-line argument.  The profiling summary is created using previously generated profiling  data
in  the  (optional)  second command-line argument.  If the profiling data pathname is omitted, then sprof
will attempt to deduce it using the soname of the shared object, looking for a file with the  name  <son‐
ame>.profile in the current directory.
The following command-line options specify the profile output to be produced:
-c, --call-pairs
Print  a  list of pairs of call paths for the interfaces exported by the shared object, along with
%
external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
indicates that further checking is required.
-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
%
dnssec-coverage - checks future DNSKEY coverage for a zone
dnssec-coverage [-K directory] [-l length] [-f file] [-d DNSKEY TTL] [-m max TTL] [-r interval]
[-c compilezone path] [-k] [-z] [zone...]
dnssec-coverage verifies that the DNSSEC keys for a given zone or a set of zones have timing metadata set
properly to ensure no future lapses in DNSSEC coverage.
If zone is specified, then keys found in the key repository matching that zone are scanned, and an
ordered list is generated of the events scheduled for that key (i.e., publication, activation,
inactivation, deletion). The list of events is walked in order of occurrence. Warnings are generated if
any event is scheduled which could cause the zone to enter a state in which validation failures might
occur: for example, if the number of published or active keys for a given algorithm drops to zero, or if
a key is deleted from the zone too soon after a new key is rolled, and cached data signed by the prior
key has not had time to expire from resolver caches.
%
mkhomedir_helper {user} [umask [ path-to-skel ]]
mkhomedir_helper is a helper program for the pam_mkhomedir module that creates home directories and
populates them with contents of the specified skel directory.
The helper is separated from the module to not require direct access from login SELinux domains to the
contents of user home directories. The SELinux domain transition happens when the module is executing the
mkhomedir_helper.
The helper never touches home directories if they already exist.
%
patch - apply a diff file to an original
patch [options] [originalfile [patchfile]]
but usually just
patch -pnum <patchfile
patch  takes  a  patch  file  patchfile  containing a difference listing produced by the diff program and
applies those differences to one or more  original  files,  producing  patched  versions.   Normally  the
patched  versions are put in place of the originals.  Backups can be made; see the -b or --backup option.
The names of the files to be patched are usually taken from the patch file, but if there's just one  file
to be patched it can be specified on the command line as originalfile.
Upon  startup, patch attempts to determine the type of the diff listing, unless overruled by a -c (--con‐
%
vgremove — remove a volume group
vgremove allows you to remove one or more volume groups.  If one or more physical volumes in  the  volume
group are lost, consider vgreduce --removemissing to make the volume group metadata consistent again.
If  there  are logical volumes that exist in the volume group, a prompt will be given to confirm removal.
You can override the prompt with -f.
-f, --force
%
afmtodit - create font files for use with groff -Tps and -Tpdf
afmtodit [ -ckmnsvx ] [ -a n ] [ -d desc_file ] [ -e enc_file ] [ -f internal_name ] [ -i n ]
[ -o out_file ] afm_file map_file font
The whitespace between a command line option and its argument is optional.
afmtodit creates a font file for use with groff, grops, and gropdf.  afmtodit is  written  in  perl;  you
afm_file is the AFM (Adobe Font Metric) file for the font.
map_file  is  a  file that says which groff character names map onto each PostScript character name; this
file should contain a sequence of lines of the form
%
an unmounted file system located on device.  If the filesystem is mounted, it can be used to  expand  the
size of the mounted filesystem, assuming the kernel and the file system supports on-line resizing.  (Mod‐
systems will require the use of file systems with the resize_inode feature enabled.)
The  size  parameter  specifies the requested new size of the filesystem.  If no units are specified, the
units of the size parameter shall be the filesystem blocksize of the filesystem.   Optionally,  the  size
larger  than  the size of the partition.  If size parameter is not specified, it will default to the size
%
systemd-escape - Escape strings for usage in system unit names
to escape and to undo escaping of strings.
The command takes any number of strings on the command line, and will process them individually, one
after another. It will output them separated by spaces to stdout.
By default, this command will escape the strings passed, unless --unescape is passed which results in the
inverse operation being applied. If --mangle is given, a special mode of escaping is applied instead,
which assumes the string is already escaped but will escape everything that appears obviously
non-escaped.
%
gprof - display call graph profile data
gprof [ -[abcDhilLrsTvwxyz] ] [ -[ACeEfFJnNOpPqQZ][name] ]
[ -I dirs ] [ -d[num] ] [ -k from/to ]
[ -m min-count ] [ -R map_file ] [ -t table-length ]
[ --[no-]annotated-source[=name] ]
[ --[no-]exec-counts[=name] ]
[ --[no-]flat-profile[=name] ] [ --[no-]graph[=name] ]
[ --[no-]time=name] [ --all-lines ] [ --brief ]
[ --debug[=level] ] [ --function-ordering ]
[ --file-ordering map_file ] [ --directory-path=dirs ]
[ --display-unused-functions ] [ --file-format=name ]
[ --file-info ] [ --help ] [ --line ] [ --inline-file-names ]
[ --min-count=n ] [ --no-static ] [ --print-path ]
[ --separate-files ] [ --static-call-graph ] [ --sum ]
[ --table-length=len ] [ --traditional ] [ --version ]
%
lvremove — remove a logical volume
[--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select Selection] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [--version] [-f|--force]
lvremove  removes  one  or  more logical volumes.  Confirmation will be requested before deactivating any
active logical volume prior to removal.  Logical volumes cannot be deactivated or removed while they  are
open (e.g. if they contain a mounted filesystem).  Removing an origin logical volume will also remove all
dependent snapshots.
If the logical volume is clustered then it must be deactivated on all nodes in the cluster before it  can
be removed. A single lvchange command issued from one node can do this.
If  the configuration setting metadata/record_lvs_history is enabled and the logical volume being removed
%
blkid - locate/print block device attributes
blkid -L label | -U uuid
blkid [-dghlv] [-c file] [-o format] [-s tag]
blkid -p [-O offset] [-o format] [-S size] [-s tag]
[-n list] [-u list] device ...
blkid -i [-o format] [-s tag] device ...
mine the type of content (e.g. filesystem or swap) that a block device holds,  and  also  the  attributes
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
Generate Makefile.in for configure from Makefile.am.
Operation modes:
--help print this help, then exit
--version
print version number, then exit
-v, --verbose
verbosely list files processed
%
sh — shell, the standard command language interpreter
sh [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
[command_file [argument...]]
sh −c [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
command_string [command_name [argument...]]
sh −s [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
[argument...]
%
dd - convert and copy a file
dd [OPERAND]...
dd OPTION
Copy a file, converting and formatting according to the operands.
bs=BYTES
read and write up to BYTES bytes at a time
cbs=BYTES
convert BYTES bytes at a time
conv=CONVS
convert the file as per the comma separated symbol list
%
gio-querymodules - GIO module cache creation
gio-querymodules {DIRECTORY...}
implemented extension points for each module that has been found. It is used by GIO at runtime to avoid
opening all modules just to find out which extension points they are implementing.
GIO modules are usually installed in the gio/modules subdirectory of libdir.
%
mkfs - build a Linux filesystem
mkfs [options] [-t type] [fs-options] device [size]
mkfs is used to build a Linux filesystem on a device, usually a hard disk partition.  The device argument
tem.  The size argument is the number of blocks to be used for the filesystem.
In  actuality,  mkfs  is  simply  a front-end for the various filesystem builders (mkfs.fstype) available
under Linux.  The filesystem-specific builder is searched for via your  PATH  environment  setting  only.
Please see the filesystem-specific builder manual pages for further details.
%
[ Certificate-usage [ Selector [ Matching-type ] ] ]
ldns-dane -h
ldns-dane -v
In  the  first  form: A TLS connection to name:port is established.  The TLSA resource record(s) for name
are used to authenticate the connection.
In the second form: The TLSA record(s) are read from tlsafile and used to authenticate  the  TLS  service
%
gpm-root - a default handler for gpm, used to draw menus on the root window
gpm-root [ options ]
The  program  gpm-root  is designed to handle Control-Mouse events to draw menus on the background of the
current tty. The actual menus are described by a configuration file in the user's home directory.
screen handling capabilities required by the program.
The program uses the files /dev/vcs* to draw to the console screen.  These are available only from kernel
dump/restore capability.
%
mtrace - interpret the malloc trace log
mtrace [option]... [binary] mtracedata
mtrace is a Perl script used to interpret and provide human readable output of the trace log contained in
mtrace  also  contains  the source file name with line number information for problem locations (assuming
that binary was compiled with debugging information).
--help Print help and exit.
--version
%
lslocks - list local system locks
lslocks [options]
lslocks lists information about all the currently held file locks in a Linux system.
-J, --json
Use JSON output format.
-n, --noheadings
Do not print a header line.
-o, --output list
%
xzmore, lzmore - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
xzmore [file...]
lzmore [file...]
time on a soft-copy terminal.
To use a pager other than the default more, set environment variable PAGER to the  name  of  the  desired
program.  The name lzmore is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
e or q When the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to exit.
s      When  the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to skip the next
file and continue.
%
Prompts  the  user  for  a passphrase and inserts it into the specified keyring.  If no keyring is
does not.
%
hpftodit [ -adqsv ] [ -in ] tfm_file map_file font
It is possible to have whitespace between the -i option and its parameter.
for  the  font;  Intellifont  and  TrueType  TFM  files  are supported, but symbol set TFM files are not.
map_file is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;  this  file  should  consist  of  a
sequence of lines of the form:
where  m  is  a decimal integer giving the MSL number of the character, u is a hexadecimal integer giving
%
dirmngr - CRL and OCSP daemon
dirmngr [options] command [args]
versions it is also used as a server for managing and downloading certificate revocation lists (CRLs) for
invoked internally by gpg, gpgsm, or via the gpg-connect-agent tool.
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that only one command is allowed.
--version
mand.
%
grub-mklayout - generate a GRUB keyboard layout file
by GRUB's keymap command.
Generate GRUB keyboard layout from Linux console one.
-i, --input=FILE
set input filename. Default is STDIN
-o, --output=FILE
set output filename. Default is STDOUT
%
mdig - DNS pipelined lookup utility
[-x addr] [plusopt...]
mdig {-h}
mdig [@server] {global-opt...} {{local-opt...} {query}...}
mdig is a multiple/pipelined query version of dig: instead of waiting for a response after sending each
query, it begins by sending all queries. Responses are displayed in the order in which they are received,
not in the order the corresponding queries were sent.
mdig options are a subset of the dig options, and are divided into "anywhere options" which can occur
anywhere, "global options" which must occur before the query name (or they are ignored with a warning),
%
grub-script-check - check grub.cfg for syntax errors
grub-script-check [OPTION...] [PATH]
Checks GRUB script configuration file for syntax errors.
-v, --verbose
print verbose messages.
-?, --help
give this help list
--usage
give a short usage message
%
captoinfo - convert a termcap description into a terminfo description
captoinfo looks in each given text file for termcap descriptions.  For each one found, an equivalent ter‐
minfo description is written to standard output.  Termcap tc capabilities are translated directly to ter‐
minfo use capabilities.
If no file is given, then the environment variable TERMCAP is used for the filename or entry.  If TERMCAP
is a full pathname to a file, only the terminal whose name is specified in the environment variable  TERM
is  extracted  from  that  file.   If  the  environment  variable  TERMCAP  is  not  set,  then  the file
/usr/share/terminfo is read.
-v   print out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
%
tee - read from standard input and write to standard output and files
tee [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Copy standard input to each FILE, and also to standard output.
-a, --append
append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite
-i, --ignore-interrupts
ignore interrupt signals
-p     diagnose errors writing to non pipes
--output-error[=MODE]
%
netcap - a program to see capabilities
netcap
netcap  is  a  program that prints out a report of process capabilities. If the application is using tcp,
udp, raw, or packet family of sockets AND has any capabilities, it will be in the report. If the  process
has  partial capabilities, it is further examined to see if it has an open-ended bounding set. If this is
found to be true, a '+' symbol is added.
Some directories in the /proc file system are readonly by root. The program will try to access and report
what it can. But if nothing comes out, try changing to the root user and re-run this program.
%
thin_restore - restore thin provisioning metadata file to device or file
thin_restore [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
thin_restore  restores  thin  provisioning metadata created by the respective device-mapper target dumped
to  another  device  or  file.   If  restored to a metadata device , the metadata can be processed by the
device-mapper target.
-q, --quiet
Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
-i, --input {device|file}
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
dbus-launch - Utility to start a message bus from a shell script
dbus-launch [--version] [--help] [--sh-syntax] [--csh-syntax] [--auto-syntax] [--binary-syntax]
[PROGRAM] [ARGS...]
The dbus-launch command is used to start a session bus instance of dbus-daemon from a shell script. It
would normally be called from a user's login scripts. Unlike the daemon itself, dbus-launch exits, so
backticks or the $() construct can be used to read information from dbus-launch.
With no arguments, dbus-launch will launch a session bus instance and print the address and PID of that
instance to standard output.
the appropriate environment variables so the specified program can find the bus, and then execute the
%
telnetd - Telnet server
telnetd [OPTION...]
DARPA telnet protocol server
-D, --debug[=LEVEL]
set debugging level
-E, --exec-login=STRING
set program to be executed instead of /usr/bin/login
-h, --no-hostinfo
do not print host information before login has been completed
%
ionice - set or get process I/O scheduling class and priority
ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -p PID...
ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -P PGID...
ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -u UID...
ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] command [argument...]
-p is given, ionice will query the current I/O scheduling class and priority for that process.
When command is given, ionice will run this command with the given arguments.  If no class is  specified,
As of this writing, a process can be in one of three scheduling classes:
%
tcpdump - dump traffic on a network
tcpdump [ -AbdDefhHIJKlLnNOpqRStuUvxX# ] [ -B buffer_size ]
[ -c count ]
[ -C file_size ] [ -G rotate_seconds ] [ -F file ]
[ -i interface ] [ -j tstamp_type ] [ -m module ] [ -M secret ]
[ --number ] [ -Q in|out|inout ]
[ -r file ] [ -V file ] [ -s snaplen ] [ -T type ] [ -w file ]
[ -W filecount ]
[ -E spi@ipaddr algo:secret,...  ]
[ -y datalinktype ] [ -z postrotate-command ] [ -Z user ]
[ --time-stamp-precision=tstamp_precision ]
[ --immediate-mode ] [ --version ]
[ expression ]
%
lex — generate programs for lexical tasks (DEVELOPMENT)
lex [−t] [−n|−v] [file...]
The  lex  utility shall generate C programs to be used in lexical processing of character input, and that
can be used as an interface to yacc.  The C programs shall be generated from lex source code and  conform
to  the ISO C standard, without depending on any undefined, unspecified, or implementation-defined behav‐
documented  by  the  implementation. Usually, the lex utility shall write the program it generates to the
file lex.yy.c; the state of this file is unspecified if lex exits with a non-zero exit  status.  See  the
%
chgrp - change group ownership
chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE...
chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
Change  the  group  of  each  FILE  to GROUP.  With --reference, change the group of each FILE to that of
RFILE.
-c, --changes
like verbose but report only when a change is made
-f, --silent, --quiet
suppress most error messages
-v, --verbose
%
named-checkzone, named-compilezone - zone file validity checking or converting tool
named-checkzone [-d] [-h] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename] [-i mode]
[-k mode] [-m mode] [-M mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-o filename] [-r mode]
[-s style] [-S mode] [-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {zonename}
{filename}
named-compilezone [-d] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-C mode] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename]
[-i mode] [-k mode] [-m mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-r mode] [-s style]
[-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {-o filename} {zonename}
{filename}
named-checkzone checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It performs the same checks as named does
into a name server.
%
grub-mkfont - make GRUB font files
-a, --force-autohint
force autohint
-b, --bold
convert to bold font
-c, --asce=NUM
set font ascent
%
key.dns_resolver - Upcall for request-key to handle dns_resolver keys
/sbin/key.dns_resolver <key>
/sbin/key.dns_resolver -D [-v] [-v] <keydesc> <calloutinfo>
and AFS) want to perform a hostname lookup and the kernel does not have the key cached.  It is not  ordi‐
narily intended to be called directly.
It  can  be  called in debugging mode to test its functionality by passing a -D flag on the command line.
For this to work, the key description and the callout information must be  supplied.   Verbosity  can  be
increased by supplying one or more -v flags.
ERRORS
All errors will be logged to the syslog.
%
newusers - update and create new users in batch
newusers [options] [file]
The newusers command reads a file (or the standard input by default) and uses this information to update
a set of existing users or to create new users. Each line is in the same format as the standard password
pw_name:pw_passwd:pw_uid:pw_gid:pw_gecos:pw_dir:pw_shell
pw_name
It can be the name of a new user or the name of an existing user (or a user created before by
%
swaplabel - print or change the label or UUID of a swap area
swaplabel [-L label] [-U UUID] device
swaplabel  will  display  or  change  the label or UUID of a swap partition located on device (or regular
file).
If the optional arguments -L and -U are not given, swaplabel will simply display  the  current  swap-area
label and UUID of device.
If  an  optional  argument is present, then swaplabel will change the appropriate value on device.  These
label or UUID on an actively used swap device.
%
find - search for files in a directory hierarchy
find [-H] [-L] [-P] [-D debugopts] [-Olevel] [starting-point...] [expression]
given starting-point by evaluating the given expression from left to right, according  to  the  rules  of
precedence (see section OPERATORS), until the outcome is known (the left hand side is false for and oper‐
ations, true for or), at which point find moves on to the next file name.  If no starting-point is speci‐
fied, `.' is assumed.
If  you  are using find in an environment where security is important (for example if you are using it to
search directories that are writable by other users), you should read the "Security Considerations" chap‐
ter  of the findutils documentation, which is called Finding Files and comes with findutils.   That docu‐
ful source of information.
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
etags, ctags - generate tag file for Emacs, vi
etags [-aCDGIQRVh] [-i file] [-l language]
[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
[--append] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive] [--include=file]
[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--output=tagfile]
[--class-qualify] [--regex=regexp] [--no-regex] [--help] [--version] file ...
ctags [-aCdgIQRVh] [-BtTuvwx] [-l language]
[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
[--append] [--backward-search] [--cxref] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive]
[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--class-qualify]
[--output=tagfile] [--regex=regexp] [--update] [--help] [--version] file ...
%
pcregrep - a grep with Perl-compatible regular expressions.
pcregrep  searches  files  for character patterns, in the same way as other grep commands do, but it uses
the PCRE regular expression library to support patterns that are compatible with the regular  expressions
full description of the syntax and semantics of the regular expressions that PCRE supports.
Patterns, whether supplied on the command line or in a separate file, are given without  delimiters.  For
example:
pcregrep Thursday /etc/motd
%
xzless, lzless - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
xzless [file...]
lzless [file...]
xzless  is a filter that displays text from compressed files to a terminal.  It works on files compressed
The command named lzless is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
ENVIRONMENT
%
pvscan — scan all disks for physical volumes
ingfailure] [-e|--exported] [-n|--novolumegroup] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-s|--short] [-u|--uuid]
pvscan  [-d|--debug]   [-h|--help]   --cache   [-a|--activate   ay]   [-b|--background]   [--reportformat
{basic|json}] [--major major --minor minor | DevicePath | major:minor]...
pvscan scans all supported LVM block devices in the system for physical volumes.
Scanning with lvmetad
Scanning  disks  is  required  to  read LVM metadata and identify LVM PVs.  Once read, lvmetad caches the
%
[--reportformat {basic|json}] [--setphysicalvolumesize size] PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
allocated on it.
--setphysicalvolumesize size
Overrides  the  automatically-detected  size  of  the PV.  Use with care, or prior to reducing the
physical size of the device.
%
ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server
ntptrace [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [host]
ntptrace  is  a  perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow the chain of NTP servers from a
given host back to the primary time source. For ntptrace to work properly, each  of  these  servers  must
If given no arguments, ntptrace starts with localhost. Here is an example of the output from ntptrace:
On  each  line,  the fields are (left to right): the host name, the host stratum, the time offset between
%
findfs - find a filesystem by label or UUID
findfs  will  search the block devices in the system looking for a filesystem or partition with specified
tag. The currently supported tags are:
LABEL=<label>
Specifies filesystem label.
UUID=<uuid>
Specifies filesystem UUID.
PARTUUID=<uuid>
%
kpasswd - change a user's Kerberos password
kpasswd [principal]
The  kpasswd  command  is  used to change a Kerberos principal's password.  kpasswd first prompts for the
current Kerberos password, then prompts the user twice for the new password, and the password is changed.
If the principal is governed by a policy that specifies the length and/or  number  of  character  classes
required  in  the new password, the new password must conform to the policy.  (The five character classes
principal
Change the password for the Kerberos principal principal.  Otherwise, kpasswd uses  the  principal
name  from  an existing ccache if there is one; if not, the principal is derived from the identity
%
pvdisplay - display attributes of a physical volume
ure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]   [--maps]   [--nosuffix]   [--reportformat   {basic|json}]   [-s|--short]
[-S|--select  Selection]  [--units  hsbkmgtHKMGT] [-v[v]|--verbose [--verbose]] [--version] [PhysicalVol‐
umePath...]
[--reportformat   {basic|json}]   [--separator  Separator]  [--unbuffered]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]
[-v[v]|--verbose [--verbose]] [--version] [PhysicalVolumePath...]
pvdisplay allows you to see the attributes of one or more physical volumes  like  size,  physical  extent
size, space used for the volume group descriptor area and so on.
%
nroff - emulate nroff command with groff
nroff [-CchipStUvwW] [-dcs] [-Mdir] [-mname] [-nnum] [-olist] [-rcn] [-Tname] [file ...]
nroff --help
nroff -v | --version
devices accepted by nroff to select the output encoding emitted by grotty, groff's TTY output device.  If
neither  the  GROFF_TYPESETTER  environment  variable nor the -T command line option (which overrides the
environment variable) specifies a (valid) device, nroff checks the current locale  to  select  a  default
output  device.   It first tries the locale program, then the environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and
LANG, and finally the LESSCHARSET environment variable.
The -h and -c options are equivalent to grotty's options -h (using tabs in the output) and -c (using  the
old  output  scheme  instead  of  SGR  escape sequences).  The -d, -C, -i, -M, -m, -n, -o, -r, -w, and -W
%
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary
read in binary mode
-c, --check
--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
%
sudoreplay — replay sudo session logs
sudoreplay [-h] [-d dir] [-f filter] [-m num] [-s num] ID
sudoreplay [-h] [-d dir] -l [search expression]
sudoreplay plays back or lists the output logs created by sudo.  When replaying, sudoreplay can play the
line options.
tern matching the iolog_file option in the sudoers file.  When a command is run via sudo with log_output
also be determined using sudoreplay's list mode.
%
grub-probe - probe device information for GRUB
grub-probe [OPTION...] [OPTION]... [PATH|DEVICE]
Probe device information for a given path (or device, if the -d option is given).
-0     separate items in output using ASCII NUL characters
-d, --device
given argument is a system device, not a path
-m, --device-map=FILE
use FILE as the device map [default=//boot/grub/device.map]
-t, --target=TARGET
%
numactl - Control NUMA policy for processes or shared memory
numactl [ --all ] [ --interleave nodes ] [ --preferred node ] [ --membind nodes ] [ --cpunodebind nodes ]
[ --physcpubind cpus ] [ --localalloc ] [--] command {arguments ...}
numactl --show
numactl --hardware
numactl [ --huge ] [ --offset offset ] [ --shmmode shmmode ] [ --length length ] [ --strict ]
[ --shmid id ] --shm shmkeyfile | --file tmpfsfile
[ --touch ] [ --dump ] [ --dump-nodes ] memory policy
numactl runs processes with a specific NUMA scheduling or memory placement policy.  The policy is set for
command and inherited by all of its children.  In addition it can set persistent policy for shared memory
segments or files.
Use -- before command if using command options that could be confused with numactl options.
%
logger - enter messages into the system log
logger [options] [message]
logger makes entries in the system log.
When  the  optional message argument is present, it is written to the log.  If it is not present, and the
-f option is not given either, then standard input is logged.
-d, --udp
Use datagrams (UDP) only.  By default the connection is  tried  to  the  syslog  port  defined  in
-e, --skip-empty
%
sclient remotehost
sclient  is  a  sample  application,  primarily useful for testing purposes.  It contacts a sample server
MIT
%
cache_dump - dump cache metadata from device or file to standard output
cache_dump [options] {device|file}
cache_dump  dumps  binary cache metadata created by the device-mapper cache target on a device or file to
standard output for analysis or postprocessing in XML format.  XML formated  metadata  can  be  fed  into
device-mapper target) or file.
-r, --repair
Repair the metadata whilst dumping it.
-h, --help
%
python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
installed on your system as well.)
Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
%
glib-compile-resources - GLib resource compiler
glib-compile-resources [OPTION...] {FILE}
glib-compile-resources reads the resource description from FILE and the files that it references and
creates a binary resource bundle that is suitable for use with the GResource API. The resulting bundle is
then written out as-is, or as C source for linking into an application.
The XML resource files normally have the filename extension .gresource.xml. For a detailed description of
the XML file format, see the GResource documentation.
-h, --help
Print help and exit
%
tar - an archiving utility
Traditional usage
tar {A|c|d|r|t|u|x}[GnSkUWOmpsMBiajJzZhPlRvwo] [ARG...]
%
grub-kbdcomp - generate a GRUB keyboard layout file
used by GRUB's keymap command.
Make GRUB keyboard layout file.
-h, --help
print this message and exit
-V, --version
print the version information and exit
%
vgextend — add physical volumes to a volume group
ume group to extend it in size. Moreover, it allows you to re-add a physical volume that has gone missing
previously,  due to a transient device failure, without re-initialising it. Use vgextend --restoremissing
to that effect.
%
look - display lines beginning with a given string
look [options] string [file]
The  look utility displays any lines in file which contain string.  As look performs a binary search, the
with).
If  file  is not specified, the file /usr/share/dict/words is used, only alphanumeric characters are com‐
-a, --alternative
Use the alternative dictionary file.
%
repo-add - package database maintenance utility
repo-add [options] <path-to-db> <package|delta> [<package|delta> ...]
repo-remove [options] <path-to-db> <packagename|delta> [<packagename|delta> ...]
repo-add and repo-remove are two scripts to help build a package database for packages built with
repo-add will update a package database by reading a built package or package delta file. Multiple
packages and/or deltas to add can be specified on the command line.
If a matching “.sig” file is found alongside a package file, the signature will automatically be embedded
into the database.
%
Translate Pod file(s) to Texinfo.  There are two basic modes of operation.  First, by default, each pod
is translated to a standalone Texinfo manual.
Second, if "--base-level" is set higher than 0, each pod is translated to a file suitable for @include,
and one more file with all the @includes is generated, intended to be @included in turn within a hand-
written top-level file.
--appendix-sections
Use appendix sectioning commands (@appendix, ...) instead of the default numbered sectioning Texinfo
@-commands (@chapter, @section, ...).
%
bison - GNU Project parser generator (yacc replacement)
bison [OPTION]... FILE
designed for yacc.
Input files should follow the yacc convention of ending in .y.  Unlike yacc, the generated files  do  not
have fixed names, but instead use the prefix of the input file.  Moreover, if you need to put C++ code in
the input file, you can end his name by a C++-like extension (.ypp or .y++), then bison will follow  your
extension  to  name  the  output  file  (.cpp  or  .c++).  For instance, a grammar description file named
parse.yxx would produce the generated parser in a file named parse.tab.cxx, instead of yacc's y.tab.c  or
old Bison version's parse.tab.c.
%
aclocal [OPTION]...
--automake-acdir=DIR
--system-acdir=DIR
directory holding third-party system-wide files
%
dir - list directory contents
dir [OPTION]... [FILE]...
List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --all
do not ignore entries starting with .
-A, --almost-all
do not list implied . and ..
%
xfs_growfs, xfs_info - expand an XFS filesystem
xfs_growfs  [  -dilnrx  ]  [ -D size ] [ -e rtextsize ] [ -L size ] [ -m maxpct ] [ -t mtab ] [ -R size ]
mount-point
xfs_growfs -V
xfs_info [ -t mtab ] mount-point
xfs_info -V
The existing contents of the filesystem are undisturbed, and the added space becomes available for  addi‐
tional file storage.
%
Reads  a  grap  program as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graphics format)
The output image will be a black-on-white graphic clipped to the smallest possible bounding box that con‐
it  a  border,  set  the  background  transparent, set the image's pixel density, or perform other useful
transformations.
%
blockdev - call block device ioctls from the command line
blockdev [-q] [-v] command [command...] device [device...]
blockdev --report [device...]
The utility blockdev allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line.
-V     Print version and exit.
-q     Be quiet.
-v     Be verbose.
--report
%
dmeventd — Device-mapper event daemon
dmeventd [-d [-d [-d]]] [-f] [-h] [-l] [-R] [-V] [-?]
dmeventd  is  the  event  monitoring  daemon for device-mapper devices.  Library plugins can register and
carry out actions triggered when particular events occur.
LVM PLUGINS
Mirror
Raid
Snapshot
%
zdump - timezone dumper
zdump [ --version ] [ --help ] [ -v ] [ -c [loyear,]hiyear ] [ zonename ... ]
Zdump prints the current time in each zonename named on the command line.
These options are available:
--version
Output version information and exit.
--help Output short usage and exit.
-v     For  each zonename on the command line, print the time at the lowest possible time value, the time
one day after the lowest possible time value, the times both one second before and exactly at each
%
mand [command_options]
key stash file or perform live rollover of the master key.
%
setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
arch [options] [program [argument...]]
setarch --list|-h|-V
various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
architectures depends on the running kernel.
%
filecap - a program to see capabilities
filecap  is a program that prints out a report of programs with file based capabilities. If a file is not
in the report or there is no report at all, no capabilities were found. For expedience, the default is to
check  only  the  directories in the PATH environmental variable. If the -a command line option is given,
then all directories will be checked. If a directory is passed, it will recursively check that directory.
If  a  path  to a file is given, it will only check that file. If the path to the file includes capabili‐
ties, then they are written to the file.
environmental variable is used to show you capabilities on files you are likely to execute.
%
su - run a command with substitute user and group ID
su [options] [-] [user [argument...]]
su allows to run commands with a substitute user and group ID.
When called without arguments, su defaults to running an interactive shell as root.
For  backward compatibility, su defaults to not change the current directory and to only set the environ‐
to always use the --login option (instead of its shortcut -) to avoid side effects caused by mixing envi‐
ronments.
options  found  in other su implementations, such as support for a wheel group, have to be configured via
%
fakeroot - run a command in an environment faking root privileges for file manipulation
fakeroot  [-l|--lib library] [--faked faked-binary] [-i load-file] [-s save-file] [-u|--unknown-is-real ]
[-b|--fd-base ] [-h|--help ] [-v|--version ] [--] [command]
fakeroot runs a command in an environment wherein it appears to have root privileges for  file  manipula‐
root permissions/ownership.  Without fakeroot one would need to have root privileges to create  the  con‐
stituent  files of the archives with the correct permissions and ownership, and then pack them up, or one
would have to construct the archives directly, without using the archiver.
simulate the effect the real library functions would have had, had the user really been root. These wrap‐
per functions are in a shared library /usr/lib/*/libfakeroot-*.so or similar location on  your  platform.
%
lvmchange — change attributes of the logical volume manager
lvmchange
%
cp - copy files and directories
cp [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
cp [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
cp [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --archive
same as -dR --preserve=all
--attributes-only
don't copy the file data, just the attributes
%
setpci - configure PCI devices
setpci [options] devices operations...
setpci is a utility for querying and configuring PCI devices.
All numbers are entered in hexadecimal notation.
Root  privileges  are  necessary for almost all operations, excluding reads of the standard header of the
General options
-v     Tells setpci to be verbose and display detailed information about configuration space accesses.
%
A summary of options is included below.
-M path
Specify path as MANPATH.
-k keyword
%
fsck.btrfs - do nothing, successfully
fsck.btrfs [-aApy] [<device>...]
fsck.btrfs is a type of utility that should exist for any filesystem and is called during system setup
set fs_passno to 0.
If you wish to check the consistency of a BTRFS filesystem or repair a damaged filesystem, see
option (use with care!).
%
migspeed - Test the speed of page migration
migspeed -p pages from-nodes to-nodes
migspeed  attempts  to move a sample of pages from the indicated node to the target node and measures the
time it takes to perform the move.
-p pages
%
era_dump - dump era metadata from device or file to standard output
era_dump [options] {device|file}
era_dump  dumps  binary era metadata created by the device-mapper era target on a device or file to stan‐
dard output for analysis or postprocessing in  XML  format.   XML  formated  metadata  can  be  fed  into
device-mapper target) or file.
-r, --repair
Repair the metadata whilst dumping it.
-h, --help
%
xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
xzegrep ...
xzfgrep ...
lzgrep ...
lzegrep ...
lzfgrep ...
%
ftp - File Transfer Protocol client.
ftp [OPTION...] [HOST [PORT]]
Remote file transfer.
-6, --ipv6
contact IPv6 hosts
-A, --active
enable active mode transfer
%
strings - print the strings of printable characters in files.
strings [-afovV] [-min-len]
[-n min-len] [--bytes=min-len]
[-t radix] [--radix=radix]
[-e encoding] [--encoding=encoding]
[-] [--all] [--print-file-name]
[-T bfdname] [--target=bfdname]
[-w] [--include-all-whitespace]
[-s] [--output-separatorsep_string]
[--help] [--version] file...
long (or the number given with the options below) and are followed by an unprintable character.
%
pcre-config - program to return PCRE configuration
pcre-config [--prefix] [--exec-prefix] [--version] [--libs]
[--cflags] [--cflags-posix]
pcre-config returns the configuration of the installed PCRE libraries and the options required to compile
respectively,  and  are  not  available  if only one of those libraries has been built. If an unavailable
option is encountered, the "usage" information is output.
%
glib-genmarshal - C code marshaller generation utility for GLib closures
glib-genmarshal [OPTION...] [FILE...]
glib-genmarshal is a small utility that generates C code marshallers for callback functions of the
GClosure mechanism in the GObject sublibrary of GLib. The marshaller functions have a standard signature,
they get passed in the invoking closure, an array of value structures holding the callback function
parameters and a value structure for the return value of the callback. The marshaller is then responsible
to call the respective C code function of the closure with all the parameters on the stack and to collect
its return value.
glib-genmarshal takes a list of marshallers to generate as input. The marshaller list is either read from
standard input or from files passed as additional arguments on the command line.
Marshaller list format
%
smartctl - Control and Monitor Utility for SMART Disks
smartctl [options] device
other platforms.]
smartctl controls the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) system built  into  most
ATA/SATA  and SCSI/SAS hard drives and solid-state drives.  The purpose of SMART is to monitor the relia‐
bility of the hard drive and predict drive failures, and to carry out  different  types  of  drive  self-
smartctl also provides support for polling TapeAlert messages from SCSI tape drives and changers.
%
kproplog - display the contents of the Kerberos principal update log
kproplog [-h] [-e num] [-v] kproplog [-R]
The  kproplog command displays the contents of the KDC database update log to standard output.  It can be
used to keep track of incremental updates to the principal database.  The update log  file  contains  the
slave KDC servers.  When updates occur, they are logged to this file.  Subsequently any KDC slave config‐
ured  for incremental updates will request the current data from the master KDC and update their log file
with any updates returned.
The kproplog command requires read access to the update log file.  It will display  update  entries  only
for the KDC it runs on.
If  no  options  are specified, kproplog displays a summary of the update log.  If invoked on the master,
%
xml-config - script to get information about the installed version of GNOME-XML
xml-config [--prefix[=DIR]] [--libs] [--cflags] [--version] [--help]
xml-config  is  a tool that is used to determine the compile and linker flags that should be used to com‐
pile and link programs that use GNOME-XML.
xml-config accepts the following options:
--version
Print the currently installed version of GNOME-XML on the standard output.
--libs  Print the linker flags that are necessary to link a GNOME-XML program.
%
rdisc - network router discovery daemon
rdisc [-abdfrstvV] [-p preference] [-T max_interval] [send_address] [receive_address]
rdisc implements client side of the ICMP router discover protocol.  rdisc is invoked at boot time to pop‐
ulate the network routing tables with default routes.
for  ROUTER_ADVERTISE  messages  from  routers. The received messages are handled by first ignoring those
listed router addresses with which the host does not share a network. Among the remaining  addresses  the
ones  with  the  highest preference are selected as default routers and a default route is entered in the
kernel routing table for each one of them.
Optionally, rdisc can avoid waiting for routers to announce themselves by sending out a few ROUTER_SOLIC‐
%
ifnames - Extract CPP conditionals from a set of files
ifnames [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Scan  all of the C source FILES (or the standard input, if none are given) and write to the standard out‐
put a sorted list of all the identifiers that appear in those  files  in  `#if',  `#elif',  `#ifdef',  or
`#ifndef'  directives.   Print each identifier on a line, followed by a space-separated list of the files
in which that identifier occurs.
-h, --help
print this help, then exit
-V, --version
print version number, then exit
%
showkey - examine the codes sent by the keyboard
showkey [-h|--help] [-a|--ascii] [-s|--scancodes] [-k|--keycodes]
showkey  prints  to  standard output either the scan codes or the keycode or the `ascii' code of each key
or release event, or until it receives a suitable signal, like SIGTERM, from another process.  In `ascii'
mode the program terminates when the user types ^D.
When in scancode dump mode, showkey prints in hexadecimal format each byte received from the keyboard  to
sequences  the  keyboard  sends  at  once  on  a given key press. The scan code dumping mode is primarily
intended for debugging the keyboard driver or other low level interfaces. As such it shouldn't be of much
interest  to the regular end-user. However, some modern keyboards have keys or buttons that produce scan‐
%
systemd-detect-virt - Detect execution in a virtualized environment
systemd-detect-virt detects execution in a virtualized environment. It identifies the virtualization
technology and can distinguish full machine virtualization from container virtualization.
systemd-detect-virt exits with a return value of 0 (success) if a virtualization technology is detected,
and non-zero (error) otherwise. By default, any type of virtualization is detected, and the options
--container and --vm can be used to limit what types of virtualization are detected.
When executed without --quiet will print a short identifier for the detected virtualization technology.
The following technologies are currently identified:
i.e. shared kernel virtualization)
%
ls - list directory contents
ls [OPTION]... [FILE]...
List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-a, --all
do not ignore entries starting with .
-A, --almost-all
do not list implied . and ..
%
gpgparsemail - Parse a mail message into an annotated format
gpgparsemail [options] [file]
The gpgparsemail is a utility currently only useful for debugging.  Run it with --help for usage informa‐
tion.
%
unix_update [...]
unix_update is a helper program for the pam_unix module that updates the password of a given user. It is
not intended to be run directly from the command line and logs a security violation if done so.
The purpose of the helper is to enable tighter confinement of login and password changing services. The
helper is thus called only when SELinux is enabled on the system.
The interface of the helper - command line options, and input/output data format are internal to the
pam_unix module and it should not be called directly from applications.
%
applygnupgdefaults - Run gpgconf --apply-defaults for all users.
applygnupgdefaults
with an existing GnuPG home directory.  Admins might want to use this script to update he GnuPG  configu‐
applygnupgdefaults is invoked by root as:
applygnupgdefaults
%
libnetcfg - configure libnet
standard Perl distribution, but the libnetcfg can be used for any libnet installation.
Without arguments libnetcfg displays the current configuration.
$ libnetcfg
# old config ./libnet.cfg
ftp_int_passive      0
ftp_testhost         ftp.funet.fi
inet_domain          none.such
nntp_hosts           nntp.none.such
ph_hosts
%
--infile=<name> --outfile=<name>
--podpath=<name>:...:<name> --podroot=<name>
--cachedir=<name> --flush --recurse --norecurse
--quiet --noquiet --verbose --noverbose
--index --noindex --backlink --nobacklink
--header --noheader --poderrors --nopoderrors
--css=<URL> --title=<name>
Converts files from pod format (see perlpod) to HTML format.
%
podchecker - check the syntax of POD format documentation files
podchecker [-help] [-man] [-(no)warnings] [file ...]
-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
-man    Print the manual page and exit.
-warnings -nowarnings
Turn on/off printing of warnings. Repeating -warnings increases the warning level, i.e. more
warnings are printed. Currently increasing to level two causes flagging of unescaped "<,>"
characters.
file    The pathname of a POD file to syntax-check (defaults to standard input).
%
piconv [-f from_encoding] [-t to_encoding]
[-p|--perlqq|--htmlcref|--xmlcref] [-C N|-c] [-D] [-S scheme]
[-s string|file...]
piconv -l
piconv -r encoding_alias
piconv -h
piconv is perl version of iconv, a character encoding converter widely available for various Unixen
piconv converts the character encoding of either STDIN or files specified in the argument and prints out
to STDOUT.
%
encguess - guess character encodings of files
encguess [switches] filename...
SWITCHES
-h
show this message and exit.
-s
specify a list of "suspect encoding types" to test, seperated by either ":" or ","
-S
output a list of all acceptable encoding types that can be used with the -s param
%
[--fixed=font] [--fixedbold=font] [--fixeditalic=font]
[--fixedbolditalic=font] [--name=name] [--nourls]
[--official] [--quotes=quotes] [--release=version]
[input [output] ...]
%
ptardiff - program that diffs an extracted archive against an unextracted one
ptardiff is a small program that diffs an extracted archive
against an unextracted one, using the perl module Archive::Tar.
Provide the progam with an ARCHIVE_FILE and it will look up all
the files with in the archive, scan the current working directory
for a file with the name and diff it against the contents of the
archive.
ptardiff ARCHIVE_FILE
ptardiff -h
%
perlbug - how to submit bug reports on Perl
perlbug
perlbug [ -v ] [ -a address ] [ -s subject ] [ -b body | -f inputfile ] [ -F outputfile ]
[ -r returnaddress ] [ -e editor ] [ -c adminaddress | -C ] [ -S ] [ -t ]  [ -d ]  [ -A ]  [ -h ] [ -T ]
perlbug [ -v ] [ -r returnaddress ]
[ -A ] [ -ok | -okay | -nok | -nokay ]
perlthanks
the modules which ship with it.
%
Tcl Encoding Files (.enc).  Besides being used internally during the build process of the Encode module,
Quick Guide
If you want to know as little about Perl as possible but need to add a new encoding, just read this
chapter and forget the rest.
0.  Have a .ucm file ready.  You can get it from somewhere or you can write your own from scratch or you
%
cpan - easily interact with CPAN from the command line
# with arguments and no switches, installs specified modules
cpan module_name [ module_name ... ]
# with switches, installs modules with extra behavior
cpan [-cfgimtTw] module_name [ module_name ... ]
# with just the dot, install from the distribution in the
# current directory
cpan .
# without arguments, starts CPAN.pm shell
cpan
# force install modules (usually those that fail tests)
%
[-q quotes] [--nourls] [--stderr] [-w width]
[input [output ...]]
from POD source.  It can optionally use either termcap sequences or ANSI color escape sequences to format
the text.
input is the file to read for POD source (the POD can be embedded in code).  If input isn't given, it
defaults to "STDIN".  output, if given, is the file to which to write the formatted output.  If output
isn't given, the formatted output is written to "STDOUT".  Several POD files can be processed in the same
%
-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
-man    Print this command's manual page and exit.
-exit exitval
The exit status value to return.
-output outfile
%
prove - Run tests through a TAP harness.
prove [options] [files or directories]
Boolean options:
-v,  --verbose         Print all test lines.
-l,  --lib             Add 'lib' to the path for your tests (-Ilib).
-b,  --blib            Add 'blib/lib' and 'blib/arch' to the path for
your tests
-s,  --shuffle         Run the tests in random order.
-c,  --color           Colored test output (default).
--nocolor         Do not color test output.
--count           Show the X/Y test count when not verbose
(default)
%
easily run while in /usr/include:
or
or
%
diagnostics, splain - produce verbose warning diagnostics
Using the "diagnostics" pragma:
use diagnostics;
use diagnostics -verbose;
enable  diagnostics;
disable diagnostics;
Using the "splain" standalone filter program:
splain [-v] [-p] diag.out
Using diagnostics to get stack traces from a misbehaving script:
%
ptar - a tar-like program written in perl
ptar is a small, tar look-alike program that uses the perl module
Archive::Tar to extract, create and list tar archives.
ptar -c [-v] [-z] [-C] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -] FILE FILE ...
ptar -c [-v] [-z] [-C] [-T index | -] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
ptar -x [-v] [-z] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
ptar -t [-z] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
ptar -h
c   Create ARCHIVE_FILE or STDOUT (-) from FILE
x   Extract from ARCHIVE_FILE or STDIN (-)
t   List the contents of ARCHIVE_FILE or STDIN (-)
%
podselect - print selected sections of pod documentation on standard output
podselect [-help] [-man] [-section section-spec] [file ...]
-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
-man    Print the manual page and exit.
-section section-spec
Specify a section to include in the output.  See "SECTION SPECIFICATIONS" in Pod::Parser for the
file    The pathname of a file from which to select sections of pod documentation (defaults to standard
input).
%
shasum - Print or Check SHA Checksums
Print or check SHA checksums.
With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-b, --binary      read in binary mode
-c, --check       read SHA sums from the FILEs and check them
-t, --text        read in text mode (default)
-U, --UNIVERSAL   read in Universal Newlines mode
produces same digest on Windows/Unix/Mac
ASCII '0' interpreted as 0-bit,
all other characters ignored
%
json_pp - JSON::PP command utility
json_pp [-v] [-f from_format] [-t to_format] [-json_opt options_to_json]
from json_xs and modified.
The default input format is json and the default output format is json with pretty option.
-f
-f from_format
Reads a data in the given format from STDIN.
%
perlbug - how to submit bug reports on Perl
perlbug
perlbug [ -v ] [ -a address ] [ -s subject ] [ -b body | -f inputfile ] [ -F outputfile ]
[ -r returnaddress ] [ -e editor ] [ -c adminaddress | -C ] [ -S ] [ -t ]  [ -d ]  [ -A ]  [ -h ] [ -T ]
perlbug [ -v ] [ -r returnaddress ]
[ -A ] [ -ok | -okay | -nok | -nokay ]
perlthanks
the modules which ship with it.
%
Usually, your old .pl file will still work fine and you should only use this tool if you plan to update
LIMITATIONS
It's just a first step, but it's usually a good first step.
Larry Wall <larry@wall.org>
%
perldoc - Look up Perl documentation in Pod format.
perldoc [-h] [-D] [-t] [-u] [-m] [-l] [-F]
[-i] [-V] [-T] [-r]
[-d destination_file]
[-o formatname]
[-w formatteroption:value]
[-n nroff-replacement]
[-X]
[-L language_code]
Examples:
perldoc -f BuiltinFunction
%
corelist - a commandline frontend to Module::CoreList
See Module::CoreList for one.
corelist -v
corelist [-r <PerlVersion>] ...
corelist --diff PerlVersion PerlVersion
the perls Module::CoreList knows about.
%
ptargrep - Apply pattern matching to the contents of files in a tar archive
ptargrep [options] <pattern> <tar file> ...
Options:
--basename|-b     ignore directory paths from archive
--list-only|-l    list matching filenames rather than extracting matches
--verbose|-v      write debugging message to STDERR
--help|-?         detailed help message
You might use this to identify all files in an archive which contain lines matching the specified pattern
and either print out the pathnames or extract the files.
%
xsubpp - compiler to convert Perl XS code into C code
xsubpp [-v] [-except] [-s pattern] [-prototypes] [-noversioncheck] [-nolinenumbers] [-nooptimize]
[-typemap typemap] [-output filename]... file.xs
other Perl module build tools.
xsubpp will compile XS code into C code by embedding the constructs necessary to let C functions
manipulate Perl values and creates the glue necessary to let Perl access those functions.  The compiler
uses typemaps to determine how to map C function parameters and variables to Perl values.
The compiler will search for typemap files called typemap.  It will use the following search path to find
default typemaps, with the rightmost typemap taking precedence.
%
Options:
-n  do not generate perl code  (default when invoked as pstruct)
-v  generate perl code, with C decls as comments
-i  do NOT recompute sizes for intrinsic datatypes
%
to retrieve the value of any #define statement which was in the C header files.
The module_name will be used for the name of the extension.  If module_name is not supplied then the name
of the first header file will be used, with the first character capitalized.
If the extension might need extra libraries, they should be included here.  The extension Makefile.PL
will take care of checking whether the libraries actually exist and how they should be loaded.  The extra
libraries should be specified in the form -lm -lposix, etc, just as on the cc command line.  By default,
%
perlivp - Perl Installation Verification Procedure
perlivp [-p] [-v] [-h]
The perlivp program is set up at Perl source code build time to test the Perl version it was built under.
It can be used after running:
make install
(or your platform's equivalent procedure) to verify that perl and its libraries have been installed
correctly.  A correct installation is verified by output that looks like:
%
Options:
-n  do not generate perl code  (default when invoked as pstruct)
-v  generate perl code, with C decls as comments
-i  do NOT recompute sizes for intrinsic datatypes
%
instmodsh - A shell to examine installed modules
instmodsh
A little interface to ExtUtils::Installed to examine installed modules, validate your packlists and even
create a tarball from an installed module.
ExtUtils::Installed
%
zipdetails - display the internal structure of zip files
zipdetaile [-v] zipfile.zip
zipdetails -h
Zipdetails displays information about the internal record structure of the zip file. It is not concerned
with displaying any details of the compressed data stored in the zip file.
The program assumes prior understanding of the internal structure of a Zip file. You should have a copy
-v   Enable Verbose mode
-h   Display help
%